9922720_RZR_800 2011 Polaris Ranger RZR SW Service Manual

User Manual: 2011 Polaris Ranger RZR SW Service Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 346

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2011 RANGER RZR SW
FOREWORD
The information printed within this publication includes the latest product information at time of print. The most recent
version of this Service Manual is available in electronic format at www.polarisdealers.com.
This Service Manual is designed primarily for use by certified Polaris Master Service Dealer technicians in a properly
equipped shop and should be kept available for reference. All references to left and right side of the vehicle are from
the operator's perspective when seated in a normal riding position.
Some procedures outlined in this manual require a sound knowledge of mechanical theory, tool use, and shop
procedures in order to perform the work safely and correctly. Technicians should read the text and be familiar with the
service procedures before starting any repair. Certain procedures require the use of special tools. Use only the proper
tools as specified. If you have any doubt as to your ability to perform any of the procedures outlined in this Service
Manual, contact an authorized dealer for service.
We value your input and appreciate any assistance you can provide in helping make these publications more useful.
Please provide any feedback you may have regarding this manual. Authorized dealers can submit feedback using 'Ask
Polaris'. Click on 'Ask Polaris', and then click on 'Publications Question'.
Consumers, please provide your feedback in writing to: Polaris Industries Inc. ATTN: Service Publications Department,
2100 Hwy 55, Medina, MN 55340.

Publication Printed July 2010 (PN 9922720-CD)
© Copyright 2010 Polaris Sales Inc. All information contained within this publication is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. Due to constant
improvements in the design and quality of production components, some minor discrepancies may result between the actual vehicle and the information presented in this
publication. Depictions and/or procedures in this publication are intended for reference use only. No liability can be accepted for omissions or inaccuracies. Any
reprinting or reuse of the depictions and/or procedures contained within, whether whole or in part, is expressly prohibited. Printed in U.S.A.

UNDERSTANDING MANUAL SAFETY LABELS AND DIRECTIONS
Throughout this manual, important information is brought to your attention by the following symbols:

WARNING

SAFETY ALERT WARNING indicates a potential hazard that may result in severe injury or death to the operator, bystander or
person(s) inspecting or servicing the vehicle.

CAUTION

SAFETY ALERT CAUTION indicates a potential hazard that may result in minor personal injury or damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid vehicle damage or property damage.
NOTE:
NOTE provides key information by clarifying instructions.
IMPORTANT:
IMPORTANT provides key reminders during disassembly, assembly and inspection of components.

TRADEMARKS
POLARIS ACKNOWLEDGES THE FOLLOWING PRODUCTS MENTIONED IN THIS MANUAL:
Loctite, Registered Trademark of the Loctite Corporation
Nyogel, Trademark of Wm. F. Nye Co.
Fluke, Registered Trademark of John Fluke Mfg. Co.
Mity-Vac, Registered Trademark of Neward Enterprises, Inc.
Torx, Registered Trademark of Textron
Hilliard, Trademark of the Hilliard Corporation
Warn, Trademark of Warn Industries
FOX, Registered Trademark of FOX RACING SHOX
RydeFX, Registered Trademark of ArvinMeritor
Some Polaris factory publications can be downloaded from www.polarisindustries.com, purchased from www.purepolaris.com or
by contacting the nearest Polaris dealer.

GENERAL INFORMATION

MAINTENANCE

ENGINE

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION

CLUTCHING

FINAL DRIVE

TRANSMISSION

BRAKES

ELECTRICAL

GENERAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

MODEL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
MODEL IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
ENGINE DESIGNATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
VIN IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
VEHICLE AND ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2

VEHICLE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
PUBLICATION NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3

SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
MODEL: 2011 RANGER RZR SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
MODEL: 2011 RANGER RZR SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5

MISC. SPECIFICATIONS AND CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
CONVERSION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
STANDARD TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
SAE TAP / DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
METRIC TAP / DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8
GLOSSARY OF TERMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9

1.1

GENERAL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION
Model Identification
The machine model number must be used with any correspondence regarding warranty or service.

Model Year
Designation

}
}
}

}

Machine Model Number Identification
M 11 VE 76 AA
Emissions &
Model Option
Basic Chassis
Designation

Engine Designation

Engine Designation Number
1204276 RZR800HO-11 ................................................................... Twin Cylinder, Liquid Cooled, OHV 4 Stroke, Electric Start

VIN Identification
World
Mfg. ID

Vehicle Identifier

Vehicle Description

}

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 X A V E 7 6 A * B P 0 0 0 0 0 0
Body Style

Engine

Model
Year

Emissions
Plant No.
Powertrain
Check Digit

Individual Serial No.
* This could be either
a number or a letter

Vehicle and Engine Serial Number Location
Whenever corresponding about a Polaris ORV, refer to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and the engine serial number.
The VIN can be found stamped on a portion of the front left frame rail, close to the left front wheel (see Figure 1-1).
The engine model and serial number can be found on a decal applied to the cylinder on the side of the engine (see Figure 1-2).

Engine Serial
Number

VIN

1.2

Figure 1-1

Figure 1-2

GENERAL INFORMATION
VEHICLE INFORMATION

Publication Numbers
Model
2011 RANGER RZR SW

Model No.

Owner’s Manual

Parts Manual

9923122

9923264

M11VE76AA

NOTE: When ordering service parts be sure to use the correct parts manual.
NOTE: Polaris factory publications can be found at www.polarisindustries.com or purchased from
www.purepolaris.com.

SPECIAL TOOLS
Special tools may be required while servicing this vehicle. Some of the tools listed or depicted are mandatory, while other tools maybe
substituted with a similar tool, if available. Polaris recommends the use of Polaris Special Tools when servicing any Polaris product.
Dealers may order special tools through Polaris’ official tool supplier, SPX Corporation, by phone at 1-800-328-6657 or on-line at
http://polaris.spx.com/.

1.3

GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL: 2011 RANGER RZR SW
MODEL NUMBER: M11VE76AA
ENGINE NUMBER: 1204276
Category

Dimension / Capacity

Length

112 in. / 284.5 cm

Width

59 in. / 150 cm

Height

72.5 in. / 184 cm

Wheel Base

77 in. / 196 cm

Ground Clearance

13 in. / 33 cm

Dry Weight

1112 lbs. / 504 kg

Gross Vehicle Weight

2148 lbs. / 974 kg

Front Storage Capacity

25 lbs. / 11.3 kg

Cargo Box Capacity

500 lbs. / 227 kg

Maximum Weight
Capacity (Payload)

1000 lbs. / 454 kg
(Includes rider(s), cargo, accessories
and trailer tongue weight)

Hitch Towing Capacity

1500 lbs. / 680 kg

Hitch Tongue Capacity

150 lbs. / 68 kg

1.4

GENERAL INFORMATION
MODEL: 2011 RANGER RZR SW
MODEL NUMBER: M11VE76AA
ENGINE NUMBER: 1204276
Engine
Platform

H.O. Domestic Twin Cylinder,
Liquid Cooled, 4-Stroke

Engine Number

1204276

Engine Displacement

760cc H.O.

Number of Cylinders

Bore & Stroke (mm)

80 x 76.5 mm

Compression Ratio

11:1

Compression Pressure

165 - 185 psi

Engine Idle Speed

1250 ± 200 RPM

Engine Max Operating RPM

6600 ± 200 RPM

Lubrication

Pressurized Wet Sump

Oil Requirements

PS-4 Plus Synthetic

Oil Capacity

2 qts. / 1.9 liters

Coolant Capacity

4.8 qts. / 4.5 liters

Overheat Warning

Instrument Cluster Indicator

Exhaust System

Dual Headpipe / Single Silencer

Drivetrain
Transmission Type

Polaris Automatic PVT

Drive Gear Ratio - Front Output
Reverse
Low
High

8.3398:1
7.1474:1
2.8226:1

Drive Gear Ratio - Rear Output
Reverse
Low
High

27.0003:1
23.1398:1
9.1381:1

Shift Type

In Line Shift - H / L / N / R / P

Front Gearcase
Fluid Type / Capacity

Polaris Demand Drive Plus
6.75 oz. (200 ml)

Transmission: Main Gearcase
Fluid Type / Capacity

Polaris AGL Plus
24 oz. (710 ml)

Transmission: Transfer Case
Fluid Type / Capacity

Polaris AGL Plus
14 oz. (414 ml)

Rear Gearcase
Fluid Type / Capacity

Polaris Premium ADF
22 oz. (650 ml)

Belt

3211133
Steering / Suspension
Independent Dual A-arm
FOX™ 2.0 Piggyback

Front Suspension / Shock

Fuel System

Front Travel

12 in. / 30.5 cm

Electronic Fuel Pump (in tank)

Rear Suspension / Shock

Fuel Pressure

45 ± 2 psi (310 ± 14 kPa)

Rolled IRS w/Anti-Sway Bar
FOX™ 2.0 Piggyback

Rear Travel

12 in. / 30.5 cm

Fuel Filters

See Chapter 4

Fuel Capacity / Requirement

7.25 gal. (27.4 liters)
87 Octane (minimum)

Shock Preload Adjustment
Front / Rear

Threaded Spanner Wrench
Adjustment

Toe Out

1/8 - 1/4 in. (3 - 6.4 mm)

Fuel System Type

Bosch M17 EFI

Fuel Delivery

Electrical
Alternator Max Output

500 Watts @ 3000 RPM

Headlights

2 - Halogen: Low 55 W / High 60 W

Tail / Brake

2 - 6 Watts / 2 - 27 Watts

Starting System

Wheels / Brakes
Front Wheel Size
Front Tire Type / Size

12 x 6 / Steel
Maxxis Bighorn / 26 x 9 R12

Electric Start

Rear Wheel Size
Rear Tire Type / Size

12 x 6 / Steel
Maxxis Bighorn / 26 x 9 R12

Tire Air Pressure - Front / Rear

18 psi (124 kPa)

Brake - Front / Rear

Foot Actuated - 4 Wheel
Hydraulic Disc

Brake Fluid

DOT 4

Ignition System

Bosch M17 (ECU Controlled)

Ignition Timing (Variable)

3° - 10° BTDC @ 1200 RPM

Spark plug / Gap

RC7YC3 / .035 in. (0.9 mm)

Battery

Yuasa YTX20HL /
18 Amp Hr. / 310 CCA / 12 Volt

Instrument Type

Multifunction Instrument Cluster

DC Outlet

(2) Standard 12 Volt

Relays

Chassis / EFI / Fan
Fuel Pump / TURF / Blackout

Circuit Breaker

Fan Motor: 20 Amp

Fuses

Lights: 20 Amp
Fuel Pump: 10 Amp
Drive: 10 Amp
EFI: 20 Amp
Accessory: 20 Amp

CLUTCH CHART
Altitude

Meters
(Feet)

Shift
Weight

Drive
Spring

Driven
Spring

23-62
(5632337)

Black
Blk / Almond
(7043594) (7043167)

1500-3700
23-58
(5000 - 12000) (5632218)

Black
Blk / Almond
(7043594) (7043167)

0-1500
(0-5000)

1.5

GENERAL INFORMATION
MISC. SPECIFICATIONS AND CHARTS
Conversion Table

°C to °F: 9/5(°C + 32) = °F

1.6

°F to °C: 5/9(°F - 32) = °C

GENERAL INFORMATION
Standard Torque Specifications
The following torque specifications are to be used only as a general guideline. There are exceptions in the steering, suspension, and
engine areas. Always consult the exploded views or each manual section for torque values of fasteners before using standard torque.

1.7

GENERAL INFORMATION
SAE Tap / Drill Sizes

Metric Tap / Drill Sizes

1.8

Decimal Equivalents

GENERAL INFORMATION
Glossary of Terms
ABDC: After bottom dead center.
ACV: Alternating current voltage.
Alternator: Electrical generator producing voltage alternating current.
ATDC: After top dead center.
BBDC: Before bottom dead center.
BDC: Bottom dead center.
BTDC: Before top dead center.
CC: Cubic centimeters.
Center Distance: Distance between center of crankshaft and center of driven clutch shaft.
Chain Pitch: Distance between chain link pins (No. 35 = 3/8" or 1 cm). Polaris measures chain length in number of pitches.
CI: Cubic inches.
Clutch Buttons: Plastic bushings which aid rotation of the movable sheave in the drive and driven clutch.
Clutch Offset: Drive and driven clutches are offset so that drive belt will stay nearly straight as it moves along the clutch face.
Clutch Weights: Three levers in the drive clutch which relative to their weight, profile and engine RPM cause the drive clutch to
close and grip the drive belt.
Crankshaft Run-Out: Run-out or "bend" of crankshaft measured with a dial indicator while crankshaft is supported between centers
on V blocks or resting in crankcase. Measure at various points especially at PTO.
DCV: Direct current voltage
CVT: Centrifugal Variable Transmission (Drive Clutch System)
DCV: Direct current voltage.
Dial Bore Gauge: A cylinder measuring instrument which uses a dial indicator. Good for showing taper and out-of-round in the
cylinder bore.
Electrical Open: Open circuit. An electrical circuit which isn't complete.
Electrical Short: Short circuit. An electrical circuit which is completed before the current reaches the intended load. (i.e. a bare wire
touching the chassis).
End Seals: Rubber seals at each end of the crankshaft.
Engagement RPM: Engine RPM at which the drive clutch engages to make contact with the drive belt.
ft.: Foot/feet.
Foot Pound: Ft. lb. A force of one pound at the end of a lever one foot in length, applied in a rotational direction.
g: Gram. Unit of weight in the metric system.
gal.: Gallon.
ID: Inside diameter.
in.: Inch/inches.
Inch Pound: In. lb. 12 in. lbs. = 1 ft. lb.
kg/cm²: Kilograms per square centimeter.
kg-m: Kilogram meters.
Kilogram/meter: A force of one kilogram at the end of a lever one meter in length, applied in a rotational direction.
l or ltr: Liter.
lbs/in²: Pounds per square inch.
Left or Right Side: Always referred to based on normal operating position of the driver.
m: Meter/meters.
Mag: Magneto.
Magnetic Induction: As a conductor (coil) is moved through a magnetic field, a voltage will be generated in the windings.
Mechanical energy is converted to electrical energy in the stator.
mi.: Mile/miles.
mm: Millimeter. Unit of length in the metric system. 1 mm = approximately .040".
Nm: Newton meters.
OD: Outside diameter.
Ohm: The unit of electrical resistance opposing current flow.
oz.: Ounce/ounces.
Piston Clearance: Total distance between piston and cylinder wall.
psi.: Pounds per square inch.
PTO: Power take off.
PVT: Polaris Variable Transmission (Drive Clutch system)
qt.: Quart/quarts.
Regulator: Voltage regulator. Regulates battery charging system output at approx. 14.5 DCV as engine RPM increases.
Reservoir Tank: The fill tank in the liquid cooling system.
Resistance: In the mechanical sense, friction or load. In the electrical sense, ohms, resulting in energy conversion to heat.
RPM: Revolutions per minute.
Seized Piston: Galling of the sides of a piston. Usually there is a transfer of aluminum from the piston onto the cylinder wall.
Possible causes: 1) improper lubrication; 2) excessive temperatures; 3) insufficient piston clearance; 4) stuck piston rings.
Stator Plate: The plate mounted under the flywheel supporting the battery charging coils.
TDC: Top dead center. Piston's most outward travel from crankshaft.
Volt: The unit of measure for electrical pressure of electromotive force. Measured by a voltmeter in parallel with the circuit.
Watt: Unit of electrical power. Watts = amperes x volts.
WOT: Wide open throttle.

1.9

GENERAL INFORMATION

NOTES

1.10

MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 2
MAINTENANCE
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
BREAK-IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
MAINTENANCE CHART KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
PRE-RIDE - 25 HOUR MAINTENANCE INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
50 - 300 HOUR MAINTENANCE INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
MAINTENANCE QUICK REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
MAINTENANCE QUICK REFERENCE, CONTINUED..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
GREASE LUBRICATION POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8

LUBRICANTS / SERVICE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
GENERAL VEHICLE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
PRE-RIDE / DAILY INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
FRAME, NUTS, BOLTS, AND FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
SHIFT CABLE INSPECTION / ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10

FUEL SYSTEM AND AIR INTAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
FUEL LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
FUEL PUMP / FUEL FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
VENT LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
THROTTLE PEDAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
THROTTLE FREEPLAY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
AIR FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13

ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
ENGINE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
ENGINE BREATHER HOSE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION MOUNTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
COMPRESSION AND LEAKDOWN TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
EXHAUST - SPARK ARRESTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17

TRANSMISSION AND GEARCASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
TRANSMISSION / GEARCASE SPECIFICATION CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
FRONT GEARCASE LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
REAR GEARCASE LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21

COOLING SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
COOLING SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
COOLANT STRENGTH / TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
COOLING SYSTEM HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
COOLANT DRAIN / RADIATOR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23

FINAL DRIVE / WHEEL AND TIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
WHEEL AND HUB TORQUE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
WHEEL REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
WHEEL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
TIRE INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
TIRE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
DRIVE SHAFT BOOT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25

2.1

MAINTENANCE
ELECTRICAL AND IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
BATTERY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
BATTERY REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
BATTERY INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
BATTERY OFF SEASON STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
BATTERY CHARGING (MAINTENANCE FREE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
SPARK PLUG SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
ENGINE TO FRAME GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27

STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
STEERING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
STEERING WHEEL FREEPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
TIE ROD END / WHEEL HUB INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
WHEEL TOE ALIGNMENT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
WHEEL TOE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29

SUSPENSION (FOX™). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
SPRING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
SHOCK COMPRESSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31

BRAKE SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
BRAKE FLUID INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
BRAKE PAD / DISC INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
BRAKE HOSE AND FITTING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32

MAINTENANCE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33

2.2

MAINTENANCE
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART
Periodic Maintenance Overview
Inspection, adjustment and lubrication of important components are explained in the periodic maintenance chart.
Inspect, clean, lubricate, adjust and replace parts as necessary. When inspection reveals the need for replacement parts, use
genuine Pure Polaris parts available from your Polaris dealer.
NOTE: Service and adjustments are critical. If you’re not familiar with safe service and adjustment
procedures, have a qualified dealer perform these operations.
Maintenance intervals in the following chart are based upon average riding conditions and an average vehicle speed of approximately
10 miles per hour. Vehicles subjected to severe use must be inspected and serviced more frequently.
Severe Use Definition
• Frequent immersion in mud, water or sand
• Racing or race-style high RPM use
• Prolonged low speed, heavy load operation
• Extended idle
• Short trip cold weather operation
Pay special attention to the oil level. A rise in oil level during cold weather can indicate contaminants collecting in the oil sump or
crankcase. Change oil immediately if the oil level begins to rise. Monitor the oil level, and if it continues to rise, discontinue use
and determine the cause or see your dealer.

Break-In Period
The break-in period consists of the first 25 hours of operation, or the time it takes to use 14 gallons (53 liters) of fuel. Careful treatment
of a new engine and drive components will result in more efficient performance and longer life for these components.
• Drive vehicle slowly at first while varying the throttle position. Do not operate at sustained idle.
• Pull only light loads.
• Perform regular checks on fluid levels and other areas outlined on the daily pre-ride inspection checklist.
• Change both the engine oil and filter after 25 hours or one month.
• See “Owner’s Manual” for additional break-in information.

Maintenance Chart Key
The following symbols denote potential items to be aware of during maintenance:
 = CAUTION: Due to the nature of these adjustments, it is recommended this service be performed by an
authorized Polaris dealer.

= SEVERE USE ITEM: See information provided above.
E = Emission Control System Service (California).
NOTE: Inspection may reveal the need for replacement parts. Always use genuine Polaris parts.

WARNING
Improperly performing the procedures marked could result in component failure and lead to serious injury or death.
Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services.

2.3

MAINTENANCE
Pre-Ride - 25 Hour Maintenance Interval
Maintenance Interval
(whichever comes first)

Item
Hours

Calendar

Miles
(KM)

 Steering

Pre-Ride

 Front Suspension
 Rear Suspension

Pre-Ride

Tires

Remarks

 Brake Fluid Level
 Brake Pedal Travel

Pre-Ride

Brake Systems

Pre-Ride

Wheels / Fasteners

Pre-Ride

Frame Fasteners

Pre-Ride

 Engine Oil Level

Pre-Ride

 Air Filter

Pre-Ride

Inspect; replace as needed

Coolant Level

Daily

Check level daily, change coolant every 2
years

Head Lamp / Tail Lamp

Daily

Check operation; apply dielectric grease if
replacing

Weekly

Inspect; replace as needed

10 H

Monthly

100 (160)

Inspect periodically

Battery

25 H

Monthly

250 (400)

Check terminals; clean; test

Front Gearcase Oil
(Demand Drive Plus)

25 H

Monthly

250 (400)

Inspect level; change yearly

25 H

Monthly

250 (400)

Inspect level; change yearly

 Air Filter
E

 Brake Pad Wear




 Rear Gearcase Oil
(ATV Angle Drive Fluid)

Make adjustments as needed.
See Pre-Ride Checklist on Page 2.10.



Transmission - Main
(AGL Gearcase Lubricant)

25 H

Monthly

250 (400)

Inspect level; change yearly



Transmission - Transfer
(AGL Gearcase Lubricant)

25 H

Monthly

250 (400)

Inspect level; change yearly

 Engine Breather Filter
E (if equipped)

25 H

Monthly

250 (400)

Inspect; replace if necessary

 Engine Oil Change
E (Break-In Period)

25 H

250 (400)

Perform a break-in oil change at one month

Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
E Emission Control System Service (California)
 Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services.

2.4

MAINTENANCE
50 - 300 Hour Maintenance Interval
Maintenance Interval
(whichever comes first)

Item

Remarks

Hours

Calendar

Miles
(KM)

 Throttle Cable / Throttle
E Pedal

50 H

300 (500)

Inspect; adjust; lubricate; replace if
necessary

Throttle Body Air Intake
Ducts / Flange

50 H

300 (500)

Inspect ducts for proper sealing / air leaks

50 H

500 (800)

Lubricate all fittings, pivots, cables, etc.

50 H

500 (800)

Inspect, lubricate, adjust

 Steering

50 H

500 (800)

Lubricate

 Front Suspension
 Rear Suspension

50 H

500 (800)

Lubricate

50 H

500 (800)

Lubricate

50 H

500 (800)

Inspect coolant strength seasonally;
pressure test system yearly


Fuel System
E

100 H

12 M

600 (1000)

Check for leaks at fill cap, fuel line / rail, and
fuel pump. Replace lines every two years.


Spark Plug
E

100 H

12 M

600 (1000)

Inspect; replace as needed

 Engine Oil & Filter Change 100 H

1000 (1600)

Perform a break-in oil change at 25 hours
or one month / always replace oil filter
when changing engine oil

100 H

12 M

1000 (1600)

Inspect; replace as needed

 General Lubrication
Shift Linkage

Cooling System

Drive Belt

 Radiator
 Cooling Hoses
 Engine Assembly Mounts

100 H

12 M

1000 (1600)

Inspect; clean external surfaces

100 H

12 M

1000 (1600)

Inspect for leaks

100 H

12 M

1000 (1600)

Inspect, torque to specification

Exhaust Muffler / Pipe

100 H

12 M

1000 (1600)

Inspect

100 H

12 M

1000 (1600)

Inspect for wear, routing, security; apply
dielectric grease to connectors subjected
to water, mud, etc.

 Clutches (Drive and Driven) 100 H

12 M

1000 (1600)

Inspect; clean; replace worn parts

 Front Wheel Bearings

100 H

12 M

1000 (1600)

Inspect; replace as needed

 Shocks

100 H

Visually inspect shock seals

 Brake Fluid

200 H

24 M

2000 (3200)

Change every two years (DOT 4)

300 H

36 M

3000 (4800)

Clean out

500 H

12 M

 Wiring

Spark Arrestor

 Shocks


 Toe Adjustment
Headlight Aim

Change shock oil and seals

Inspect periodically; adjust when parts are
replaced

Adjust as needed

 Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use.
E Emission Control System Service (California)
 Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services.

2.5

MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Quick Reference
III. #

Item

Lube Rec.

Method

Frequency*

Engine Oil

Polaris PS-4 Plus
Performance Synthetic
4-Cycle Engine Oil

Add oil to proper level on
dipstick

Change after 1st month or first
25 hours of operation, 100 hours
thereafter; Change more often
(25 hours) in severe duty
conditions or short trip cold
weather operation

Engine Coolant

Polaris 60/40 Coolant

Maintain coolant level in
coolant reservoir bottle.

Check level daily, change
coolant every 2 years

Brake Fluid

Maintain fluid level between
Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid “MAX and “MIN” lines on the
master cylinder reservoir

* More often under severe use, such as operated in water or under severe loads.

2.6

Check level during pre-ride
inspection; change fluid every
two years

MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Quick Reference, Continued.....
III. #

Item

Lube Rec.

Method

Frequency*

Add lubricant until it is visible
at the fill hole threads

Check level every 25 hours;
change fluid yearly

Polaris ATV Angle Drive
Fluid (ADF)

Add lubricant until it is visible
at the fill hole threads

Check level every 25 hours;
change fluid yearly

Polaris AGL Plus
Gearcase Lubricant

Add lubricant until it is visible
at the fill hole threads

Check level every 25 hours;
change lubricant yearly

Front Gearcase Polaris Demand Drive Plus

Rear Gearcase

Transmission

* More often under severe use, such as operated in water or under severe loads.

2.7

MAINTENANCE
Grease Lubrication Points
There are grease fittings at each A-arms pivot point, each front or rear stabilizer bushing, and on the front propshaft yoke. Apply
grease until all traces of water have been purged out at each of these areas.
Item

Recommended Lube

Method

Frequency

Polaris Premium U-Joint Grease

Grease fittings every 500
miles (800 km).

Grease before long periods
of storage, and after
thoroughly washing or
submerging the vehicle.

Front Propshaft Yoke
A-arm Pivot Bushings
Stabilizer Bar Bushings

2.8

MAINTENANCE
LUBRICANTS / SERVICE PRODUCTS
Polaris Lubricants, Maintenance and Service
Products

NOTE: Each item can be purchased separately at
your local Polaris dealer.
Part No.

Description

Additives / Sealants / Thread Locking Agents / Misc.
Part No.

Description
Engine Lubricant

2870791

Fogging Oil (12 oz. Aerosol)

2876244

PS-4 Plus Synthetic 4-Cycle Engine Oil
(Quart)

2876245

PS-4 Plus Synthetic 4-Cycle Engine Oil
(Gallon)

2871950

Loctite™ Threadlock 242
(6 ml.) (12 count)

2871326

Premium Carbon Clean
(12 oz.) (12 count)

2870652

Fuel Stabilizer (16 oz.) (12 count)

2872189

DOT 4 Brake Fluid (12 count)

2871557

Crankcase Sealant, 3-Bond 1215 (5 oz.)

Gearcase / Transmission Lubricants
2878068

AGL Plus Gearcase Lubricant
(1 Qt.) (12 Count)

2878069

AGL Plus Gearcase Lubricant
(1 Gal.) (4 Count)

2878070

AGL Plus Gearcase Lubricant
(2.5 Gal.) (2 Count)

2876160

ATV Angle Drive Fluid
(8 oz.) (12 Count)

2872276

ATV Angle Drive Fluid
(2.5 Gal) (2 Count)

2877922

Demand Drive Plus
(Quart)

2877923

Demand Drive Plus
(2.5 Gallon)

2870465

Oil Pump for 1 Gallon Jug

NOTE: The number count indicated by each part
number in the table above indicates the number of
units that are shipped with each order.

Grease / Specialized Lubricants
2871312

Grease Gun Kit

2871322

Premium All Season Grease
(3 oz. cartridge) (24 Count)

2871423

Premium All Season Grease
(14 oz. cartridge) (10 Count)

2871460

Starter Drive Grease (12 Count)

2871515

Premium U-Joint Lube (3 oz.) (24 Count)

2871551

Premium U-Joint Lube (14 oz.) (10 Count)

2871329

Dielectric Grease (Nyogel™)
Coolant

2871323

60/40 Coolant (Gallon) (6 Count)

2871534

60/40 Coolant (Quart) (12 Count)

2.9

MAINTENANCE
GENERAL VEHICLE INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE

Locate the shift cable in the rear LH wheel well area.
Clevis Pin
Shift Cable
Mount

Pre-Ride / Daily Inspection
Perform the following pre-ride inspection daily, and when
servicing the vehicle at each scheduled maintenance.
• Tires - check condition and pressures
• Fuel tank - fill to proper level
• All brakes - check operation and adjustment

Shift Cable

• Throttle - check for free operation and closing
• Headlights/Taillights/Brakelights - also check operation
of all indicator lights and switches

Dust Boot

Inspect shift cable, clevis pin, pivot bushings, and dust
boot. Replace if worn or damaged.

If adjustment is required, loosen the lower jam nut and pull
the cable out of the mount to move the upper jam nut.

• Ignition switch - check for proper function
• Wheels - check for tightness of wheel nuts and axle
nuts; check to be sure axle nuts are secured by cotter
pins

Upper
Jam Nut

• Air cleaner element - check for dirt; clean or replace
• Steering - check for free operation noting any unusual
looseness in any area
• Loose parts - visually inspect vehicle for any damaged
or loose nuts, bolts or fasteners
• Engine coolant - check for proper level at the recovery
bottle

Lower
Jam Nut

• Check all front and rear suspension components for
wear or damage.
4.

Adjust the shift cable so there is the same amount of cable
travel when shifting slightly past the detents of HIGH (H)
gear and PARK (P).

Thread the upper or lower jam nut as required to obtain
proper cable adjustment.

Frame, Nuts, Bolts, and Fasteners
Periodically inspect the torque of all fasteners in accordance
with the maintenance schedule. Check that all cotter pins are in
place. Refer to specific fastener torques listed in each chapter.

Shift Cable Inspection / Adjustment

NOTE: This procedure may require a few attempts to
obtain the proper adjustment.

Shift cable adjustment may be necessary if symptoms include:

Once the proper adjustment is obtained, place the shift
cable and upper jam nut into the mount. Tighten the lower
jam nut against the mount.

Start engine and shift through all gears to ensure the shift
cable is properly adjusted. If transmission still ratchets after
cable adjustment, the transmission will require service.

• No AWD or gear position display on instrument cluster
• Ratcheting noise on deceleration
• Inability to engage into a gear
• Excessive gear clash (noise)
• Gear selector moving out of desired range

2.10

MAINTENANCE
FUEL SYSTEM AND AIR INTAKE

Fuel Pump / Fuel Filters

Fuel System

The RZR 800 EFI engine uses a serviceable, high-volume, highpressure, fuel pump that includes a preliminary filter and an
internal fine filter located before the pump regulator.

WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive
under certain conditions.
Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in
a well ventilated area.
Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in
or near the area where refueling is performed or
where gasoline is stored.
Do not overfill the tank. Do not fill the tank neck.
If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you swallow
gasoline, seek medical attention immediately.
If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing,
immediately wash it off with soap and water
and change clothing.
Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed
area. Engine exhaust fumes are poisonous and
can result in loss of consciousness or
death in a short time.
Never drain the fuel when the engine is hot.
Severe burns may result.

Fuel Pump Asm

NOTE: Neither filter is servicable individually. Must
replace the fuel pump as an assembly.

Fuel Line
1.

Check the quick-connect fuel line for signs of wear,
deterioration, damage or leakage. Replace if necessary.

Fuel Line
Injector Rail
Connector

Fuel Pump
Connector

NOTE: Refer to Chapter 4 for fuel pump replacement
and all other information related to the EFI System.

Vent Lines
2.

Be sure fuel line is routed and retained properly.

Check fuel tank, front gearcase, rear gearcase and
transmission vent lines for signs of wear, deterioration,
damage or leakage. Replace every two years.

Be sure vent lines are routed properly and secured with
cable ties.

IMPORTANT: Make sure line is not kinked or pinched.
3.

Replace fuel line every two years.

IMPORTANT: Ensure lines are not kinked or pinched.

2.11

MAINTENANCE
Throttle Pedal Inspection

Remove the (2) push rivets retaining the air intake box and
remove the box from the frame.

Loosen the hose clamp retaining the PVT intake duct and
remove the duct from the vehicle to access the throttle cable
freeplay adjustment.

If the throttle pedal has excessive play due to cable stretch or
cable misadjustment, it will cause a delay in throttle speed. Also,
the throttle may not open fully. If the throttle pedal has no play,
the throttle may be hard to control, and the idle speed may be
erratic.

Throttle Pedal

Check the throttle pedal play periodically in accordance with the
Periodic Maintenance Chart and adjust the play if necessary.

Throttle Freeplay Adjustment
Inspection
1.

Place the transmission in the P (Park) position.

Start the engine, and warm it up thoroughly.

Measure the distance the throttle pedal moves before the
engine begins to pick up speed. Freeplay should be 1/16” 1/8” (1.5 - 3 mm).

Intake Duct
5.

Adjustment
1.

Remove both seats and rear service panel.

Remove the cargo box as an assembly (see Chapter 5).

Slide back the cable adjuster boot.
Boot

Jam Nut

Adjuster

2.12

Using a 14 mm open-end wrench, loosen the adjustment
jam nut. Using a 12 mm open-end wrench, move the cable
adjuster until 1/16” to 1/8” (1.5 - 3 mm) of freeplay is
achieved at the throttle pedal.

MAINTENANCE
NOTE: While adjusting, lightly move the throttle
pedal in and out.
7.

Re-tighten the jam nut after final adjustment is made.

Apply a small amount of grease to the inside of the boot and
slide it over the cable adjuster to its original position.

Reinstall the PVT intake duct and tighten the hose clamp.

NOTE: If the filter has been soaked with fuel or oil it
must be replaced.

Seal

2
Air Filter

10. Reinstall the air intake box and (2) push rivets.
11. Reinstall the cargo box, all fasteners and reconnect the
taillight harness.

Cap

12. Reinstall the rear service panel and seats.

Air Filter Service
It is recommended that the air filter be inspected as part of
pre-ride inspection. Always apply grease to the seal under the air
box cap and on the sealing edges of the air filter when servicing.
In extremely dusty conditions, air filter replacement will be
required more often.

NOTE: Service more frequently if vehicle is operated
in wet conditions or at high throttle operation for
extended periods.

The filter should be inspected using the following procedure:

Clean the air box thoroughly.

Removal

Place the filter ring over the end of the filter.

The air box is located just above the left rear wheel in the
wheel well area.

NOTE: Apply a small amount of general purpose
grease to the sealing edges of the filter and the air
box cap seal before installing.

Unlatch the (3) clips and remove the air box cap. Inspect
the seal. It should adhere tightly to the cover and seal all
the way around.

Installation

Apply Grease

Air Box Cap

Remove the air filter assembly.

Inspect the air filter element and replace if necessary. Do
not attempt to clean the air filter with anything other that
low pressure compressed air.

Install the filter into the air box and be sure it fits tightly.

Install air box cap and secure with clips.

2.13

MAINTENANCE
Air Box / Air Filter Exploded View

Front
Foam Seal

Air Intake Duct
Intake Box
Foil

Primary
Foam Seal
Seal
Breather
Hose

Fitting

Intake Seal

Breather
Filter

Boot
Clip (3)
Filter Ring

Cap

Air Box Can
Clamps

Seal
Air Filter

2.14

MAINTENANCE
ENGINE
Engine Oil Level
The twin cylinder engine is a wet-sump engine, meaning the oil
is contained in the bottom of the crankcase. To check the oil
level follow the procedure listed below:

NOTE: Due to the dipstick entry angle into the
crankcase, the oil level will read higher on the
bottom side of the dipstick. Proper level indication is
determined on the upper surface of the dipstick as it
is being removed, regardless of the level marks
being on top or on bottom (see the next illustration).
Dipstick

Position vehicle on a level surface.

Place the transmission in Park (P).

Be sure the machine has sat for awhile before removing the
dipstick.

Always read top side of dipstick to
properly check oil level in crankcase

IMPORTANT: Do not run the machine and then check
the dipstick.
4.

Remove both seats and the rear service panel to access the
dipstick.
NOTE: A rising oil level between checks in cool
weather driving can indicate contaminants such as
gas or moisture collecting in the crankcase. If the oil
level is over the full mark, change the oil
immediately.
Dipstick
Lever Lock

Reinstall the dipstick and lock the lever.

Engine Oil and Filter Service
Always change engine oil and filter at the intervals outlined in
the Periodic Maintenance Chart. Always change the oil filter
whenever changing the engine oil.
5.

Stop engine and lift the lever lock. Remove dipstick and
wipe dry with a clean cloth.

Reinstall the dipstick completely, but do not lock it.

WARNING
Personal injury can occur when handling used
oil. Hot oil can cause burns or skin damage.

NOTE: Make certain the dipstick is inserted all the
way into the filler tube to keep the angle and depth of
dipstick consistent.
7.

Recommended Engine Oil:

Remove dipstick and check to see that the oil level is in the
SAFE range. Add oil as indicated by the level on the
dipstick. Do not overfill (see NOTE below!).

PS-4 Plus Synthetic 4-Cycle Engine Oil
(PN 2876244) (Quart)
Ambient Temperature Range
-40° F to 120° F

Maintain Oil Level In SAFE Range
DO NOT Overfill the Engine

Position vehicle on a level surface.

Place the transmission in PARK (P).

Start the engine. Allow it to idle for two to three minutes
until warm. Stop the engine.

2.15

MAINTENANCE
4.

Clean area around oil drain plug at bottom of engine.

11. Lubricate O-ring on new filter with a film of fresh engine
oil. Check to make sure the O-ring is in good condition.
12. Install new filter and turn by hand until filter gasket contacts
the sealing surface, then turn an additional 1/2 turn.
13. Remove the engine oil dipstick (see “Engine Oil Level”).

NOTE: Drain plug is accessed
through the skid plate.

14. Fill the sump with 2 qts. (1.9 l) of PS-4 Plus Synthetic
Engine Oil (2876244).

Drain Plug

Crankcase Drain Plug Torque:
16 ft. lbs. (22 Nm)

CAUTION
Oil may be hot. Do not allow hot oil to come into
contact with skin, as serious burns may result.
5.

Place a drain pan beneath engine crankcase and remove the
drain plug.

Allow oil to drain completely.

Replace the sealing washer on drain plug.

NOTE: The sealing surface on the drain plug should
be clean and free of burrs, nicks or scratches.
8.

Reinstall drain plug and torque to 16 ft. lbs. (22 Nm).

Place shop towels beneath oil filter. Using Oil Filter
Wrench (PU-50105) and a 3/8” extension, turn the oil filter
counter-clockwise to remove it.

Oil Filter

10. Using a clean dry cloth, clean filter sealing surface on the
crankcase.

2.16

Oil Filter Torque:
Turn by hand until filter gasket contacts
sealing surface, then turn an
additional 1/2 turn
Oil Filter Wrench:
PU-50105: 2.5” (64 mm)
15. Verify the transmission is still positioned in PARK (P).
16. Start the engine and let it idle for one to two minutes.
17. Stop the engine and inspect for leaks.
18. Re-check the oil level on the dipstick and add oil as
necessary to bring the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
19. Dispose of used oil and oil filter properly.

MAINTENANCE
Engine Breather Hose Inspection

Exhaust - Spark Arrestor

The engine is equipped with a breather hose. Inspect the
breather hose for possible kinks or wear. The hose is form fitted for a proper fit. Follow the breather hose from the side of
the airbox to the engine valve cover.

Breather
Hose

WARNING
Do not clean spark arrestor immediately after the
engine has been run, as the exhaust system
becomes very hot. Serious burns could result from
contact with the exhaust components. Allow
components to cool sufficiently before proceeding.
Wear eye protection and gloves.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area. Exhaust
contains poisonous carbon monoxide gas that can
cause loss of consciousness or death in a very
short time.
Periodically clean spark arrestor to remove accumulated carbon.
1.

Remove the retaining screw, washer and spark arrestor
from the end of the silencer.

Use a non-synthetic brush to clean the arrestor screen. A
synthetic brush may melt if components are warm.

Inspect the screen for wear and damage. Replace if needed.

Reinstall the arrestor and torque the screw to 40 in. lbs.
(4.5 Nm).

NOTE: Make sure line is not kinked or pinched.

Engine and Transmission Mounts
Periodically inspect engine and transmission mounts for cracks
or damage.
Refer to Chapter 3 “Engine Assembly and Installation” for
mounting fastener torque values.

Screen

Compression and Leakdown Test
Arrestor

NOTE: This engine does NOT have decompression
components. Compression readings will vary in
proportion to cranking speed during the test.
A smooth idle generally indicates good compression. Low
engine compression is rarely a factor in running condition
problems above idle speed.

Silencer

Washer
Retaining
Screw

A cylinder leakdown test is the best indication of engine
condition. Follow manufacturer's instructions to perform a
cylinder leakage test (never use high pressure leakage testers, as
crankshaft seals may dislodge and leak).
Cylinder Compression:
165-185 PSI
Cylinder Leakdown
Service Limit: 15%
(Inspect for cause if test exceeds 15%)

2.17

MAINTENANCE
TRANSMISSION AND GEARCASES
Transmission / Gearcase Specification Chart
GEARCASE

LUBRICANT

CAPACITY

FILL PLUG TORQUE

DRAIN / LEVEL CHECK
PLUG TORQUE

Transmission
(Main Gearcase)

AGL Plus
Gearcase Lubricant

24 oz. (710 ml)

40-50 ft. lbs. (54-68 Nm)

30-45 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm)

Transmission
(Transfer Case)

AGL Plus
Gearcase Lubricant

14 oz. (414 ml)

40-50 ft. lbs. (54-68 Nm)

30-45 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm)

Front Gearcase

Demand Drive Plus

6.75 oz. (200 ml)

8-10 ft. lbs. (11-14 Nm)

Rear Gearcase
Differential

ATV Angle Drive Fluid

22 oz. (650 ml)

40-50 ft. lbs. (54-68 Nm)

30-45 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm)

Transmission Lubrication

Transmission Specifications
Specified Lubricant:
AGL Plus Gearcase Lubricant
(PN 2878068)

Transfer Case - Lubricant Level Check:
1.

Position vehicle on a level surface.

Remove the fill plug.

Remove the level check plug.

Add the recommended fluid through the fill plug hole until
it begins to flow out the level check plug hole.

Reinstall the level check plug and torque to 30-45 in. lbs.
(3-5 Nm).

Reinstall the fill plug and torque to 40-50 ft. lbs.
(54-68 Nm).

Approximate Capacity at Change:
Main Gearcase - 24 oz. (710 ml)
Transfer Case - 14 oz. (414 ml)
Drain / Level Plug Torque:
30-45 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm)
Fill Plug Torque:
40-50 ft. lbs. (54-68 Nm)
The transmission lubricant levels should be checked and
changed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
• Be sure vehicle is positioned on a level surface when
checking or changing fluid.
• Check vent hose to be sure it is routed properly and
unobstructed.

2.18

MAINTENANCE
Main Gearcase - Lubricant Level Check:

The fill plug is located on the side of the gearcase just below the
shift lever bell crank. Maintain the fluid level even with the
bottom of the fill plug hole.

Add the recommended fluid through the fill plug hole until
it begins to flow out the level plug hole. Do not overfill.

Reinstall the level check plug and torque to 30-45 in. lbs.
(3-5 Nm).

Position vehicle on a level surface.

Remove the fill / level plug and check the fluid level.

Reinstall the fill plug and torque to 40-50 ft. lbs.
(54-68 Nm).

Main Gearcase Lubricant Change:
8.

Remove the fill / level plug (refer to “Main Gearcase Lubricant Level Check”).

Place a drain pan under the main gearcase drain plug.

10. Remove the drain plug and allow to drain completely.
11. Clean and reinstall the drain plug with a new O-ring.
Torque to 30-45 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm).
12. Add the recommended fluid through the fill plug hole.
Maintain the fluid level at the bottom of the fill plug hole
when filling the Main Gearcase. Do not overfill.
13. Reinstall the fill / level plug and torque to 40-50 ft. lbs.
(54-68 Nm).
14. Check for leaks. Discard the used lubricant properly.

If fluid level is not at fill plug hole, add the recommended
fluid as needed.

Reinstall the fill / level plug and torque to 40-50 ft. lbs.
(54-68 Nm).

Transmission Lubricant Change:
The lubricant change procedure is relatively the same for the
main gearcase and the transfer case. To minimize confusion,
perform the lubricant change on only one gearcase at a time.
Access the drain plugs through the drain holes in the skid plate.
Transfer Case Lubricant Change:
1.

Remove the fill plug and the level check plug (refer to
“Transfer Case - Lubricant Level Check”).

Place a drain pan under the transfer case drain plug.

Remove the drain plug and allow to drain completely.

Clean and Reinstall the drain plug with a new O-ring.
Torque to 30-45 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm).

2.19

MAINTENANCE
Front Gearcase Lubrication

Position vehicle on a level surface.

The front gearcase lubricant level should be checked and
changed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.

Remove the fill plug and check the fluid level.

Add the recommended fluid as needed.

• Be sure vehicle is positioned on a level surface when
checking or changing fluid.

Reinstall the fill plug and torque to 8-10 ft. lbs. (11-14 Nm).

• Check vent hose to be sure it is routed properly and
unobstructed.

Lubricant Change:
The drain plug is located on the bottom of the gearcase.

Front Gearcase Specifications
Specified Lubricant:
Polaris Demand Drive Plus
(PN 2877922)
Capacity: 6.75 oz. (200 ml)
Fill Plug: 8-10 ft. lbs. (11-14 Nm)
Drain Plug: 8-10 ft. lbs. (11-14 Nm)
Lubricant Level Check:
The fill plug is located on the bottom right side of the front
gearcase. Maintain the lubricant level even with the bottom
threads of the fill plug hole.

2.20

Remove the fill plug.

Place a drain pan under the drain plug.

Remove the drain plug and allow fluid to drain completely.

Clean the drain plug. Inspect the O-ring and replace if
damaged.

Reinstall the drain plug; torque to 8-10 ft. lbs. (11-14 Nm).

Add the recommended fluid. Maintain the lubricant level
even with the bottom threads of the fill plug hole.

Reinstall the fill plug; torque to 8-10 ft. lbs. (11-14 Nm).

Check for leaks. Discard the used lubricant properly.

MAINTENANCE
Rear Gearcase Lubrication

Lubricant Change:

The rear gearcase lubricant level should be checked and
changed in accordance with the maintenance schedule.

The drain plug is located on the bottom right side of the rear
gearcase.

• Be sure vehicle is positioned on a level surface when
checking or changing fluid.
• Check vent hose to be sure it is routed properly and
unobstructed.

Remove the fill plug.

Place a drain pan under the drain plug.

Remove the drain plug and allow the lubricant to drain
completely.

Clean the drain plug.

Reinstall the drain plug with new O-ring and torque to
30-45 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm).

Add the recommended lubricant. Maintain the fluid level
even with the bottom threads of the fill plug hole.

Reinstall the fill plug and torque to 40-50 ft. lbs.
(54-68 Nm).

Check for leaks. Discard used lubricant properly.

Rear Gearcase Specifications
Specified Lubricant:
ATV Angle Drive Fluid (PN 2876160)

Capacity: 22 oz. (650 ml)
Fill Plug Torque: 40-50 ft. lbs. (54-68 Nm)
Drain Plug Torque: 30-45 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm)
Lubricant Level Check:
The fill plug is located on the right side of the rear gearcase.
Maintain the fluid level even with the bottom of the threads of
the fill plug hole.
1.

Position the vehicle on a level surface.

Remove the fill plug and check the fluid level. The lubricant
level should be even with the bottom of the threads of the
fill plug hole.

Add the recommended lubricant as needed.

Reinstall the fill plug and torque to 40-50 ft. lbs.
(54-68 Nm).

2.21

MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM

Cooling System Overview
The engine coolant level is controlled, or maintained, by the
recovery system. The recovery system components are the
recovery bottle, radiator filler neck, radiator pressure cap and
connecting hose.

NOTE: If overheating is evident, allow system to
cool completely and check coolant level in the
radiator and inspect for signs of trapped air in
system.

WARNING

As coolant operating temperature increases, the expanding
(heated) excess coolant is forced out of the radiator past the
pressure cap and into the recovery bottle. As engine coolant
temperature decreases the contracting (cooled) coolant is drawn
back up from the tank past the pressure cap and into the radiator.
NOTE: Some coolant level drop on new machines is
normal as the system is purging itself of trapped air.
Observe coolant levels often during the break-in
period.
NOTE: Overheating of engine could occur if air is
not fully purged from system.
Polaris Premium 60/40 is already premixed and ready to use. Do
not dilute with water.

Never remove the pressure cap when the
engine is warm or hot. Escaping steam can
cause severe burns. The engine must be cool
before removing the pressure cap.
5.

Remove the pressure cap. Using a funnel, add coolant to the
top of the filler neck.

Reinstall the pressure cap.

NOTE: Use of a non-standard pressure cap will not
allow the recovery system to function properly.
7.

Remove recovery bottle cap and add coolant using a funnel.

Fill recovery bottle to MAX level with Polaris 60/40
premix Anti Freeze/Coolant or 50/50 or 60/40 mixture of
antifreeze and distilled water as required for freeze
protection in your area.

Reinstall the recovery bottle cap.

Coolant Level Inspection
The pressure cap and recovery bottle are located under the front
hood of the vehicle. The coolant level must be maintained
between the minimum and maximum levels indicated on the
recovery bottle.
Recovery Bottle

If the coolant level is below the MIN line, inspect the
coolant level in the radiator.

10. If coolant was required, start engine and check for leaks.
Make sure radiator fins are clean to prevent overheating.

Coolant Strength / Type
Test the strength of the coolant using an antifreeze hydrometer.

Pressure Cap

Antifreeze Hydrometer
• A 50/50 or 60/40 mixture of antifreeze and distilled
water will provide the optimum cooling, corrosion
protection, and antifreeze protection.

With the engine at operating temperature, the coolant level
should be between the upper and lower marks on the coolant
recovery bottle. If not, perform the following procedure:
1.

Position the vehicle on a level surface.

Remove the hood from the front cab.

View the coolant level in the recovery bottle.

2.22

• Do not use tap water, straight antifreeze, or straight
water in the system. Tap water contains minerals and
impurities which build up in the system.
• Straight water or antifreeze may cause the system to
freeze, corrode, or overheat.

Polaris 60/40 Anti-Freeze / Coolant
(PN 2871323)

MAINTENANCE
Cooling System Pressure Test

Carefully straighten any bent radiator fins.

Refer to Chapter 3 for cooling system pressure test procedure.

Remove any obstructions with compressed air or low
pressure water.

Cooling System Hoses
1.

CAUTION

Inspect all hoses for cracks, deterioration, abrasion or
leaks. Replace if necessary.

Washing the vehicle with a high-pressure
washer could damage the radiator fins and
impair the radiators effectiveness. Use of a highpressure washer is not recommended.

Coolant Drain / Radiator Removal
Coolant Drain
1.

Remove the hood from the front cab.

WARNING
Never drain the coolant when the engine and
radiator are warm or hot. Hot coolant can cause
severe burns. Allow engine and radiator to cool.
2.

Check tightness of all hose clamps.

CAUTION
Do not over-tighten hose clamps at radiator,
or radiator fitting may distort, causing a
restriction to coolant flow.
Radiator hose clamp torque is 36 in. lbs. (4 Nm).

Slowly remove the pressure cap to relieve any cooling
system pressure.

Place a suitable drain pan underneath the radiator fitting on
the front RH side of the vehicle.

Drain the coolant from the radiator by removing the lower
coolant hose from the radiator as shown. Properly dispose
of the coolant.

Radiator
1.

Check radiator (A) air passages for restrictions or damage.

A
Drain Here

Allow coolant to completely drain.

Flush radiator fins
in this direction

2.23

MAINTENANCE
FINAL DRIVE / WHEEL AND TIRE

Radiator Removal
1.

Remove the front bumper (see Chapter 5).

Remove the upper engine outlet hose and recovery hose
from the top of the radiator.

Wheel and Hub Torque Table

Remove the (2) upper radiator retaining bolts and the (4)
bolts retaining the lower radiator mount bracket. Remove
the bracket from the frame.

Item

Nut Type

Specification

Aluminum Wheels
(Cast)

Lug Nut
#1

30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)

Steel Wheels
(Black / Camo)

Flange Nut
#2

35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)

Hub Retaining Nuts

80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm)

Aluminum Wheel

Steel Wheel

30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)

35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)

Disconnect the fan motor and remove the radiator from the
vehicle. Take care not to damage the cooling fins.

NOTE: Do not lubricate the stud or the lug nut.

Reverse procedure for installation.

Wheel Removal

Fan Motor Asm.
Recovery
Hose

Position the vehicle on a level surface.

Place the transmission in PARK (P) and stop the engine.

Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. If wheel hub removal is
required, remove the cotter pin and loosen the hub nut
slightly.

Elevate the appropriate side of the vehicle by placing a
suitable stand under the frame.

Remove the wheel nuts and remove the wheel.

If hub removal is required, remove the hub nut and washers.

Inserts

Radiator
T-Fitting

Engine
Outlet Hose
Screws

Grommets
Engine
Inlet Hose

2.24

Wheel Installation
1.

Verify the transmission is still in PARK (P).

Install the wheel hub, washers, and hub nut, if previously
removed.

Place the wheel in the correct position on the wheel hub.
Be sure the valve stem is toward the outside and rotation
arrows on the tire point toward forward rotation.

Attach the wheel nuts and finger tighten them.

Carefully lower the vehicle to the ground.

MAINTENANCE
6.

Torque the wheel nuts and/or hub nut to the proper torque
specification listed in the torque table at the beginning of
this section.

Tread
Depth 1/8" (3 mm)

If hub nut was removed, install a new cotter pin after the
hub nut has been tightened.

Use a new
cotter pin

Hub Nut

Tire Pressure
CAUTION

Wheel Nuts (4)

Valve stem
facing outward

CAUTION
If wheels are improperly installed it could affect
vehicle handling and tire wear. On vehicles with
tapered rear wheel nuts, make sure tapered end
of nut goes into taper on wheel.

Maintain proper tire pressure.
Refer to the warning tire pressure decal
applied to the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Inspection (Cold)
Front

Rear

18 psi (124 kPa)

Drive Shaft Boot Inspection
Inspect the drive shaft boots for damage, tears, wear or leaking
grease. If the boots exhibit any of these symptoms, they should
be replaced. Refer to Chapter 7 for drive shaft boot replacement.

Tire Inspection
• Improper tire inflation may affect vehicle
maneuverability.

Front Boots

• When replacing a tire always use original equipment
size and type.
• The use of non-standard size or type tires may affect
vehicle handling.

WARNING
Operating with worn tires will increase the
possibility of the vehicle skidding easily with
possible loss of control.

Rear Boots

Worn tires can cause an accident.
Always replace tires when the tread depth
measures 1/8", (.3 cm) or less.
Tire Tread Depth
Replace tires when tread depth is worn to 1/8" (3 mm) or less.

2.25

MAINTENANCE
ELECTRICAL AND IGNITION SYSTEM

Battery Removal

Battery Maintenance

Remove the driver’s seat to access the battery.

Keep battery terminals and connections free of corrosion. If
cleaning is necessary, remove the corrosion with a stiff wire
brush. Wash with a solution of one tablespoon baking soda and
one cup water. Rinse well with tap water and dry off with clean
shop towels. Coat the terminals with dielectric grease or
petroleum jelly.

WARNING
(-) Negative

(+) Positive
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Batteries, battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
and other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.

WARNING

Disconnect the black (negative) battery cable.

Disconnect the red (positive) battery cable.

Remove the hold-down strap and lift the battery out of the
vehicle.

Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains
sulfuric acid. Serious burns can result from
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote:

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of sparks: Whenever
removing the battery, disconnect the black
(negative) cable first. When reinstalling the
battery, install the black (negative) cable last.

External: Flush with water.
Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk.
Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or
vegetable oil. Call physician immediately.
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get
prompt medical attention.
Batteries produce explosive gases.
Keep sparks, flame, cigarettes, etc. away.
Ventilate when charging or using in an enclosed
space. Always shield eyes when
working near batteries.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
NOTE: Batteries must be fully charged before use or
battery life will be reduced by 10-30% of full
potential. Charge battery according to “Charging
Procedure” provided in Chapter 10. Do not use the
vehicle’s stator/alternator to charge a new battery.

2.26

Battery Installation
IMPORTANT: Using a new battery that has not been
fully charged can damage the battery and result in a
shorter life. It can also hinder vehicle performance.
Follow the battery charging procedure in Chapter 10
“Electrical” before installing the battery.
1.

Ensure the battery is fully charged.

Place the battery in the battery holder and secure with holddown strap.

Coat the terminals with dielectric grease or petroleum jelly.

Connect and tighten the red (positive) cable first.

Connect and tighten the black (negative) cable last.

Verify that cables are properly routed and reinstall the
driver’s seat.

MAINTENANCE
Battery Off Season Storage

Refer to Chapter 10 “Electrical” for off season storage
procedures.

Measure gap with a wire gauge. Adjust gap if necessary by
carefully bending the side electrode.
Spark Plug Gap

Battery Charging (Maintenance Free)

Refer to Chapter 10 “Electrical” for charging procedure.

Spark Plug Service
1.

Gap - .035" (0.90 mm)

Remove the seats, rear service panel and cargo box
assembly to access the spark plugs (see Chapter 5).

If necessary, replace spark plug with proper type.
CAUTION: Severe engine damage may occur if the
incorrect spark plug is used.

Apply anti-seize compound to the spark plug threads.

Install spark plugs and torque to specification.

WARNING
A hot exhaust system and engine can cause
serious burns. Allow engine to cool or wear
protective gloves when removing the spark plugs.
2.

Remove both spark plug caps and clean plug area so no dirt
or debris can fall into engine when plugs are removed.

Recommended Spark Plug:
Champion RC7YC3
Spark Plug Torque:
18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm)
10. Install the plug caps to the appropriate cylinder by
referencing the MAG and PTO spark plug cap decals.

Engine To Frame Ground

Note for
reassembly

Remove spark plugs.

Inspect electrodes for wear and carbon buildup. Look for a
sharp outer edge with no rounding or erosion of the
electrodes.

Inspect ground cable connections. Be sure they are clean and
tight. The engine ground cable runs from the starter motor to the
chassis ground terminal.

Engine
Ground Strap

Inspect electrode for
wear and buildup

Ground Terminal

Clean with electrical contact cleaner or a glass bead spark
plug cleaner only. CAUTION: A wire brush or coated
abrasive should not be used.

2.27

MAINTENANCE
STEERING

Tie Rod End / Wheel Hub Inspection
• To check for play in the tie rod end, grasp the steering
tie rod, pull in all directions feeling for movement.

Steering Inspection
The steering components should be checked periodically for
loose fasteners, worn tie rod ends, ball joints, and damage. Also
check to make sure all cotter pins are in place. If cotter pins are
removed, they must not be re–used. Always use new cotter pins.
Replace any worn or damaged steering components. Steering
should move freely through the entire range of travel without
binding. Check routing of all cables, hoses, and wiring to be sure
the steering mechanism is not restricted or limited.
NOTE: Whenever
steering
components
replaced, check front end alignment.

are

WARNING
Due to the critical nature of the procedures
outlined in this chapter, Polaris recommends
steering component repair and adjustment be
performed by an authorized Polaris
MSD certified technician.
Use only genuine Polaris replacement parts.

Steering Wheel Freeplay
Check the steering wheel for specified freeplay and operation.
1.

Position the vehicle on level ground.

Lightly turn the steering wheel left and right.

There should be 0.8”-1.0” (20-25 mm) of freeplay.

If there is excessive freeplay or the steering feels rough,
inspect the following components.

• Replace any worn steering components. Steering should
move freely through entire range of travel without
binding.
• Elevate front end of machine so front wheels are off the
ground. Check for any looseness in front hub/wheel
assembly by grasping the tire firmly at top and bottom
first, and then at front and rear. Try to move the wheel
and hub by pushing inward and pulling outward.
Check for Loose Wheel or Hub

• Tie Rod Ends
• Steering Shaft U-Joints
• Steering Gearbox

U-Joints

Tie Rod

Gearbox

• If abnormal movement is detected, inspect the hub and
wheel assembly to determine the cause (loose wheel
nuts or loose front hub nut).
• Refer to Chapter 7 “Final Drive” for front hub service
procedures.

2.28

MAINTENANCE
Wheel Toe Alignment Inspection

Wheel Toe Adjustment

Place machine on a smooth level surface and set steering
wheel in a straight ahead position. Secure the steering
wheel in this position.

If toe alignment is incorrect, measure the distance between
vehicle center and each wheel. This will tell you which tie rod
needs adjusting.

Place a chalk mark on the center line of the front tires
approximately 10” (25.4 cm) from the floor or as close to
the hub/axle center line as possible.

NOTE: It is important the height of both marks be
equally positioned to get an accurate measurement.
3.

Measure the distance between the marks and record the
measurement. Call this measurement “A”.
Rotate the tires 180 by moving the vehicle forward.
Position chalk marks facing rearward, even with the hub/
axle center line.
Again measure the distance between the marks and record.
Call this measurement “B”. Subtract measurement “B”
from measurement “A”. The difference between
measurements “A” and “B” is the vehicle toe alignment.
The recommended vehicle toe tolerance is 1/8”, to 1/4”, (.3
to .6 cm) toe out. This means the measurement at the front
of the tire (A) is 1/8”, to 1/4”, (.3 to .6 cm) wider than the
measurement at the rear (B).

= In. / mm.
Wheel Toe-Out:
(A) - (B) = 1/8 - 1/4" (.3 to .6 cm)

NOTE: Be sure steering wheel is straight ahead
before determining which tie rod needs adjustment.

CAUTION
During tie rod adjustment, it is very important that
the following precautions be taken when
tightening tie rod end jam nuts.
If the rod end is positioned incorrectly it will not
pivot, and may break.
To adjust toe alignment:
• Hold tie rod end to keep it from rotating.
• Loosen jam nuts at both end of the tie rod.
• Shorten or lengthen the tie rod until alignment is as
required to achieve the proper toe setting as specified in
“Wheel Toe Alignment”.

2.29

MAINTENANCE
• IMPORTANT: When tightening the tie rod end jam
nuts, the rod ends must be held parallel to prevent rod
end damage and premature wear. Damage may not be
immediately apparent if done incorrectly.
• After alignment is complete, torque jam nuts to
specification.

SUSPENSION (FOX™)
Spring Preload Adjustment
The front and rear shocks have a preload adjustment.
Suspension spring preload may be adjusted to suit different
riding conditions or vehicle payloads.

WARNING

Uneven adjustment may cause poor handling of the
vehicle, which could result in an accident and
serious injury or death. Always adjust both the left
and right spring preloads equally.

Tie Rod Jam Nut Torque:
12-14 ft. lbs. (16-19 Nm)

Raise and safely support the front or rear of the vehicle off
the ground to allow the suspension to fully extend.

Loosen the upper jam nut adjustment ring. Turn the lower
adjustment ring (1) clockwise to increase preload or
counter-clockwise to decrease preload.

Factory Preload Setting
4.2 in. (10.7 cm)

Decrease
Preload

Increase
Preload

2.0 Piggyback
Front Shock

2.30

MAINTENANCE
Shock Compression Adjustment
The compression damping adjustment is located on top of the
shock ‘Piggyback’ reservoir of each shock.
Factory Preload Setting
4.8 in. (12.2 cm)

Decrease
Preload

Increase
Preload

Use a flat blade screwdriver to make damping adjustments.
NOTE: When the adjuster screw is turned clockwise
until it stops, the damping is in the fully closed
position.
Turn the clicker clockwise to increase compression damping.
Turn the clicker counter-clockwise to decrease compression
damping.
NOTE: The factory setting is 10 clicks from closed.
Refer to the “Compression Adjustment Table”
below.
Increase
Damping

Decrease
Damping

2.0 Piggyback
Rear Shock
3.

Once you have obtained the correct preload, hold the lower
adjustment ring while tightening the upper adjustment ring
to lock them in place.

Clicker
Adjuster

Shock Spanner Wrench
(PN 2870803)
Compression Adjustment Table
Setting

Compression Damping

Softest

18 clicks from closed

Factory

10 clicks from closed

Firmest

2 clicks from closed

2.31

MAINTENANCE
BRAKE SYSTEM

Brake Pad / Disc Inspection

Brake Fluid Inspection

Check the brake pads for wear, damage, or looseness.

Always check the brake pedal travel and inspect the brake fluid
reservoir level before each operation. If the fluid level is low,
add DOT 4 brake fluid only.

Inspect the brake pad wear surface for excessive wear.

Pads should be changed when the friction material is worn
to .040” (1 mm).

Brake fluid should be changed every two years. The fluid should
also be changed anytime the fluid becomes contaminated, the
fluid level is below the minimum level, or if the type and brand
of the fluid in the reservoir is unknown.
The brake fluid master cylinder reservoir can be accessed
through the left front wheel well.
1.

Position the vehicle on a level surface.

Place the transmission in PARK (P).

View the brake fluid level in the reservoir. The level should
be between the MAX and MIN level lines.

If the fluid level is lower than the MIN level line, add brake
fluid until it reaches the MAX level line.

Install the reservoir cap and apply the brake pedal
forcefully for a few seconds and check for fluid leakage
around the master cylinder fittings and the brake caliper
fittings.

Measure Pad Material
Thickness

Maximum

Service Limit:
.040" (1 mm)

Check surface condition of the brake discs.

Measure the thickness of the front and rear brake discs.

The disc(s) should be replaced if thickness is less than .170”
(4.32 mm).
Measure Brake Disc Thickness

Rear
Disc

Front
Disc

Minimum

Master Cylinder
Service Limit:
.170" (4.32 mm)

Brake Hose and Fitting Inspection
Check brake system hoses and fittings for cracks, deterioration,
abrasion, and leaks. Tighten any loose fittings and replace any
worn or damaged parts.

2.32

MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE LOG
Service Date Hours / Miles (km)

Service Performed / Comments

Dealer / Technician

2.33

MAINTENANCE

NOTES

2.34

ENGINE

CHAPTER 3
ENGINE
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
CRANKCASE EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
ENGINE FASTENER TORQUE PATTERNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
800 EFI ENGINE SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
COOLING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS / COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST . . . 3.12
COOLING SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
COOLING SYSTEM BLEEDING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14

GENERAL ENGINE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
ENGINE LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
ACCESSIBLE ENGINE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
OIL PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
OIL FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
ENGINE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
ENGINE / TRANSMISSION SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24

ENGINE DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
ROCKER ARMS / PUSH RODS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
CYLINDER HEAD INSPECTION / CYLINDER HEAD WARP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
VALVE SEAL / SPRING SERVICE (ON ENGINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
VALVE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
COMBUSTION CHAMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
CYLINDER HEAD REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
VALVE SEALING TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
CYLINDER REMOVAL / VALVE LIFTER REMOVAL / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
PISTON REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
CYLINDER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
CYLINDER HONE SELECTION AND HONING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
PISTON-TO-CYLINDER CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
PISTON / ROD INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
PISTON RING INSTALLED GAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
STARTER DRIVE BENDIX REMOVAL / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
FLYWHEEL / STATOR REMOVAL / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
ENGINE CRANKCASE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
CAMSHAFT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47

ENGINE REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
CRANKCASE REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
FLYWHEEL / STATOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
CYLINDER HEAD REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.57
OIL PUMP PRIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.59

ENGINE INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
ENGINE ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.60
ENGINE BREAK-IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.61

TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.62
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.63

3.1

ENGINE
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Crankcase Exploded Views

3.2

ENGINE
Oil Pump / Water Pump / Engine Cover Exploded View

3.3

ENGINE
Stator Cover / Starter / Water Pump Oil Filter / Pressure Relief / Exploded View

3.4

ENGINE
Cylinder / Cylinder Head / Piston Exploded View±

3.5

ENGINE
Engine EFI Sensors / Valve Cover / General Component Exploded View

NOTE: See Chapter 4 for more
information on the EFI System.

3.6

ENGINE
Engine Fastener Torque Patterns
Crankcase Bolt Tighten Sequence

22  2 ft. lbs. (30  3 Nm)

Cylinder Head Bolt Tighten Sequence

3.7

ENGINE
Torque Specifications
Fastener

Size

in. lbs. (Nm)

Camshaft Phase Sensor Bolt

6mm

50 ± 5

Camshaft Gear

8 mm

Camshaft Thrust Plate

6 mm

115 ± 12 (13 ± 1.35)

9.5 ± 1 (13 ± 1.35)

Throttle Body Adaptor Bolts

8 mm

216 ± 24 (24.5-± 2.7)

18 ± 2 (24.5 ± 2.7)

Counterbalance Gear

8 mm

22 ± 2 (30 ± 3)

Crankcase Bolts

8 mm

* 22 ± 2 (30 ± 3)

Crankcase Breather

5 mm

Cylinder Head Bolts

11 mm

Exhaust Manifold

8 mm

Flywheel

14 mm

Hose Barb Fitting

3/8 NPT

120

Injector Rail

8 mm

216 ± 24 (24.5 ± 2.70)

18 ± 2 (24.5 ± 2.7)

Magneto Cover

6 mm

* 96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35)

Oil Baffle Weldment

5 mm

60 ± 6 (6.8 ± 0.68)

Oil Drain Bolt (Crankcase)

12 mm

192 ± 24 (21.7 ± 2.7)

16 ± (21.7)

Oil Fill Tube Bolt

5 mm

50 ± 5 (5.64 ± 0.56)

Oil Filter Pipe Fitting

20 mm

Oil Pick Up

5 mm

60 ± 6 (6.8 ± 0.68)

Oil Pressure Relief Plug

10 mm

22 ± 2 (30 ± 3)

Oil Pump Housing Screw

6 mm

* 84 ± 8 (9.50 ± 0.90)

Rocker Arm

8 mm

Rocker Cover

6 mm

* 84 ± 8 (9.5 ± 0.9)

Spark Plug

14 mm

216 ± 24 (24.5 ± 2.7)

18 ± 2 (24.5 ± 2.7)

Starter Motor

6 mm

* 84 ± 8 (9.5 ± 0.9)

Stator Assembly

6 mm

96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35)

Stator Housing

6 mm

* 96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35)

T-MAP Sensor Bolt

6 mm

20 ± 5 (2.5 ± 0.55)

Temperature Switch

3/8 NPT

Thermostat Housing

6 mm

Timing Plug

3/4-16

Trigger Coil/Stator Wire Holddown

5 mm

* 96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35)

Water Pump Housing Cover

6 mm

* 96 ± 3 (10.85 ± 0.35)

Water Pump Impeller Nut

8 mm

108 ± 3 (12 ± 0.35)

22 ± 2 (30 ± 3)

20 ± 5 (2.5 ± 0.55)

* 35 ± 4 (47.5 ± 5.5)

216 ± 24 (24.5 ± 2.70)

18 ± 2 (24.5 ± 2.7)
65 ± 7 (88 ± 9.50)

35 ± 4 (47.5 ± 5.4)

* 22 ± 2 (30 ± 3)

17 ± 2 (23 ± 3)
84 ± 8 (9.5 ± 0.9)

7 - 9 (10 - 12)

NOTE: * See exploded views for notes or torque sequences.

3.8

ft. lbs. (Nm)

ENGINE
800 EFI Engine Service Specifications
Cylinder Head - Engine Specifications
Main Component: Cylinder Head
Cam Lobe Height - Intake

1.357” (34.477 mm)

Cam Lobe Height - Exhaust

1.342” (34.096 mm)

Camshaft Journal Outer Diameter - Mag

1.654"  0.00039" (42  0.010 mm)

Camshaft Journal Outer Diameter - Center

1.634" 0.00039" (41.50  0.010 mm)

Camshaft Journal Outer Diameter - PTO

1.614"  0.00039" (41  0.010 mm)

Camshaft Journal Bore Inner Diameter - Mag

1.656"  0.00039" (42.07  0.010 mm)

Camshaft Journal Bore Inner Diameter - Center

1.637"  0.00039" (41.58  0.010 mm)

Camshaft Journal Bore Inner Diameter - PTO

1.617"  0.00039" (41.07  0.010 mm)

Camshaft Oil Clearance

0.00276"  0.00079" (0.07  0.02 mm)

Camshaft End Play

0.0167"  0.0098" (0.425  0.25 mm)

Counter Balance End Play

0.005" (0.127 mm)

Cylinder Head - Surface warp limit

0.00394" (0.1 mm)

Cylinder Head - Standard height

3.478" (88.35 mm)

Valve Seat - Contacting Width - Intake

0.0472"  0.00787" - 0.0039" (1.20  0.20 - 0.10 mm)

Valve Seat - Contacting Width - Exhaust

0.0591"  0.00787" - 0.0039" (1.50  0.20 - 0.10 mm)

Valve Seat Angle

45.5  0.255

Valve Guide Inner diameter

0.2367"  0.00029" (6.012  0.007 mm)

Valve Guide Protrusion Above Head

0.807"  0.0039" (20.50  0.01 mm)

Valve Stem Diameter - Intake

0.2356"  0.00039" (5.985  0.01 mm)

Valve Stem Diameter - Exhaust

0.2351"  0.00039" (5.972  0.01 mm)

Valve Stem Oil Clearance - Intake

0.00228"  0.00098" (0.058  0.025 mm)

Valve Stem Oil Clearance - Exhaust

0.00275"  0.00098" (0.0870  0.025 mm)

Valve Stem Overall Length - Intake

4.51"  0.01476" (114.5550  0.375 mm)

Valve Stem Overall Length - Exhaust

4.5453"  .01496" (115.45  0.38 mm)

Valve Spring Overall Length - Free Length

1.735" (46.069 mm)

Valve Spring Overall Length - Installed Height

Intake - 1.4638" (37.18 mm)
Exhaust - 1.4736" (37.43 mm)

Camshaft

Counter Balance

RZR800HO-11 (PN 1204276)

Cylinder Head

Valve Seat

Valve Guide

Valve

Valve Spring

3.9

ENGINE
Cylinder / Piston - Engine Specifications
Main Components: Cylinder / Piston / Connecting Rod

Cylinder

Lifter

Piston

Piston Pin

RZR800HO-11 (PN 1204276)

Cylinder - Surface warp limit
(mating with cylinder head)

0.004" (0.10 mm)

Cylinder Bore - Standard

3.1495" (80 mm)

Cylinder Taper Limit

0.00031" (0.008 mm)

Cylinder Out of Round Limit

0.00030" (0.0075 mm)

Cylinder to Piston Clearance

.0015" .00059" (.040  .015 mm)

Lifter Outer Diameter Standard

0.84245"  0.00025" (21.39 8  0.00635 mm)

Lifter Block Bore

0.8438"  0.00062" (21.4322  0.0157 mm)

Piston - Standard

3.14803"  .00028" (79.960  .007 mm)

Piston Standard Inner Diameter of
Piston Pin Bore

0.70902"  .00012" (18.009  0.003 mm)

Piston Pin Outer Diameter

0.70866" - 0.70846" (18 - 17.995 mm)

Piston Pin - Standard Clearance - Piston Pin to
Pin Bore

0.00047"  0.00024" (0.012  0.006 mm)

Piston Pin - Degree of Fit

Piston pin must be push fit (by hand) at 68° F (20° C)

Piston / Connecting Rod / Crankshaft - Engine Specifications
Main Components: Piston / Connecting Rod

Installed
Gap
Piston Ring

Ring to
Groove
Clearance

Top Ring - Standard

0.0059 - 0.0138" (0.15 - 0.35 mm)

Top Ring - Limit

> 15% Leakdown

Second Ring - Standard

0.0098 - 0.0197" (0.25 - 0.50 mm)

Second Ring - Limit

> 15% Leakdown

Oil Ring - Standard

0.0197 0.0098" (0.50 0.25 mm)

Oil Ring - Limit

> 15% Leakdown

Top Ring - Standard

0.0024"  0.0008" (0.060  0.020 mm)

Top Ring - Limit

> 15% Leakdown

Second Ring - Standard

0.0028"  0.0008" (0.070  0.020 mm)

Second Ring - Limit

> 15% Leakdown

Connecting Rod Small End I.D.

Connecting Rod

Crankshaft

3.10

RZR800HO-11 (PN 1204276)

Connecting Rod Small End
Radial Clearance
Connecting Rod Big End
Side Clearance
Connecting Rod Big End
Radial Clearance
Crankshaft Runout Limit

0.7096" 0.70846" (18  17.995 mm)
0.00098" 0.00039" (0.025  0.010 mm)
0.01181" 0.00591" (0.30  0.15 mm)
0.0015" 0.0006" (0.038  0.015 mm)
0.00236" (0.060 mm)

ENGINE
Special Tools
Part Number

Tool Description

PU-50105

OIL FILTER WRENCH

PU-45257

VALVE SPRING COMPRESSOR

PU-45652

VALVE PRESSURE HOSE

2871043

FLYWHEEL PULLER

2870390

PISTON SUPPORT BLOCK

PU-45497-1

CAM GEAR SPRING INSTALLATION KIT

PU-45497-2

CAM GEAR TOOTH ALIGNMENT TOOL

PU-45498

CAM SPANNER WRENCH

PU-45838

GEAR HOLDER

PA-44995

WATER PUMP MECHANICAL SEAL INSTALLER

PU-45543

UNIVERSAL DRIVER HANDLE

PA-45483

MAIN SEAL INSTALLER

PU-45658

CRANKSHAFT MAIN SEAL SAVER

PA-45401

WATER PUMP SEAL SAVER

2870975

MITY VAC™PRESSURE TEST TOOL

PU-45778

OIL SYSTEM PRIMING TOOL

3.11

ENGINE
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Remove pressure cap and pressure test the cooling system
using a commercially available pressure tester.

Cooling System Specifications
Condition

Coolant Temperature F (C)

Room Temperature

68 F (20 C)

Thermostat Closed

175° F (79° C)

Remove
Cap

Thermostat Open

180° F (82° C)

Test Here

Fan Off

194 F (90 C)

Thermostat Full Open Lift

202° F (94° C)

Fan On

205 F (96 C)

Engine Temperature
Overheat Indicator
Engine Protection
Ignition Misfire
Engine Protection
Shutdown

Moving Vehicle: 235 F (113 C)
Idle Vehicle:

241 F (116 C)

Moving Vehicle: 239 F (115 C)
Idle Vehicle:

244 F (118 C)

Moving Vehicle: 257 F (125 C)
Idle Vehicle:

262 F (128 C)

The system must maintain 10 psi for five minutes or longer.
If pressure loss is evident within five minutes, check the
radiator, hoses, clamps and water pump seals for leakage.

Pressure Cap Test
Item
Cooling System Capacity

Specification

WARNING

4.8 qts. (4.5 l)

Pressure Cap Relief

13 PSI

Never remove pressure cap when engine is
warm or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure and serious burns may result.
Allow the engine and cooling system to cool
before servicing.

Polaris Premium Antifreeze
2871534 - Quart
2871323 - Gallon
1.

Remove pressure cap and test cap using a commercially
available pressure cap tester.

The pressure cap relief pressure is 13 psi. Replace cap if it
does not meet this specification.

Recommended Coolant
Use only high quality antifreeze/coolant mixed with distilled
water in a 50/50 or 60/40 ratio, depending on freeze protection
required in your area.
CAUTION: Using tap water in the cooling system will lead to
a buildup of deposits which may restrict coolant flow and reduce
heat dissipation, resulting in possible engine damage. Polaris
Premium 60/40 Antifreeze/Coolant is recommended for use in
all cooling systems and comes pre-mixed, ready to use.

Cooling System Pressure Test
1.

Remove the hood from the front cab.

3.12

Pressure Cap

ENGINE
Cooling System Exploded View
Bypass Hose (To Cylinder Head)

Engine Outlet Hose
(Thermostat Housing)
Radiator
Inlet Hose

3
To Lower Fitting on Filler Neck

Engine Inlet Hose
(Water Pump Cover)

Fan Motor
Shroud

Pressure Cap

Filler Neck

Recovery Bottle

Radiator
Outlet Hose

Radiator
To Top Fitting on Filler Neck
Coolant Flow Diagram
Filler Neck

Engine
Water Pump
Engine Cylinder Head
Bypass

Recovery Bottle

Radiator

Engine
Thermostat Housing

3.13

ENGINE
Cooling System Bleeding Procedure
WARNING

Remove pressure cap and top off coolant.

Remove recovery bottle cap and fill bottle to the full line.
Recovery Bottle

Always wear safety glasses and proper shop
clothing when performing the procedures in this
manual. Failing to do so may lead to possible
injury or death.

Pressure Cap

CAUTION
Use caution when performing these procedures.
Coolant may be hot and may cause
severe injury or burns.
NOTE: If the coolant level is LOW in the radiator, or
if there are leaks in the system, the coolant system
will not draw coolant from the reservoir tank.
NOTE: Use this procedure when a unit overheats
and no apparent leaks in the cooling system are
found.
1.

Drive the vehicle onto a slight incline and use properly
weight rated ramps. If an incline is not available, slightly
elevate the front of the vehicle.

Leave the cap off of the radiator to allow any possible air
to escape.

Start the engine and let it idle for 5-10 minutes or until the
thermostat opens and allows coolant to flow through the
system.

Slightly loosen the bleed screw (C) on the cylinder head to
let air escape. If no air is present, a steady stream of coolant
will stream out. If air is present, the screw will bubble and
sputter as the air escapes.

Place the vehicle in Park and block the rear wheels.
Pressure Cap

C
Spark Plug

CAUTION
Be sure the engine has cooled and no pressure
is built up in the cooling system before removing
the pressure cap. The coolant may be hot and
could cause severe injury or burns.

3.14

Top LH Side
of Cylinder Head

Tighten the bleed screw to 70 ± 10 in. lbs. (8 ± 1.13 Nm)
on the thermostat housing and properly install the pressure
cap.

Squeeze the coolant lines by hand to help purge the system
of air.

NOTE: If there is air in the system you will see air
bubbles forming through the radiator filler neck.

ENGINE
10. Add Polaris Premium Antifreeze to the radiator filler neck
if the level goes down. If no bubbles are seen at the filler
neck, the system should be purged of air

GENERAL ENGINE SERVICE
Engine Lubrication Specifications

WARNING

Be sure to install the pressure cap before
shutting off the engine.
Coolant may spit out of the radiator.
11. Stop the engine and let cool, top off the radiator filler neck
with coolant. If you hear or see a “glug” at the filler neck,
or there is a dropping of the coolant level, indicating that
coolant has been pulled into the system; Fill the recovery
bottle only after you have completely filled the cooling
system at the radiator filler neck.
12. Repeat this procedure, if overheating still occurs.

Capacity: Approximately 2 U.S. Quarts (1.9 L)
Oil Type: Polaris PS-4 PLUS Synthetic
Filter Wrench: PU-50105 - 2.5” (64 mm)
- Oil Pressure Specification 27-35 psi @ 6000 RPM, Polaris PS-4 PLUS
Synthetic, Engine at operating temperature.

Accessible Engine Components
The following components can be serviced or removed with the
engine installed:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Starter Motor / Drive
Cylinder Head
Cylinder
Piston / Rings
Rocker Arms
Water Pump

The following components require engine removal for service:
• Flywheel
• Alternator (Stator)
• Counterbalance Shaft or Bearings
• Gear Train Components
• Camshaft
• Oil Pump / Oil Pump Drive Gear
• Connecting Rod
• Crankshaft
• Crankshaft Main Bearings
• Crankcase

Oil Pressure Test
1.

Remove blind plug/sender from left side of crankcase.

Insert a 1/8 NPT oil pressure gauge adaptor into the
crankcase and attach the gauge.

Start engine and allow it to reach operating temperature,
monitoring gauge indicator.

Oil Pressure at Idle: 6 psi
Oil Pressure at 6000 RPM (Engine Hot):
Minimum: 27 psi
Standard: 31 psi
Maximum: 35 psi

3.15

ENGINE
Oil Flow Chart
This chart describes the flow of oil through the 800 EFI engine. Beginning in the crankcase sump, the oil is drawn through an oil
galley to the feed side of the oil pump. The oil is then pumped through the oil filter. If the oil filter is obstructed, a bypass valve
contained in the filter allows oil to bypass the filter element. At this point, the oil is supplied to the main oil galley through a crankcase
passage. Oil is then diverted three ways from the main oil galley, with the first path entering the camshaft bores, onto the rear balance
shaft journal and then draining back into the crankcase sump. The second oil path from the main oil galley feeds the lifter bores and
then drains back to the crankcase sump. The third oil path flows through a crankcase galley to the MAG side crankshaft journal and
also to the front balance shaft journal and onto the crankcase sump.

3.16

ENGINE
Engine Removal

Remove the (2) screws from the rear of the center console.

Because of its design configuration and fastener torque
requirements, Polaris recommends removing the engine,
transmission and rear gearcase as one assembly. Use the
following procedure when engine removal is required.
IMPORTANT: Some engine repair procedures can be
performed without removing the engine assembly
from the vehicle. Refer to “Accessible Engine
Components” on Page 3.15 for further information.

NOTE: The use of an overhead or portable engine
hoist is the only recommended method for removing
and installing the engine / transmission / rear
gearcase assembly.
NOTE: Have an assistant help guide the engine in
and out of the vehicle while using an engine hoist to
prevent personal injury or damage to vehicle
components.

WARNING
Always wear safety glasses and proper shop
clothing when performing the procedures in this
manual. Failing to do so may lead to possible
injury or death.
1.

If vehicle was recently operated, allow it to cool down
before attempting to perform any work.

Clean work area.

Thoroughly clean the engine and chassis.

Drain appropriate lubricant(s):
• If servicing the engine, drain engine oil.
• If servicing the transmission, drain the lubricant from
the main gearcase and transfer case.
• If servicing the rear gearcase, drain the gearcase
lubricant.

Remove the driver’s seat (see Chapter 5).

Disconnect (-) negative battery cable.

Remove the passenger seat(s) and remove the rear service
panel (see Chapter 5).

Remove the rear seat base assembly from the vehicle by
removing the (2) fasteners from the rear seat base.

10. Remove the rear bumper, rear cargo box and box supports
from the vehicle (see Chapter 5).
11. Remove the (2) push rivets and remove the intake box from
the vehicle.

Remove
Push Rivets
12. Elevate the rear of the vehicle off the ground using a
suitable ATV lift and remove both rear wheels.
13. Remove all exhaust components from vehicle and engine.

3.17

ENGINE
14. Loosen the hose clamp attaching the outlet duct to the PVT
cover. Leave the duct attached to the upper frame support.

18. Remove the (6) fasteners retaining the upper bolt-in frame
brace and remove it from the vehicle with the ignition coil
and PVT duct attached.
Frame Support

Outlet Duct

Ignition
Coil
PVT Cover

15. Remove the (8) screws that retain the PVT cover and
remove cover.
16. Remove the high tension leads from the spark plugs and
disconnect the ignition coil harness.

PVT Duct
19. Remove the rear stabilizer bar from the linkage on both
sides of the vehicle.

Harness
Connection

NOTE: Be sure to mark / note which ignition coil
wire goes to which cylinder and ignition coil post.
The engine will misfire if the spark plug wires are
installed incorrectly. The spark plug wires are
marked PTO and MAG and should be installed to the
corresponding cylinder spark plug and coil post.

20. Remove the (4) fasteners retaining the stabilizer bar and
bracket and remove the assembly from the vehicle.

17. Remove the vent lines from the upper bolt-in frame brace
and plug vent lines to prevent fluid leakage during removal.

21. Remove the engine breather hose from the valve cover.

3.18

ENGINE
22. Loosen the hose clamp between the throttle body and intake
adaptor.
Loosen
Clamp

25. Remove the airbox and throttle body from the vehicle as an
assembly. Take care in not allowing the throttle cable to
bend excessively or kink. Carefully place the assembly on
the floor next to the vehicle. Insert a shop towel into the
engine intake adaptor to prevent dirt from entering the
engine.
NOTE: Ensure throttle cable is not being
excessively bent or kinked while removed from the
vehicle.
26. Mark the fuel injector harnesses to identify MAG and PTO
harness connections to aid during reassembly. Disconnect
the fuel injector harnesses.

23. Disconnect the T-MAP, IAC and TPS sensor connectors
from throttle body.

NOTE: The fuel injector harness connector and
locking spring is bonded to the fuel injectors with an
epoxy mix. DO NOT attempt to disconnect the
connector from the fuel injectors. Damage will occur
to the injector and/or harness if attempting to
separate at that location. Separate the fuel injector
from the vehicle by disconnecting at the end of the
harness as shown.
Fuel
Injector

Disconnect Here
Harness

DO NOT
Disconnect Here
24. Remove the remaining bolt attaching the airbox to the
frame (see photo).

IMPORTANT: Be sure to mark / note the color of the
fuel injector connectors. For proper engine function,
the fuel injectors must be connected correctly. Make
note of PTO and MAG side injectors before
disconnecting them. PTO = GRAY , MAG = BLACK

3.19

ENGINE
27. Disconnect the fuel line from the fuel injector rail by
slightly squeezing the lock tabs and gently pushing the
connector lock out. To separate the lines, pull the fuel line
from the tank strait down.

NOTE: If the upper jam nut is moved, shift cable
adjustment will be required during engine
installation (see Chapter 2 “Shift Cable Inspection /
Adjustment”).

Squeeze locking tabs together
Push lock outward

30. Disconnect the transmission gear indicator switch harness.

Gear Switch
Connector
28. Disconnect the shift cable from the transmission bell crank.
31. Disconnect the CPS harness.

Remove
Clip

CPS
Connector

29. Mark the upper jam nut and loosen the lower jam nut. Pull
the shift cable out of the mount.
32. Disconnect the stator / alternator harness.
Mark Upper
Jam Nut

Stator
Connector

Lower
Jam Nut

3.20

ENGINE
33. Disconnect the transmission speed sensor harness.

36. Remove the through-bolt that attaches the upper A-arm to
the rear hub on both sides of the vehicle.

Speed Sensor
Connector

3
34. Disconnect the cam phase sensor connector.
Cam Phase
Connector

37. Pivot the A-arms upward and rear hub carriers downward
and remove the drive shafts from the hub carriers.

Hub Carrier

35. Remove the castle nuts from both rear wheel hubs.
38. Grasp the rear drive shafts and pull sharply outward on the
shafts to disengage them from the rear gearcase.

Castle Nut

NOTE: Clean area around drive shaft orifices on
both sides of rear gearcase and cover orifices using
duct tape. This will prevent the lubricant from
leaking out during removal.

3.21

ENGINE
39. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
harness and the bypass coolant hose.

45. Remove RH engine mount fastener.

ECT
Connector

Coolant
Bypass
40. Loosen the hose clamp and remove the lower coolant hose
from the water pump cover inlet and drain coolant into a
suitable container.

46. Remove the (2) lower bolts that retain the LH transmission
mount to the frame.

Remove
(2) Lower Bolts

41. Remove the filler neck pressure cap to relieve the cooling
system vacuum.

47. Remove the (2) rear gearcase mount bracket fasteners and
mount bolt and remove bracket from vehicle.

NOTE: Use a portable wet-vac or syphon to prevent
any coolant from spilling.
42. Remove the upper coolant hose from the thermostat
housing outlet to relieve any coolant vacuum created in the
engine. Allow engine coolant to completely drain. Properly
dispose of the engine coolant / antifreeze.
43. Remove the (+) positive battery cable from the starter
motor terminal and (-) negative battery cable from the
starter motor engine mount.
44. Remove the outer PVT cover.
NOTE: The use of an overhead or portable engine
hoist is the only recommended method for removing
and installing the engine / transmission / rear
gearcase assembly.

3.22

ENGINE
48. Using an engine hoist, hook a chain between the engine /
transmission mounting plate and the transmission / rear
gearcase mounting plate.

50. Remove propshaft from the transmission output shaft.
51. Then move assembly towards the front of the vehicle while
lifting it out to allow the rear gearcase to clear the rear
portion of the frame.
52. Then lift assembly high enough to clear vehicle frame and
completely remove it from the vehicle to a work bench.

Engine/Transmission
Mount Plate
Transmission/Gearcase
Mount Plate

NOTE: Have an assistant help guide the engine in
and out of the vehicle while using an engine hoist to
prevent personal injury or damage to vehicle
components.
49. Lift the front portion of the assembly out first to allow the
engine valve cover to clear the vehicle frame.

Allow valve cover
to clear frame

3.23

ENGINE
Engine / Transmission Separation

Tilt the assembly up and remove the remaining (2) nuts that
retain the transmission to the engine.

Carefully separate the engine and perform the required
service (see “Engine Disassembly and Inspection”).

Once the engine / transmission / rear gearcase assembly has
been removed from the vehicle, the engine and transmission will
need to be separated to allow engine servicing. Use the
following procedure to separate the engine from the assembly.
1.

Remove the drive belt, drive clutch and driven clutch (see
Chapter 6).

Remove the (6) fasteners retaining the inner clutch cover
to the engine and transmission.

Remove only the (4) outer fasteners retaining the engine to
the transmission bracket.

3.24

ENGINE
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION
Cylinder Head Assembly Exploded View
Head Bolts

Valves

Rocker Arms

Retainer Locks (keepers)

Push Rods

Spring Retainers

Springs
Valve Seals (2)
Valve Spring Seats (2)

Coolant Bleeder

Cylinder Head

Hydraulic Lifters

3.25

ENGINE
Rocker Arms

Remove the valve cover.

Mark or tag rocker arms in order of disassembly to keep
them in order for reassembly.

If the push rod (A) is visibly bent, it should be replaced.

Cylinder Head Removal

Inspect the wear pad at the valve end of the rocker arm for
indications of scuffing or abnormal wear. If the pad is
grooved, replace the rocker arm.

NOTE: Do not attempt to true this surface by
grinding.
4.

NOTE: The cargo box assembly and the upper frame
bolt-in brace must be removed to allow enough
clearance to remove all the cylinder head bolts.
Refer to Chapter 5 for removal procedures.
1.

Loosen the six cylinder head bolts evenly 1/8 turn each in
a criss-cross pattern until loose.

Remove bolts (A) and tap cylinder head (B) lightly with a
soft face hammer until loose. CAUTION: Tap only in
reinforced areas or on thick parts of cylinder head casting
to avoid damaging the head or cylinder.

Remove cylinder head (B) and head gasket (C) from the
cylinder (D).

Check the rocker arm pad and fulcrum seat for excessive
wear, cracks, nicks or burrs.

Push Rods
1.

Clean push rods (A) in a suitable solvent. Blow dry push
rods with compressed air.

Use compressed air to confirm the oil passage is clear in the
center of the push rod.

WARNING
Always wear safety glasses when working with
compressed air to prevent personal injury.
3.

Check the ends of the push rods (A) for nicks, grooves,
roughness or excessive wear.

B
C

The push rods (A) can be visually checked for straightness
while they are installed in the engine by rotating them with
the valve closed. Push rods can also be checked with a dial
indicator or rolled across a flat surface to check for
straightness.

3.26

ENGINE
Cylinder Head Inspection

Valve Seal / Spring Service (On Engine)

Thoroughly clean cylinder head surface to remove all traces of
gasket material and carbon.

NOTE: The following procedure is only for servicing
the top end of the valve train when replacing valve
springs or replacing valve seals.

CAUTION
Use care not to damage sealing surface.

In some cases the valve train can be serviced while the cylinder
head is still on the engine. Keep all parts in order with respect
to their location in the cylinder head.

WARNING

Cylinder Head Warp
1.

Lay a straight edge (A) across the surface of the cylinder
head (B) at several different points and measure warp by
inserting a feeler gauge between the straight edge and the
cylinder head surface. If warp exceeds the service limit,
replace the cylinder head.

Wear eye protection or a face shield during
cylinder head disassembly and reassembly.
1.

Having already removed the valve cover, rocker arms and
pushrods, align the cylinder to be worked on at top dead
center (TDC). Install the Valve Pressure Hose (PU-45652)
into the spark plug hole. Hook the hose to an air
compressor and supply 50 to 100 psi to the hose. This will
seat the valves during valve spring removal. Do not
remove air from the hose at anytime until reassembly is
completed.

Using the Valve Spring Compressor (PU-45257),
compress the valve spring and remove the valve keepers.

NOTE: A small parts magnet (A) can aid in the
removal of the retainers (B).

Measure at different
points on the surface.

= In. / mm.
Cylinder Head Warp Limit:
.004" (.1016 mm) max

PU-45257
NOTE: To prevent damage to the valve seals, do not
compress the valve spring more than is needed to
remove the valve keepers.
3.

Remove spring retainer and spring.

The valve seals are now serviceable.

3.27

ENGINE
Cylinder Head Disassembly

IMPORTANT: It is recommended to replace seals
whenever the cylinder head is disassembled.
Hardened, cracked or worn valve seals will cause
excessive oil consumption and carbon buildup.

Carefully remove the cylinder components.

Remove valve guide seals.

Mark the valves with a white pen. Remove the valves from
the cylinder head. This will ensure that the valves are
properly placed during engine reassembly.

Mark the Valves

Place the hydraulic lifters (C), pushrods (D), and rocker
arms (E) in a safe, clean area.

E
3.

Measure free length of spring with a Vernier caliper.
Compare to specifications. Replace spring if measurement
is out of specification.

Valve Spring
Free Length

= In. / mm.
Valve Spring Free Length:
Std: 1.735" (44.069 mm)

3.28

ENGINE
Valve Inspection
1.

Remove all carbon from valves with a soft wire wheel or
brush.

= In. / mm.

Check valve face for runout, pitting, and burnt spots. To
check for bent valve stems, mount valve in a drill or use “V”
blocks and a dial indicator.

Valve Stem Diameter:
Intake: 0.2356"  0.00039"
(5.985  0.01 mm)
Exhaust: 0.2351"  0.00039"
(5.972  0.01 mm)
5.

Measure valve guide (C) inside diameter at the top middle
and end of the guide using a small hole gauge and a
micrometer. Measure in two directions.

Check end of valve stem for flaring, pitting, wear or damage
(A). Inspect split keeper groove for wear or flaring of the
keeper seat area (B).

= In. / mm.
B

NOTE: The valves can be re-faced or end ground, if
necessary. They must be replaced if extensively
worn, burnt, bent, or damaged.
4.

Measure diameter of valve stem with a micrometer in three
places, then rotate 90 degrees and measure again (six
measurements total). Compare to specifications.

Valve Guide I.D.:
0.23672"  0.000295"
(6.0617  0.0075 mm)
6.

Subtract valve stem measurement from the valve guide
measurement to obtain stem to guide clearance.

NOTE: The valve guides cannot be replaced. Be
sure to measure each guide and valve combination
individually.

Measure valve stem in several places.
Rotate the valve 90 degrees and measure
for wear.

3.29

ENGINE
Combustion Chamber
1.

Clean all accumulated carbon deposits from combustion
chamber and valve seat area with carbon cleaner and a soft
plastic scraper.

IMPORTANT: Do not use a wire brush, metal scraper,
or abrasive cleaners to clean the bottom of the
cylinder head. Extensive damage to the cylinder head
may result. Wear safety glasses during cleaning.

Combustion Area

NOTE: Valve seat width and point of contact on the
valve face is very important for proper sealing. The
valve must contact the valve seat over the entire
circumference of the seat, and the seat must be the
proper width all the way around. If the seat is
uneven, compression leakage will result. If the seat
is too wide, seat pressure is reduced, causing
carbon accumulation and possible compression
loss. If the seat is too narrow, heat transfer from
valve to seat is reduced. The valve may overheat and
warp, resulting in burnt valves.

Install pilot into valve guide.

Apply cutting oil to valve seat and cutter.

Place 46 cutter on the pilot and make a light cut.

Valve Seat Reconditioning
NOTE: Polaris recommends that the work be done
by a local machine shop that specializes in this area.
NOTE: The cylinder head valve guides cannot be
replaced.

WARNING
Wear eye protection or a face shield during
cylinder head disassembly and reassembly.
Valve Seat Inspection
Inspect valve seat in cylinder head for pitting, burnt spots,
roughness, and uneven surface. If any of the above conditions
exist, the valve seat must be reconditioned. If the valve seat is
cracked the cylinder head must be replaced.
Follow the manufacturers instructions provided with the valve
seat cutters in the commercially available cylinder head
reconditioning kit. Abrasive stone seat reconditioning
equipment can also be used. Keep all valves in order with their
respective seat.

3.30

ENGINE
4.

Inspect the cut area of the seat:

* If the contact area is less than 75% of the circumference of the
seat, rotate the pilot 180 and make another light cut.

NOTE: When using an interference angle, the seat
contact point on the valve will be very narrow, and is
a normal condition. Look for an even and continuous
contact point all the way around the valve face (A).

* If the cutter now contacts the uncut portion of the seat, check
the pilot. Look for burrs, nicks, or runout. If the pilot is bent it
must be replaced.
* If the contact area of the cutter is in the same place, the valve
guide is distorted from improper installation

* If the contact area of the initial cut is greater than 75%,
continue to cut the seat until all pits are removed and a new seat
surface is evident. NOTE: Remove only the amount of material
necessary to repair the seat surface.
5.

Proper Seat Contact
on Valve Face

To check the contact area of the seat on the valve face, apply
a thin coating of Prussian Blue paste to the valve seat. If
using an interference angle (46) apply black permanent
marker to the entire valve face (A).

Bottom 60 Seat 45

Top 30

6.
7.

Insert valve into guide and tap valve lightly into place a few
times.
Remove valve and check where the Prussian Blue
indicates seat contact on the valve face. The valve seat
should contact the middle of the valve face or slightly
above, and must be the proper width.

Seat
Width

* If the indicated seat contact is at the top edge of the valve face
and contacts the margin area (B) it is too high on the valve face.
Use the 30 cutter to lower the valve seat.

= In. / mm.

* If too low, use the 60 cutter to raise the seat. When contact
area is centered on the valve face, measure seat width.

Valve Seat Width:
Intake Std: .028" (.7 mm)
Limit: .055" (1.4 mm)
Exhaust Std: .039” (1.0 mm)
Limit: .071" (1.8 mm)

* If the seat is too wide or uneven, use both top and bottom
cutters to narrow the seat.
* If the seat is too narrow, widen using the 45 cutter and recheck contact point on the valve face and seat width after each
cut.

Clean all filings from the area with hot soapy water. Rinse
and dry with compressed air.

3.31

ENGINE
9.

Lubricate the valve guides with clean engine oil, and apply
oil or water based lapping compound to the face of the
valve.

NOTE: Lapping is not required with an interference
angle valve job.
10. Insert the valve into its respective guide and lap using a
lapping tool or a section of fuel line connected to the valve
stem.

Cylinder Head Reassembly
NOTE: Assemble the valves one at a time to
maintain proper order.
1.

Apply engine oil to valve guides and seats.

Coat valve stem with molybdenum disulfide grease or
PS-4 PLUS Synthetic engine oil.

Install valve carefully with a rotating motion to avoid
damaging valve seal.

Valve seals should be installed after the valves are in the
head to avoid valve seal damage. Install new valve seals on
valve guides.

Dip valve spring and retainer in clean engine oil and install.

Place retainer on spring and install Valve Spring
Compressor (PU-45257). Install split keepers with the gap
even on both sides.

NOTE: A small magnet can be used to aid in the
installation of the keepers.
11. Rotate the valve rapidly back and forth until the cut sounds
smooth. Lift the valve slightly off of the seat, rotate 1/4 turn,
and repeat the lapping process. Do this four to five times
until the valve is fully seated, and repeat process for the
other valve(s).

PU-45257

12. Thoroughly clean cylinder head and valves.

Repeat procedure for remaining valves. When all valves are
installed, tap lightly with soft faced hammer on the end of
the valves to seat the split keepers.

NOTE: To prevent damage to the valve seals, do not
compress the valve spring more than necessary to
install the keepers.

3.32

ENGINE
Valve Sealing Test

Valve Lifter Removal / Inspection

Remove the valve lifters by reaching into the crankcase
and pushing the lifter up through the lifter bore by hand.

Thoroughly clean the lifters in cleaning solvent and wipe
them with a clean, lint-free cloth.

Mark the lifters with a white pen if using the lifters for
reassembly. This will ensure that the lifters are properly
placed during engine reassembly.

Clean and dry the combustion chamber area (A).

Mark Hydraulic Lifter

Pour a small amount of clean solvent onto the intake port
and check for leakage around each intake valve. The valve
seats should hold fluid with no seepage.

Repeat for exhaust valves by pouring fluid into exhaust
port.

Cylinder Removal

Check the lifters for wear or scores.

Follow engine disassembly procedures to remove rocker
cover and cylinder head.

Check the bottom end of lifter to make sure that it has a
slight convex.

Tap cylinder (A) lightly with a rubber mallet in the
reinforced areas only until loose.

If the bottom surface has worn flat, it may be used with the
original camshaft only.

Rock cylinder forward and backward while lifting it from
the crankcase, supporting pistons and connecting rods.
Support pistons with Piston Support Block (PN 2870390).

Inspect Hydraulic Lifter
NOTE: Lifters that are scored, worn, or if the bottom
is not smooth should be replaced with new lifters
and cam as an assembly. If replacing the lifters, the
camshaft should also be replaced.

3.33

ENGINE
Piston Removal
1.

Remove the circlip. Mark the piston with a white pen to
ensure proper orientation (if reused) during assembly.

The oil control ring is a three piece design consisting of a top
and bottom steel rail and a center expander section. The top rail
has a locating tab on the end which fits into a notch (B) in the
upper oil ring land of the piston.
To Remove:
A) Remove the top rail first followed by the bottom rail.
B) Remove the expander.
Compression
Rings
Oil Ring

NOTE: If the pistons are to be reused, reassemble
the pistons in the same cylinder and direction from
which they were removed.
NOTE: New pistons are non-directional and can be
placed in either cylinder.
2.

Remove piston circlip and push piston pin out of piston. If
necessary, heat the crown of the piston slightly with a
propane torch. CAUTION: Do not apply heat to the piston
rings. The ring may lose radial tension.

Remove top compression ring:

*Using a piston ring pliers: Carefully expand ring and lift it off
the piston. CAUTION: Do not expand the ring more than the
amount necessary to remove it from the piston, or the ring may
break.
*By hand: Placing both thumbs as shown, spread the ring open
and push up on the opposite side. Do not scratch the ring lands.

Repeat procedure for second ring.

Remove the oil control ring.

3.34

ENGINE
Cylinder Inspection

Remove gasket material from cylinder sealing surfaces.

Inspect the top of the cylinder (B) for warp using a straight
edge (A) and feeler gauge (C). Refer to Ill. 1 and Ill. 2.

Inspect cylinder for taper and out of round with a
telescoping gauge or a dial bore gauge. Measure in two
different directions, front to back and side to side, on three
different levels (1/2, down from top, in the middle, and 1/
2, up from bottom). Record measurements. If cylinder is
tapered or out of round beyond .002", the cylinder must be
replaced.
1/2” Down From Top of Cylinder

3
B
Measure at different
points on surface.

B
A
1/2” Up From Bottom

= In. / mm.
Cylinder Taper Limit:
.002" (.050 mm) Max.

= In. / mm.

Cylinder Out of Round:
Limit: .002" (.050 mm) Max.

Cylinder Warp: .004" (0.1 mm) Max.
3.

Inspect cylinder for wear, scratches, or damage.

Standard Bore Size
(Both Cylinders): 3.1496" (80 mm)

3.35

ENGINE
Cylinder Hone Selection and Honing
Procedure
Cylinders may be wet or dry honed depending upon the hone
manufacturer’s recommendations. Wet honing removes more
material faster and leaves a more distinct pattern in the bore.

If cylinder wear or damage is excessive, it will be necessary to
replace the cylinder. The cylinders are lined with a nicasil
coating and are not repairable. Hone only enough to de-glaze the
outer layer of the cylinder bore.

CAUTION
A hone which will straighten as well as remove
material from the cylinder is very important.
Using a common spring loaded glaze breaker
for honing is not advised for nicasil cylinders.
Polaris recommends using a rigid hone or arbor
honing machine. Cylinders may be wet or dry
honed depending upon the hone manufacturer's
recommendations.
Wet honing removes more material faster and
leaves a more distinct pattern in the bore.

Honing To Deglaze
A finished cylinder should have a cross-hatch pattern to ensure
piston ring seating and to aid in the retention of the fuel/oil
mixture during initial break in. Hone cylinder according to hone
manufacturer's instructions, or these guidelines:
• Honing should be done with a diamond hone. Cylinder
could be damaged if the hone is not hard enough to
scratch the nicasil lining.
• Use a motor speed of approximately 300-500 RPM, run
the hone in and out of the cylinder rapidly until cutting
tension decreases. Remember to keep the hone drive
shaft centered (or cylinder centered on arbor) and to
bring the stones approximately 1/2” (1.3 cm) above and
below the bore at the end of each stroke.
• Release the hone at regular intervals and inspect the
bore to determine if it has been sufficiently de-glazed,
and to check for correct cross-hatch.
NOTE: Do not allow cylinder to heat up during honing.
• After honing has been completed, inspect cylinder for
thinning or peeling.

3.36

Example of Cross Hatch Pattern

IMPORTANT: Clean the cylinder after honing
If cylinder wear or damage is excessive, it will be necessary to
replace the cylinder. The cylinders are lined with a nicasil
coating and are not repairable. Hone only enough to de-glaze the
outer layer of the cylinder bore.

Cleaning the Cylinder After Honing
It is very important that the cylinder be thoroughly cleaned after
honing to remove all grit material. Wash the cylinder in a
solvent, then in hot, soapy water. Pay close attention to areas
where the cylinder sleeve meets the aluminum casting (transfer
port area). Use electrical contact cleaner if necessary to clean
these areas. Rinse thoroughly, dry with compressed air, and oil
the bore immediately with Polaris Lubricant.

ENGINE
Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance

Measure piston pin O.D. Replace piston and/or piston pin
if out of specification.

Measure piston outside diameter at a point 5 mm up from the
bottom of the piston at a right angle to the direction of the piston
pin.
Subtract this measurement from the maximum cylinder bore
measurement obtained during the “Cylinder Inspection”
procedure.
5 mm

3
Piston Pin Measurement Locations

Piston
Piston Pin

Piston to Cylinder Clearance:
See “800 EFI Engine Service
Specifications” on page 3.9

Piston Pin O.D.:
See “800 EFI Engine Service
Specifications” on page 3.9
3.

Measure connecting rod small end ID.

Piston O.D.:
See “800 EFI Engine Service
Specifications” on page 3.9

Piston / Rod Inspection
1.

Measure piston pin bore.

Connecting Rod Small End I.D.:
See “800 EFI Engine Service
Specifications” on page 3.9

Piston Pin Bore:
See “800 EFI Engine Service
Specifications” on page 3.9

3.37

ENGINE
4.

Measure piston ring to groove clearance by placing the ring
in the ring land and measuring with a thickness gauge.
Replace piston and rings if ring-to-groove clearance
exceeds service limits.

If the bottom installed gap measurement exceeds the
service limit, replace the rings. If ring gap is smaller than
the specified limit, file ring ends until gap is within
specified range.

NOTE: Always check piston ring installed gap after
re-boring a cylinder or when installing new rings. A
re-bored cylinder should always be scrubbed
thoroughly with hot soapy water, rinsed, and dried
completely. Wipe cylinder bore with oil immediately
to remove residue and prevent rust.

Piston
Ring

Starter Drive Bendix Removal / Inspection
Feeler Gauge

See “800 EFI Engine Service
Specifications” on page 3.9

Remove stator housing bolts and remove housing.

Remove the flywheel nut and washer. Install Flywheel
Puller (PN 2871043) and remove flywheel.

NOTE: Do not thread the puller bolts into the
flywheel more than 1/4, or stator coils may be
damaged.
3.

Piston Ring Installed Gap
1.

Remove starter bendix assembly (A). Note the thrust
washers located on both sides of the bendix.

Place each piston ring (A) inside cylinder (B) using a
piston to push ring squarely into place as shown.

A
C
B

25-50 mm

Piston Ring Installed Gap:
See “800 EFI Engine Service
Specifications” on page 3.9
NOTE: Ring should be installed with the mark facing
upward.
2.

Measure installed gap with a feeler gauge (C) at both the
top and bottom of the cylinder.

IMPORTANT: A difference in end gap indicates
cylinder taper. The cylinder should be measured for
excessive taper and out of round.

3.38

Inspect the thrust washer for wear or damage and replace
if necessary.

After the bendix is removed, remove the two bolts retaining
the starter. Tap on the starter assembly (B) with a soft faced
mallet to loosen the starter from the crankcase.

ENGINE
6.

Inspect gear teeth on starter drive (A). Replace starter drive
if gear teeth are cracked, worn, or broken.

Inspect the bendix bushing (C) in the mag cover for wear.
Replace as needed.

2871043
4.

Use caution when removing the wire holddown (B) and the
stator assembly (D). Do not tap or bump the gear /stator
housing cover or the stator. This could cause the seal
around the gear/stator housing cover and the crankcase to
break, causing a leak.

Flywheel / Stator Removal / Inspection
1.

Remove stator housing bolts and remove housing.

B
D

5.
Remove Stator
Cover

Engine Crankcase Disassembly / Inspection
1.

Remove flywheel nut and washer.

Install Flywheel Puller (PN 2871043) and remove flywheel
(A).

Remove the bendix (E) if necessary.

Remove the stator cover (A) and water pump cover (B).

CAUTION
Do not thread the puller bolts into the flywheel
more than 1/4, or stator coils may be damaged.

3.39

ENGINE
2.

Remove the nut (C), washer (D) and water pump impeller
(E). Remove part of the water pump seal behind the
impeller.

Remove the starter bendix (G), wire holddown plate (H),
and the woodruff key (I) from the crankshaft. The stator
does not have to be removed at this point.

6.
3.

Remove flywheel nut and washer.

Install Flywheel Puller (PN 2871043) and remove flywheel
(F).

Remove the gear/stator housing bolts and remove the gear/
stator housing cover (J) and gasket from the crankcase. Be
sure to catch the excess oil from the crankcase.

CAUTION
Do not thread the puller bolts into the flywheel
more than 1/4, or stator coils may be damaged.

2871043

Note the position of the gears in the photo.

Camshaft Gear
F
Crank Gear

Counterbalance Gear

3.40

ENGINE
8.

Use a white pen to accent the timing marks on the following
gears: camshaft gear (K), crankshaft gear (M), or
counterbalance gear (N) This will ensure proper gear
alignment and timing during reassembly of the gears.
K

Water Pump Gear

Timing Marks

CAUTION
Wear safety glasses at all times. Use caution
when working with the top gear.
The springs could cause injury or become lost
should they pop out.
12. Remove all three springs using one of the tapered pins from
the Tapered Pins (PU-45497-1).

NOTE: If replacing one of the gears, it is
recommended that all of the gears be replaced. A
gear kit is available.
9.

Use the Cam Gear Tooth Alignment Tool (PU-45497-2) to
align and hold the cam split gear assembly. With the split
gear aligned, remove the bolt and cam gear assembly.

NOTE: Install the Cam Gear Tooth Alignment Tool
(PU-45497-2) into the assembly hole counter
clockwise from the timing mark (see page 3.42).
10. Inspect the cam gear teeth and check to make sure there is
spring tension offsetting the teeth between the two gears.
If there is no tension, check the springs inside of the cam
gear assembly.

PU-45497-1

13. With a white marking pen, accent the timing mark on the
gear that contains the springs.

3 Loaded Springs

Accent Timing Marks

11. The cam gear assembly contains three loaded springs. To
open the cam gear assembly:
• Place the cam gear on a flat surface with the timing
mark side facing up.
• While holding both gears together, lightly work a small
flathead screwdriver between the two gears.
• Remove the top gear. The springs should stay in place.

3.41

ENGINE
14. Inspect the gear teeth and the three tabs on the gears for
wear.

Inspect Teeth & Tabs

To Assemble:
• Hold the spring with one finger.
• Start the pointed end of the tapered pin into the cam
gear hole. Slowly push the dowel through the hole until
the end of the dowel is almost flush with the spring.
• Perform this procedure with all three tapered pins.
• Do not push the pins too far through or the springs will
pop out.
NOTE: Do not remove the tapered pins at this time.
17. Note in photograph that the Tapered Pins (PU-45497-1) are
below flush with end of the springs. This helps to align the
three gear tabs during the next step.

Replace 3 Springs
15. Install the new springs into the grooves of the cam gear.

Install Springs

PU-45497-1

16. Insert the pointed dowels from the Tapered Pins (PU45497-1) into the cam gear.

Cam Gear Spring Installation Tool Kit:
(PU-45497)
Tapered Pins:
(PU-45497-1)
Cam Gear Tooth Align Tool:
(PU-45497-2)
18. Line up the two gears using the timing marks and the three
gear tabs that were referenced earlier. Push the gears back
together, using both hands and hold securely.
Align Timing Marks

PU-45497-1

3.42

ENGINE
19. Once the gears are pressed together, firmly hold the gears
together with one hand. Carefully remove the Tapered Pins
(PU-45497-1) by pulling them out one at a time with the
other hand.

21. To remove the balance shaft gear, the flat side of the
camshaft (P) must face the balance shaft gear. To rotate the
camshaft, use the Cam Spanner Wrench (PU-45498) to
rotate the camshaft so the flat side of the camshaft faces the
balance shaft gear.

PU-45498

3
P

20. After the tapered pins are removed, be sure the cam gear
assembly is held together tightly. Place the cam gear
assembly on a flat surface. Use the Cam Gear Tooth
Alignment Tool (PU-45497-2) to align the teeth of the cam
gears, as shown in the picture.
NOTE: Install the Cam Gear Alignment Tool (PU45497-2) into one assembly hole counter clockwise
from the timing mark.

NOTE: This Cam Spanner Wrench (PU-45498) is
only needed to rotate the camshaft when the entire
valve train is assembled. If the rocker arms are
removed, the cam-shaft can be turned by hand.
22. Remove the bolt and nut from the balance shaft gear. Try
to remove the balance shaft gear. If the gear does not come
off manually, use the Flywheel Puller (PN 2871043) to
remove the balance shaft gear.

2871043

PU-45497-2
NOTE: For ease of installing the Cam Gear
Alignment Tool (PU-45497-2), use a twisting motion
when pushing down on the tool.

3.43

ENGINE
23. Inspect the crankshaft gear (Q) for broken or worn teeth. If
the crankshaft gear does not need to be replaced, it does not
need to be removed. If the crankshaft gear is damaged,
remove the crankshaft gear with the Flywheel Puller
(PN 2871043).

26. Rotate the water/oil pump gear (S), so that all four bolts are
visible though the gear. Remove the four bolts with a hex
wrench. Pull out the pump.

24. Install the two puller bolts (R). Tighten the puller bolts up
so that the bolts are at equal length.

27. Inspect the oil pump rotors for wear. Mark the rotors with
a white pen to ensure upon reassembly that the correct sides
of the rotors are installed and mesh with the same edges as
previously installed.

Mark Rotors
R

25. Install the Flywheel Puller (PN 2871043) and remove the
crankshaft gear, if needed.

2871043

NOTE: If replacing the old rotors, new replacement
rotors will fit into the original oil/water pump
housing.
28. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance between the
two rotors. Measure the gap between the two rotor tips as
shown below. The clearance should not exceed 0.006"
(0.15 mm).

Max Tip Clearance
0.006” (0.15 mm)

3.44

ENGINE
29. Remove the oil pressure relief. The oil pressure relief
consists of a bolt, washer, spring, and valve (dowel).
Inspect the valve (dowel) for signs of possible obstructions.
Use compressed air to blow out any debris.

31. Carefully press the gear off the assembly while supporting
the housing assembly.

Press Off Gear

3
CAUTION
30. Reinstall the valve (dowel chamfered end first). Install the
spring, washer, and bolt. Torque to specification .
22 ± 2 ft. lbs.
(30 ± 3 Nm).

Wear appropriate safety gear during this
procedure. Protective gloves, clothing and eye
wear are required.
32. Remove the snap ring from the assembly. Place the housing
in a support and press out the bearing/shaft assembly.
Press out shaft
and bearing
assembly.

Chamfer
End First

Bearing

=T
22  2 ft. lbs. (30  3 Nm)
NOTE: Be sure to place the tapered end of the valve
(dowel) in first. If the valve is installed incorrectly, oil
pressure and oil priming problems will occur.

Retaining Ring
33. Place the shaft in a press to remove the bearing.

Press Off Bearing

3.45

ENGINE
34. Press shaft into the new bearing..

37. Remove thrust plate (U).

U
Press On Bearing

35. Press the bearing/shaft assembly using the bearing's outer
race. Do not use the shaft to press the assembly into the
housing, as bearing damage may result. Install retaining
ring.
Press Bearing / Shaft
Assembly using
outer race only

36. Press gear onto shaft while supporting the housing.

3.46

38. Remove PTO end engine mount. Remove crankcase bolts.
Tap on the reinforced areas on the cases using soft hammer.
Carefully separate the two crankcase halves.
Separate
Crankcase Halves

NOTE: Only remove the oil baffle if the baffle is
damaged. When removing the oil baffle bolts, use a
heat gun to heat the bolts and loosen the Loctite.
This will prevent any possible damage to the bolts or
to the crankcase casting.

ENGINE
39. Remove and clean oil pick up (V) and oil baffle weldment
(W).

Camshaft Inspection
1.

Thoroughly clean the cam shaft.

Visually inspect each cam lobe for wear, chafing or
damage.

Measure height of each cam lobe using a micrometer.
Compare to specification.

3
40. Remove balance shaft and crankshaft.

Cam Lobe Height

= In. / mm.
Cam Lobe Height
Intake (Std):
1.357” (34.477 mm)
41. Remove and inspect crankshaft main journal bearings for
abnormal wear. It is recommended to replace the
bearings anytime the engine is disassembled.

Exhaust (Std.):
1.342” (34.096 mm)

3.47

ENGINE
4.

Measure camshaft journal outside diameters (O.D.).

ENGINE REASSEMBLY
Crankcase Reassembly
CAUTION
After any reassembly or rebuild, the engine
must be primed using the Oil Priming Adapter
(PU-45778) and a 3/4-full oil filter before initial
start-up (see “Oil Pump Priming”).

C
B
A

NOTE: Before assembly, clean the bolts and bolt
holes with Primer N (PN 2874275) to remove any
debris. This will ensure proper sealing when
installing bolts.
1.

Install oil pick up (A), if removed. Torque to specification.

= In. / mm.
Camshaft Journal O.D.
A. (MAG) 1.654" ± .00039" (42 ± .010 mm)
B. (CTR) 1.634" ± .00039" (41.50 ± .010 mm)
C. (PTO) 1.614" ± .00039" (41 ± .010 mm)
5.

B
A

Measure ID of camshaft journal bores.

= In. / mm.
Camshaft Journal Bore I.D.
MAG: 1.656" ± 0.00039" (42.07± 0.010 mm)
CTR: 1.637" ± 0.00039" (41.58 ± 0.010 mm)
PTO: 1.617" ± 0.00039" (41.07 ± 0.010 mm)
6.

=T
Oil Baffle Weldment & Oil Pick Up Bolt Torque:
60 ± 6 in. lbs. (6.8 ± 0.68 Nm)

Calculate oil clearance by subtracting journal O.D.s from
journal bore I.D.s. Compare to specification.
3.

= In. / mm.
Calculated Camshaft Oil Clearance:
Std: 0.0027" (.070 mm)
Limit: .0039" (.10 mm)
NOTE: Replace camshaft if damaged or if any part is
worn past the service limit.
NOTE: Replace the engine crankcase assembly if
camshaft journal bores are damaged or worn
excessively.

3.48

Install oil baffle weldment (B). Torque bolts to
specification.

Install the balance shaft. Inspect balance shaft clearance (C)
in both gearcase halves. Rotate balance shaft to ensure there
is clearance between it and the oil baffle weldment.

ENGINE
NOTE: Always install new balance shaft bearings.
4.

Apply assembly lube to cam journals and balance shaft
bearing surfaces of the MAG case halve. Install camshaft
and balance shaft.

Assemble the crankcase halves. Apply LocTite™ 242 (PN
2871949) to the threads and pipe sealant to the bolt flanges.
Torque bolts to specification following torque pattern at
beginning of this chapter.

=T
Crankcase Bolt Torque:
22  2 ft. lbs. (30  3 Nm)
Torque in sequence
8.

Lubricate cam lobes and valve lifters with Moly Lube
Grease.
Apply Moly Lube

Cam Lobes

Install crankshaft assembly and apply engine oil to crank
pins and rods (D). Apply assembly lube to the main journals
and bearings.

Lifters
9.

Lubricate lifters with engine oil and install in the original
order as removed in disassembly. Apply Lubricant or Moly
Lube to the ends of the lifters.

NOTE: Always replace the camshaft and lifters as a
set.

Apply Crankcase Sealant (PN 2871557) to the top gearcase
halve.

NOTE: Do not apply sealant to cam relief hole (E).

3.49

ENGINE
10. Lubricate connecting rods with PS-4 PLUS synthetic
engine oil.

13. Install piston assemblies into cylinder aligning the piston
pin holes, to ensure proper alignment of the pistons to the
connecting rods upon assembly. Partially install the piston
pins into the pistons.

11. Install new cylinder gasket on crankcase. Align gasket on
the dowel pins for proper gasket alignment.
NOTE: To help align the pistons, slide a rod that is
close to the same diameter as the wrist pin holes to
properly align them in the cylinder.
14. Position cylinder and piston assemblies onto the connecting
rods and push the piston pins through the piston and
connecting rods.

12. Orientate the piston rings on the piston before installation
into the cylinders. Set the gaps of the rings every 120° (see
illustration below).
1

Piston Ring
Orientation

Push in Piston Pins

15. Install the piston pin circlips. The circlip ends should be
installed at the 12 O'clock position.
1. Top Ring

2. Second Ring

3. Oil Ring
Piston Pin Cirlcip in
12 O’clock position

3.50

ENGINE
NOTE: While installing in piston circlips, cover all
engine passages. The clip could fall into the engine
during installation.

17. Assemble rotors as marked when disassembled. Use a
cleaner to remove the marks previously made on the rotors.
Line Up Marks

3
18. Apply assembly lube or oil to the rotors on the oil pump
shaft.
16. Install camshaft thrust plate (G) with new bolts. Torque
bolts to specification.
NOTE: New bolts have patch lock on the threads
and do not require Loctite™.

NOTE: The application of lubrication aids in priming
the oil pump during initial engine start up.
Lubricate Rotors

19. Align the bolt holes and install oil pump assembly into
crankcase. Rotate the rotors in the housing during
installation, as this checks for binding if new rotors are
used.

NOTE: For assembly of the gears, the cam gear and
the crankshaft gear are stamped with “This Side
Out". This indicates the side of the gear that faces
outward or away from the case.

Thrust Plate Screw Torque:
115 ± 12 in. lbs. (13 ± 1.35 Nm)

NOTE: Before assembly, clean the bolts and bolt
holes with Primer N (PN 2874275) to remove any
debris. This will ensure proper sealing when
installing bolts and new Loctite™.

3.51

ENGINE
20. Install oil pump housing bolts (H). The new bolts contain
patch lock, so Loctite is not needed on the new bolts.
Torque bolts to specification and follow the torque
sequence at beginning of the chapter.

22. Before installing the crankshaft gear (I), heat the crankshaft
gear to 250 F (121C) on a hot plate (J).

I
H

NOTE: Occasionally spin the oil pump when
installing bolts to check for binding of the rotors.

=T
Oil Pump Bolt Torque:
84  8 in. lbs. (9.50 0.90 Nm)
* Torque in Sequence
21. Apply Loctite 242 (PN 2871949) to the crankshaft.

CAUTION
The crankshaft gear is extremely hot! Severe
burns or injury can occur if the gear is not
handled with extreme care and caution. Follow
the procedure below to help ensure safety.
23. Use extreme caution when removing the crankshaft gear
from the hot plate. Use a pair of pliers and leather gloves
when handling the crankshaft gear.
24. Install the crankshaft gear (I) onto the crankshaft.
NOTE: For assembly of the gears, the cam gear and
the crankshaft gear are stamped with “This Side
Out". This indicates the side of the gear that faces
outward or away from the case.

3.52

ENGINE
25. Install counter balance shaft gear (J) with new key, aligning
timing marks with crankshaft gear (I). Install washer and
bolt. Use the Gear Holder (PU-45838). Torque to
specification.

NOTE: Cam Spanner Wrench (PU-45498) is only
needed to rotate the camshaft when the entire valve
train is assembled.

PU-45498

3
PU-45838

=T
Balance Shaft Gear Bolt Torque:
22  2 ft. lbs. (30  3 Nm)
26. Use the Cam Gear Alignment Tool (PU-45497-2) to align
the teeth of the cam gear (M). Install the cam gear (M) (with
the Cam Gear Alignment Tool still in place) onto the
camshaft. The timing marks on the camshaft gear should
align with the keyway on the balance shaft gear.

27. Reinstall the camshaft gear; so the timing marks are
properly aligned. Install the washer and bolt. Torque to
specification.
NOTE: Be sure all of the timing marks are properly
aligned.

Timing Marks

PU-45497-2

Timing Marks

NOTE: If the timing mark on the camshaft gear does
not align properly, remove the camshaft gear and
tool. Use the Cam Spanner Wrench (PU-45498) to
rotate the cam to the proper position.

=T
Counterbalance Gear and Camshaft
Gear Bolt Torque:
22  2 ft. lbs. (30  3 Nm)

3.53

ENGINE
28. Before installing the gear / stator housing, replace the seals
in the cover. Install a new water pump seal (N) into the gear
/ stator housing. Use the Water Pump Mechanical Seal
Installer (PA-44995) to properly install the seal to the
correct depth in the cover.

NOTE: Install the crankshaft seal (P) with the seal lip
facing out (towards the crankcase).

PA-44995

PA
99
-4 4
5

Seal lip goes towards the crankcase.
30. Once the crankshaft seal is installed into the gear / stator
housing cover, set the direction of the paper lip by sliding
the Main Crankshaft Seal Saver (PA-45658) into the
crankshaft seal from the rubber lipped side to the paper lip
side (Back to Front). Remove the tool.

IMPORTANT: Due to seal design and construction,
seals MUST be installed DRY (no lubricant) during
assembly. Use of lubricants (oil, soapy water, etc.) will
not allow the seal to wear-in and seal properly. Do not
touch seal surface or allow seal surface to come in
contact with contaminates during installation.
Thoroughly clean parts, tools and hands before
installation.

Important: Set the direction
of the paper lip seal

PU-45658

NOTE: To remove the water pump seal, the gear/
stator housing must be removed. The water pump
seal cannot be removed or installed with the gear/
stator housing attached to the engine. Shaft damage
will occur.
NOTE: Install the water pump seal (N) with the seal
lip facing out (towards the crankcase). Use of a
hydraulic press is recommended for this procedure.
29. Install a new crankshaft seal (P) into the gear/stator housing
cover. Use the Universal Driver Handle (PU-45543) and
the Main Seal Installer (PA-45483) to seat the crankshaft
seal into place.

31. Carefully install the tapered end of the Crankshaft Seal
Protection Tool (PA-45658) through the paper side of the
crankshaft seal (Back to Front). Leave the seal protector
installed in the crankshaft seal. Check the crankshaft seal
lips to verify they have not been rolled or damaged.

PU-45543
PU-45658
P

PA-45483

3.54

ENGINE
32. Before installing the gear/stator housing cover, install the
Water Pump Seal Saver (PA-45401) onto the water pump
shaft.

PA-45401

3
35. Install the gear/stator housing gasket onto the crankcase.
Gear / Stator
Housing Gasket
33. Install a NEW gasket to the gear/stator housing cover and
crankcase. With the tools installed, carefully place the gear/
stator housing cover over the protection tools.

36. Secure the gear / stator housing cover to the crankcase with
the cover bolts. Torque bolts in proper sequence to
specification. Remove seal protectors from the shaft ends
once the cover is secure.
34. Apply Crankcase Sealant (PN 2871557) to the outside
edges of the crankcase halves (see arrows), where the
crankcases mate (see the following photos). This helps to
prevent coolant leakage.

PA-45401

PA-45658

=T
Gear/Stator Housing Bolt Torque:
96  3 in. lbs. (10.85  0.35 Nm)
*Torque in proper sequence

3.55

ENGINE
NOTE: Before assembly, clean the bolts and bolt
holes with Primer N (PN 2874275) to remove any
debris. This will ensure proper sealing when
installing bolts.

39. Install water pump cover (R) with new O-ring seal. Torque
bolts to specification in proper sequence (see Page 3.4).
Install the O-ring dry
No lubricants

37. Install shaft seal with ceramic surface facing inward.
R

96 ± 3 in. lbs.
(10.85 ± 1.35 Nm)

=T
38. Install water pump impeller (P). Secure the impeller with
the washer and a new nut (Q). Torque the nut to
specification.

Water Pump Housing Bolt Torque:
96  3 in. lbs. (10.85  0.35 Nm)
*Torque in proper sequence
40. Sparingly apply Starter Drive Grease (PN 2871423) to the
starter drive. Install the starter bendix.

NOTE: There are thrust washers on both sides of
starter drive.

=T
Water Pump Impeller Nut Torque:
108  6 in. lbs. (6.8  0.68 Nm)

3.56

ENGINE
Flywheel / Stator Installation

NOTE: Before assembly, clean the bolts and bolt
holes with Primer N (PN 2874275) to remove any
debris. This will ensure proper sealing when
installing bolts.
1.

Install stator assembly (S) and bolts. Torque bolts to
specification.

Install the wire hold down bracket (T). Install two new wire
hold down bolts. New bolts contain patch-lock. Torque
bolts to specification, following the proper bolt torque
sequence. Coat the stator wire grommet (U) with Nyogel
Grease (PN 2871329).

Flywheel Nut Torque
65 ± 7 ft. lbs. (88 ± 9.50 Nm)
4.

Install stator housing with new O-ring. Torque the bolts to
specification and follow proper bolt torque sequence at the
beginning of this chapter.
96 ± 3 in. lbs.
(10.85 ± 0.35 Nm)

NOTE: Verify stator wires are routed properly under
the wire hold down bracket.
Replace 2 bolts with new bolts

=T
Stator Housing Bolt Torque:
96  3 in. lbs. (10.85  0.35 Nm)

S
U

Cylinder Head Reassembly

=T
Stator Assembly Bolt Torque:
96  3 in. lbs. (10.85  0.35 Nm)
3.

Install the flywheel, washer, nut, and key. Torque flywheel
nut to specification.

NOTE: Before reassembly, clean the bolts and bolt
holes with Primer N (PN 2874275) to remove any
debris. This will ensure proper sealing when
installing bolts.
1.

Install the head gasket (A) on the cylinder (B).

65 ± 7 ft. lbs.
(88 ± 9.50 Nm)

3.57

ENGINE
4.

Install cylinder head on cylinder.

Lubricate threads and top of washers underside of bolt head
with engine oil. Install head bolts (C) and torque to
specification in sequence.

Lubricate push rods (D) and install into lifters.

Lubricate rockers (E) with engine oil.
E

Verify pushrods are engaged in lifters.

Install rockers. Be sure that tab of fulcrum (F) is seated in
head stand-off. Torque bolts to specification.

=T
Cylinder Head Bolt Torque:
1) Torque to 15  1.5 ft. lbs. in sequence
2) Back off all head bolts 5 turns in sequence
3) Torque to 35 4 ft. lbs. in sequence
4) Tighten all head bolts in sequence another
90 or (1/4 turn).

3.58

=T
Rocker Arm Bolt Torque:
22  2 ft. lbs. (30  3 Nm)

ENGINE
8.

Install breather reed (G) into rocker cover (H). Lightly
apply black RTV sealant to the outer edges of the breather
reed. The reed has a tab and will assemble one-way only.
Torque the breather bolts to specification.

11. Install thermostat (J), new O-ring, and thermostat housing.
Torque to specification.
K

20 ± 5 in. lbs.
(2.5 ± .55 Nm)

17 ± 2 ft. lbs.
(23 ± 3 Nm)

G
I

L
120 in. lbs.
(13.5 Nm)

NOTE: When applying RTV, do not get any RTV
inside the reed assembly.
9.

Place a new seal (I) into the bottom of the cover. Be sure
the seal is seated into the cover properly.

84 ± 8 in. lbs.
(9.5 ± 0.9 Nm)

=T
Breather Bolt Toque:
20 ± 5 in. lbs. (2.5± 0.55 Nm)

Thermostat Housing Bolt Torque:
84  8 in. lbs. (9.5 0.9 Nm)
12. Install 3/8” coolant hose fitting (L) and torque to
specification.
13. Install temperature sender (K) and torque to specification.

IMPORTANT: Before assembly, clean the bolts and
bolt holes with Primer N (PN 2874275) to remove any
debris. This will ensure proper sealing when installing
bolts.

10. Install rocker cover. Torque bolts in sequence to
specification.

=T
Temperature Sender Torque:
17 ± 2 ft. lbs. (23 ± 3 Nm)

Oil Pump Priming
CAUTION

=T
Rocker Cover Bolt Torque:
84  8 in. lbs. (9.5  0.9 Nm)

After any reassembly or rebuild, the engine
must be primed using the Oil Priming Adapter
(PU-45778) and a 3/4-full oil filter before initial
start-up. Follow the steps in this section to
properly prime the engine and aid proper engine
break in. Failure to perform this procedure may
cause internal engine damage on initial start-up.

3.59

ENGINE
1.

After the engine is completely assembled and ready for
installation, the engine must be properly primed with
Polaris PS-4 PLUS Synthetic Engine Oil (PN 2876244).
Fill the oil filter three-quarters full with Polaris PS-4 PLUS
Synthetic Engine Oil (PN 2876244). Let the oil soak into
the filter for 8-10 minutes. Install the filter onto the engine.

ENGINE INSTALLATION
Engine Assembly and Installation
Use the following procedure to reinstall the engine assembly.
Assemble the engine to the transmission on a work bench prior
to installation.
1.

Support the transmission / rear gearcase assembly while
setting the engine in place.

Lightly tighten all fasteners evenly to eliminate any gaps
that may be present in the mounting areas.

Torque fasteners to specification using a two part sequence.
• Torque fasteners to half of the specified torque value.
• Then torque fasteners to the full specified torque value.

Fill 3/4 full
with PS-4 PLUS
2.

Remove primer plug from the engine. Install Oil System
Priming Adapter (PU-45778) into the oil plug hole. Push
3-5 oz. (approx.) of Polaris PS-4 PLUS engine oil into the
adapter or until resistance is felt. Remove the adapter.
Apply sealant to the plug threads. Install the plug and torque
to specification.

40 ft. lbs.
(54 Nm)

28 ft. lbs.
(38 Nm)

PU-45778
Plate is shown detached
from transmission for clarity

=T
Engine / Transmission Mounting Fasteners
(2) Lower 3/8” Nuts: 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)
(4) Outer M8 Bolts: 28 ft. lbs. (38 Nm)
4.

=T
Primer Plug Torque
18 ± 2 ft. lbs. (24.4 ± 2.71 Nm)

Install the inner clutch cover, drive clutch, and driven
clutch. Torque to specification (see Chapter 6).
• Clean clutch sheaves thoroughly and inspect inlet and
outlet ducts for proper routing and sealing.

To install engine assembly, reverse the “Engine Removal”
procedure detailed earlier in this Chapter.
• Properly route all electrical harnesses for engine
assembly installation. Check for any possible rubbing
points of electrical wires.
• Carefully set the engine assembly into the vehicle while
installing the propshaft.

3.60

ENGINE
• Install engine / transmission / rear gearcase mounting
hardware and torque to specification.

Engine Break-In Period
The break-in period consists of the first 25 hours of operation,
or the time it takes to use 14 gallons (53 liters) of fuel. Careful
treatment of a new engine and drive components will result in
more efficient performance and longer life for these
components.

CAUTION

30 ft. lbs.
(41 Nm)

Use only Polaris PS-4 PLUS
Synthetic Engine Oil.
Never substitute or mix oil brands.
Serious engine damage and voiding of
warranty can result.
Do not operate at full throttle or high speeds for
extended periods during the first three hours of
use. Excessive heat can build up and cause
damage to close fitted engine parts.

17 ft. lbs.
(23 Nm)
17 ft. lbs.
(23 Nm)

NOTE: If isolator mounts were removed or replaced,
use the following illustration to ensure proper
orientation during installation.

Fill fuel tank with unleaded fuel which has a minimum
pump octane number of 87 = (R+ M)/2.

Check oil level indicated on dipstick. Add oil if necessary
(Refer to Chapter 2, “Engine Oil Level” ).

Drive slowly at first to gradually bring engine up to
operating temperature.

Vary throttle positions. Do not operate at sustained idle or
sustained high speed.

Perform regular checks on fluid levels, controls and all
important bolt torques.

Pull only light loads during initial break-in.

Change oil and oil filter after break-in period at 25 hours.

Mount Protrusion

Front Isolator Mounts
The protrusion of the mount
must face inward towards
the engine.
Rear Isolator Mounts
The protrusion of the mount
must face the RH side of
the vehicle.

• Install rear seat base assembly and torque the mounting
bolts to 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm).
• Replace exhaust gaskets. Seal connections with high
temp silicone sealant. Check to be sure all exhaust
springs are in good condition.

=
Capacity: Approximately 2 U.S. Quarts (1.9 L)
Oil Type: Polaris PS-4 PLUS Synthetic
Filter Wrench: PU-50105 - 2.5” (64 mm)
- Oil Pressure Specification 27-35 psi @ 6000 RPM, Polaris PS-4 PLUS
Synthetic, Engine at operating temperature.

• Inspect transmission operation and adjust linkage if
necessary (see Chapter 2 “Shift Linkage Adjustment”).
• Checks fluid levels: engine oil, transmission lubricant,
and rear gearcase lubricant.
• Bleed cooling system as described in this Chapter under
“Cooling System Bleeding Procedure.”

3.61

ENGINE
TROUBLESHOOTING
Engine
Spark Plug Fouling
• Spark plug cap loose or faulty
• Incorrect spark plug heat range or gap
• PVT system calibrated incorrectly/ components worn or
mis-adjusted

Engine Idles But Will Not Accelerate
• Spark plug fouled/weak spark
• Broken throttle cable
• Obstruction in air intake
• Air box removed (reinstall all intake components)
• Incorrect ignition timing
• Restricted exhaust system
• Cam worn excessively

• Fuel quality poor (old) or octane too high
• Low compression

Engine Has Low Power

• Restricted exhaust

• Spark plug fouled

• Weak ignition (loose coil ground, faulty coil, or stator)

• Cylinder, piston, ring, or valve wear or damage (check
compression)

• Restricted air filter (main or pre-cleaner) or breather
system

• PVT not operating properly

• Improperly assembled air intake system
• Restricted engine breather system
• Oil contaminated with fuel

Engine Turns Over But Fails To Start
• No fuel
• Dirt in fuel line or filter
• Fuel will not pass through fuel valve

• Restricted exhaust muffler
• Cam worn excessively

Piston Failure - Scoring
• Lack of lubrication
• Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or ducts
• Engine oil dirty or contaminated

Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup

• Fuel pump inoperative/restricted

• Excessive piston-to-cylinder clearance

• Tank vent plugged or pinched

• Wet sumping

• Engine flooded

• Worn rings, piston, or cylinder

• Low compression (high cylinder leakage)

• Worn valve guides or seals

• No spark (Spark plug fouled) ignition component
failure

• Restricted breather

Engine Does Not Turn Over

• Air filter dirty or contaminated

Piston Failure - Scoring

• Dead battery

• Lack of lubrication

• Starter motor does not turn

• Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or ducts

• Engine seized, rusted, or mechanical failure

• Engine oil dirty or contaminated

Engine Runs But Will Not Idle
• Restricted fuel supply
• Low compression
• Crankcase breather restricted

3.62

ENGINE
Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup
• Excessive piston-to-cylinder clearance
• Wet sumping due to over-full crankcase
• Worn rings, piston, or cylinder
• Worn valve guides or seals
• Restricted breather
• Air filter dirty or contaminated

Low Compression

Cooling System
Overheating
• Low coolant level
• Air in cooling system
• Wrong type/mix of coolant
• Faulty pressure cap or system leaks
• Restricted system (mud or debris in radiator fins
causing restriction to air flow, passages blocked in
radiator, lines, pump, or water jacket, accident damage)

• Cylinder head gasket leak
• No valve clearance ( cam wear )

• Lean mixture (vents, fuel pump or fuel valve)

• Cylinder or piston worn

• Fuel pump output weak

• Piston rings worn, leaking, broken, or sticking

• Electrical malfunction

• Bent valve or stuck valve

• Water pump failure/ Loose impeller

• Valve spring broken or weak

• Thermistor failure

• Valve not seating properly (bent or carbon accumulated
on sealing surface)

• Cooling fan inoperative or turning too slowly (perform
current draw test)

• Rocker arm sticking

• Low oil level

Backfiring
• Fouled spark plug or incorrect plug or plug gap
• Exhaust system air leaks
• Exhaust system air leaks
• Valve sticking
• Ignition system faulty:
Spark plug cap cracked / broken
Ignition coil faulty

• Spark plug incorrect heat range
• Faulty hot light circuit
• Thermostat stuck closed or not opening completely
• Radiator is missing its internal diverter plate not
allowing coolant to flow through entire radiator

Temperature Too Low
• Thermostat stuck open

Leak at Water Pump Weep Hole

Ignition or kill switch circuit faulty

• Faulty water pump mechanical seal (coolant leak)

Poor connections in ignition system

• Faulty pump shaft oil seal (oil leak)

Ignition timing incorrect
Sheared flywheel key

3.63

ENGINE

NOTES

3.64

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION

CHAPTER 4
ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
SERVICE NOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
EFI SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
EFI SYSTEM COMPONENT LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6

FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
FUEL LINES - QUICK CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
PRINCIPAL COMPONENTS / EFI OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
INITIAL PRIMING / STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
ECU SERVICE / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12

TEMP / MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR (T-MAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12

T-MAP SENSOR TEST / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
CPS TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
CPS REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14

FUEL INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.17
FUEL INJECTOR SERVICE / TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
FUEL INJECTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.19

FUEL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20
FUEL SENDER TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20
FUEL PUMP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.21
FUEL PUMP REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.22
FUEL TANK REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.25
FUEL TANK INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.27

IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.27
IAC TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.27
IAC REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.28
TPS RESISTANCE TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29
TPS TESTER / REGULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.29
TPS REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.30

CAMSHAFT PHASE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32
CAM PHASE SENSOR TEST / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.32

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ECT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33
ECT SENSOR TEST / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.33

IGNITION COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.34
IGNITION COIL / HT LEAD REPLACEMENT / TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.34

EFI DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.35
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TROUBLE CODE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.35
EFI TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.38

DIGITAL WRENCH™ OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.39
SPECIAL TOOLS / DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.39
ECU REPLACEMENT / GUIDED DIAGNOSTIC AVAILABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.39
DIGITAL WRENCH™ COMMUNICATION ERRORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.39
DIGITAL WRENCH™ - DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.40
DIGITAL WRENCH™ SERIAL NUMBER LOCATION / VERSION AND UPDATE ID . . 4.40
DIGITAL WRENCH™ UPDATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.41
DIGITAL WRENCH™ FEATURE MAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.42
ENGINE CONTROLLER REPROGRAMMING (REFLASH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.43

4.1

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
* Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive

under certain conditions.
* EFI components are under high pressure.
Verify system pressure has been
relieved before disassembly.
* Never drain the fuel system when the engine is hot.
Severe burns may result.
* Do not overfill the tank. The tank is at full capacity
when the fuel reaches the bottom of the filler neck.
Leave room for expansion of fuel.
* Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed area.
Gasoline powered engine exhaust fumes are
poisonous and can cause loss of consciousness
and death in a short time.
* Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or near
the area where refueling is performed or where
gasoline is stored.
* If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you should
swallow gasoline, seek medical attention immediately.
* If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing,
immediately wash with soap and water
and change clothing.
* Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors
or in a well ventilated area.

Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Tester - 2201519-A
This tester allows the use of a digital multi-meter to test TPS
function as well as perform the TPS adjustment procedure.
NOTE: This TPS Tester replaces the existing tester
(PU-47082), which included the 4010264 regulator. If
your dealership has PU-47082 and 4010264, you DO
NOT need to order 2201519-A as a replacement.

TPS Tester Wire Harness - PU-47466
This TPS wire harness is part of 2201519-A and incorporates
two TPS connectors to allow for multi-use applications.

Special Tools
PART
NUMBER

TOOL DESCRIPTION

2201519-A

Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Tester
PU-47466

TPS Tester Wire Harness

547927

TPS Tester Regulator

PU-43506-A

Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit

PV-48656

Fuel Pressure Gauge Adaptor

Digital Wrench™ Diagnostic Software
(Includes
most recent version of software
PU-47063-A
w/serial number, standard interface cable
and SmartLink Module Kit)
PU-47471

4.2

Digital Wrench™ SmartLink Module Kit
(PU-47470, PU-47469, PU-47468)
PU-47470

Digital Wrench™
PC Interface Cable

PU-47469

Digital Wrench™
Vehicle Interface Cable

PU-47468

Digital Wrench™
SmartLink Module

NOTE: Voltage Regulator (547927) is required if
using TPS Tester Wire Harness (PU-47466). You may
already have this regulator (marked 4010264) as part
of another TPS Tester Kit. If you do not have this
regulator, you must order one from SPX at 1-800328-6657.

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
TPS Tester Regulator - 547927
This tester regulator is part of 2201519-A. It regulates the 9 volt
battery voltage to a 5 volt reference input, required when using
the TPS Tester Wire Harness (PU-47466).

Fuel Pressure Gauge Adaptor - PV-48656
Adaptor works with
PU-43506-A

Disconnect here and connect
in-line w/fuel pump outlet

NOTE: You may already have this regulator (marked
4010264) as part of another TPS Tester Kit. If you do
not have this regulator, you must order one from
SPX at 1-800-328-6657.
Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit - PU-43506-A
IMPORTANT: The EFI fuel system remains under high
pressure, even when the engine is not running. Before
attempting to service any part of the fuel system,
pressure must be relieved (if applicable). The Fuel
Pressure Gauge Kit has an integrated pressure relief
valve that can be used to bleed off pressure once you
have completed the fuel pressure test.

4
Digital Wrench™ Diagnostic Software - PU-47063-A
This dealer-only software installs on laptop computers equipped
with a CD drive and serial port connection, and is designed to
replace multiple shop tools often used to test EFI components.
It also includes step-by-step diagnostic procedures to aid
technician repair and troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT: If the PC you are using is not equipped
with a 9-pin serial port, a USB to serial port adaptor
will be necessary. A USB to serial port adaptor can be
purchased through DSA at: www.diagsys.com
Digital Wrench™ SmartLink Module Kit - PU-47471
This module kit contains the necessary cables and hardware to
communicate between the vehicle ECU and the Digital
Wrench™ diagnostic software. Polaris dealers can also order
the following kit components separately: SmartLink Module
PU-47468, Vehicle Interface Cable PU-47469 and PC
Interface Cable PU-47470. This module kit is used on all 8 pin
connector-based Polaris EFI systems. This kit is available to
Polaris dealers through our tool supplier SPX at (1-800-3286657) or http://polaris.spx.com

Relief Valve

Adaptor shown is
included with kit.

PU-47469

PU-47468
PU-47470

4.3

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Digital Wrench™ - Diagnostic Connector
Located under the dash and accessible from the passenger side.

Service Notes
• For more convenient and accurate testing of EFI
components, it is recommended dealers utilize the
Digital Wrench™ Diagnostic Software (dealer only), or
testing may be done manually using the procedures
provided.
• 80% of all EFI problems are caused by wiring
harness connections.
• For the purpose of troubleshooting difficult running
issues, a known-good ECU from another RANGER
RZR 800 EFI of the same model and year may be used
without damaging system or engine components.
• Never attempt to service any fuel system component
while engine is running or ignition switch is "on."

Digital Wrench™ - Download Website
Located at: www.polaris.diagsys.com

• Cleanliness is essential and must be maintained at all
times when servicing or working on the EFI system.
Dirt, even in small quantities, can cause significant
problems.
• Do not use compressed air if the system is open. Cover
any parts removed and wrap any open joints with
plastic if they will remain open for any length of time.
New parts should be removed from their protective
packaging just prior to installation.
• Clean any connector before opening to prevent dirt
from entering the system.
• Although every precaution has been taken to prevent
water intrusion failure, avoid direct water or spray
contact with system components.

Download Digital Wrench™ Updates:

• Do not disconnect or reconnect the wiring harness
connector to the control unit or any individual
components with the ignition "on." This can send a
damaging voltage spike through the ECU.
• Do not allow the battery cables to touch opposing
terminals. When connecting battery cables attach the
positive (red) cable to positive (+) battery terminal first,
followed by negative (black) cable to negative (-)
battery terminal.
• Never start the engine when the cables are loose or
poorly connected to the battery terminals.
• Never disconnect battery while engine is running.

IMPORTANT: For the most recent information on
Digital Wrench™ software and update downloads
please visit the website: www.polaris.diagsys.com

• Never use a battery boost-pack to start the engine.
• Do not charge battery with key switch "on."
• Always disconnect negative (-) battery cable lead
before charging battery.

• Always unplug ECU from the wire harness before
performing any welding on the unit.

4.4

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
EFI System Exploded View
1. Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
2. Temperature / Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (T-MAP)
3. Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)
4. Fuel Injectors
5. Fuel Filter
6. Fuel Pump / Regulator / Fuel Level Sender (located in fuel tank)
7. Fuel Rail
8. Engine Coolant Sensor (ECT)
9. Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
10. Throttle Body
11. Ignition Coil
12. Spark Plugs

13. Spark Plug Wires
14. IAC Motor (Idle Air Control Motor)
15. Camshaft Phase Sensor

1
11

5
4

8
15

12
2
10

14
9

4.5

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
EFI System Component Locations
1.

Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
- Located behind the driver’s seat.

Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)
- Located in the magneto cover between the engine and
transmission, just in front of the rear gear case.
CPS

ECU

4.
2.

Temperature and Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
(T-MAP)
- Located in the rubber intake boot between the throttle
body and the cylinder head.

Fuel Injectors / Fuel Rail
- Attached to the fuel rail located in the intake track of the
cylinder head.
Fuel
Rail

Fuel Rail

Fuel Injectors

NOTE: Be sure to connect like colored fuel injector
connectors for proper engine function. Make note of
PTO and MAG side injectors before disconnecting
them.

Note Color of Connectors

4.6

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
5.

Fuel Pump / Regulator / Fuel Gauge Sender Assembly
- Located under the passenger seat.

Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
- Located on the right-hand side of the throttle body.

Fuel Pump Assembly

TPS
8.
Located in Fuel Tank

Idle Air Control Motor (IAC)
- Located on the right-hand / top side of the throttle body
above the TPS sensor.

Fuel Line
Connection

IAC

Regulator

Pump / Sending Unit
Connection

Fuel Pump

Preliminary Filter

9.
6.

Throttle Body
- Located between the rubber air box boot and the rubber
cylinder head adaptor.

Camshaft Phase Sensor
- Located in the engine block near the oil filter. The sensor
can be accessed in the right rear wheel well.

ECT

Camshaft Phase Sensor

Throttle Body

4.7

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
10. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT)
- Located in the cylinder head next to the thermostat
housing. The sensor can be accessed with the driver and
passenger seats and rear service panel removed.

ECT

11. Ignition Coil
- Located behind the driver’s seat and rear service panel just
above the PVT cover.
Ignition Coil

4.8

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
FUEL TANK
Exploded View

Fuel Flow
Fuel Rail

Fuel Injectors

Fuel Tank
Pressure Regulator

Fuel Filters

Fuel Pump Assembly

Quick Connect Fuel Line

4.9

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Fuel Lines - Quick Connect

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION

RANGER EFI models use quick connect fuel lines. Refer to the
steps below for fuel line removal.

Principal Components

The Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) system is a complete engine
fuel and ignition management design. This system includes the
following principal components:

Place a shop towel around the fuel line to catch any
dripping fuel. Squeeze the connector tabs together and
push the locking slide back.

Squeeze Connector Tabs

Fuel Rail

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Fuel Pump
Fuel Rail
Fuel Line
Fuel Filter(s)
Fuel Injectors
Pressure Regulator
Throttle Body / lntake Manifold
Engine Control Unit (ECU)
Ignition Coils
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT)
Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)
Temperature and Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
(T-MAP)
Camshaft Phase Sensor
Idle Air Control Motor (IAC)
Wire Harness Assembly
Check Engine Light

EFI Operation Overview
The EFI system is designed to provide peak engine performance
with optimum fuel efficiency and lowest possible emissions.
The ignition and injection functions are electronically
controlled, monitored and continually corrected during
operation to maintain peak performance.
Squeeze Connector Tabs

Pull on the fuel line for removal.

To install the line, verify the connector and fuel tank nipple
are clean and free of debris.

Snap the fuel line back over the nipple and slide the locking
mechanism back into place. Verify the connector tabs snap
back into place.

4.10

The central component of the system is the Bosch Electronic
Control Unit (ECU) which manages system operation,
determining the best combination of fuel mixture and ignition
timing for the current operating conditions.
An in-tank electric fuel pump is used to move fuel from the tank
through the fuel line, to the fuel rail. The in-tank fuel pressure
regulator maintains a system operating pressure and returns any
excess fuel back into the tank. At the engine, fuel is fed through
the fuel rail and into the injectors, which inject into the intake
ports. The ECU controls the amount of fuel by varying the
length of time that the injectors are "on." This range can vary
depending on fuel requirements. The controlled injection of the
fuel occurs every other crankshaft revolution, or once for each
4-stroke cycle. The total amount of fuel needed for one firing of
a cylinder is injected during each cycle. When the intake valve
opens, the fuel/air mixture is drawn into the combustion
chamber, ignited and burned.

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
The ECU controls the amount of fuel being injected and the
ignition timing by monitoring the primary sensor signals for
intake air temperature, manifold absolute pressure (load),
engine temperature, speed (RPM), camshaft position and
throttle position. These primary signals are compared to the
programming in the ECU computer chip, and the ECU adjusts
the fuel delivery and ignition timing to match the values.
During operation, the ECU has the ability to re-adjust
temporarily; providing compensation for changes in overall
engine condition and operating environment, so it will be able
to maintain the ideal air/fuel ratio.
During certain operating periods such as cold starts, warm up,
acceleration, etc., a richer air / fuel ratio is automatically
calculated by the ECU.

Initial Priming / Starting Procedure

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT (ECU)
Operation Overview
The ECU is the brain or central processing computer of the
entire EFI fuel/ignition management system. During operation,
sensors continuously gather data which is relayed through the
wiring harness to input circuits within the ECU. Signals to the
ECU include: ignition (on/off), crankshaft position and speed
(RPM), camshaft position (MAG/PTO), throttle position,
engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature, intake
manifold absolute pressure and battery voltage. The ECU
compares the input signals to the programmed maps in its
memory and determines the appropriate fuel and spark
requirements for the immediate operating conditions. The ECU
then sends output signals to set the injector duration and ignition
timing.
ECU

NOTE: The injection system must be purged of all
air prior to the initial start up, and / or any time the
system has been disassembled.
If the EFI system is completely empty of fuel or has been
disassembled and repaired:
1.

Cycle the key switch from “OFF” to “ON” 6 times, waiting
for approximately 3 seconds at each “ON” cycle to allow
the fuel pump to cycle and shut down.

Once step 1 is completed, turn the key switch to “START”
until the engine starts or 5 seconds has passed.

If the engine failed to start, repeat step 1 for 2 more cycles
and attempt to start the engine.

If the engine fails to start, a problem may still exist, and should
be diagnosed.
NOTE: Accurate testing of EFI components is
recommended utilizing the Digital Wrench™
Diagnostic Software (dealer only).

During operation, the ECU continually performs a diagnostic
check of itself, each of the sensors, and system performance. If
a fault is detected, the ECU turns on the “Check Engine” light
in the speedometer and stores the fault code in its fault memory.
Depending on the significance or severity of the fault, normal
operation may continue, or "Fail-Safe" operation (slowed speed,
richer running) may be initiated. A technician can determine the
cause of the “Check Engine” light by referencing the
“Instrument Cluster Trouble Code Display” and “Diagnostic
Trouble Code Table” or by using Digital Wrench™. The ECU
requires a minimum of 7.0 volts to operate. The memory in the
ECU is operational the moment the battery cables are
connected.
To prevent engine over-speed and possible failure, an RPM
limiting feature is programmed into the ECU. If the maximum
RPM limit (6750 RPM) is exceeded, the ECU suppresses the
injection signals, cutting off the fuel flow and retards the
ignition timing. This process repeats it self in rapid succession,
limiting operation to the preset maximum.

4.11

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
RANGER RZR 800 EFI RPM Limit:
Max RPM Limit - Injector suppression and timing retarded
• All Gears: 6750 RPM

TEMP / MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE SENSOR (T-MAP)
Operation Overview
Mounted on the throttle body intake manifold, the T-MAP
sensor performs two functions in one unit.

ECU Service
Never attempt to disassemble the ECU. It is sealed to prevent
damage to internal components. Warranty is void if the case is
opened or tampered with in any way.
All operating and control functions within the ECU are pre-set.
No internal servicing or readjustment may be performed. If a
problem is encountered, and you determine the ECU to be
faulty, contact the Polaris Service Department for specific
handling instructions. Do not replace the ECU without factory
authorization.
The relationship between the ECU and the throttle position
sensor (TPS) is very critical to proper system operation. If the
TPS is faulty, or the mounting position of the TPS to the throttle
body is altered, the TPS must be adjusted.
For the purpose of troubleshooting, a known-good ECU from
another Polaris RANGER RZR EFI of the same model may be
used without system or engine component damage.

ECU Replacement
1.

Remove the (2) retaining screws holding the ECU.

With the ignition turned off, disconnect the wire harness
from the ECU.

To install, reverse the procedure and tighten screws to
specification.

=T
ECU Retaining Screws
10 in. lbs. (1.1 Nm)

4.12

T-MAP

Air passing through the intake is measured by the T-MAP and
relayed to the ECU. These signals, comprised of separate air
temperature and manifold absolute pressure readings, are
processed by the ECU and compared to its programming for
determining the fuel and ignition requirements during
operation. The T-MAP sensor provides the ECU with engine
load data.

T-MAP Sensor Test
The T-MAP sensor is a non-serviceable item. If it is faulty, it
must be replaced.
IMPORTANT: This sensor should only be tested using
the Digital Wrench™ Diagnostic Software (dealer
only).

T-MAP Sensor Replacement
1.

Remove the seats and rear service panel. (see chapter 5).

Remove the rear cargo box (see chapter 5).

Remove the cable tie from the sensor connector.

Disconnect vehicle harness from T-MAP sensor.

Remove the retaining bolt and remove the sensor from the
intake boot.

Use a light coating of soapy water on the grommet to aid
installation of the new sensor.

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
7.

Install the sensor by inserting it with a twisting motion to
properly seat the grommet.
Torque to Specification
Bolt

T-MAP

A ferromagnetic 60-tooth ring gear with two consecutive teeth
missing is mounted on the flywheel. The inductive speed sensor
is mounted 1.0  0.26 mm (0.059  0.010 in.) away from the ring
gear. During rotation, an AC pulse is created within the sensor
for each passing tooth. The ECU calculates engine speed from
the time interval between the consecutive pulses.
The two-tooth gap creates an “interrupt” input signal,
corresponding to specific crankshaft position. This signal serves
as a reference for the control of ignition timing by the ECU.
Synchronization of the CPS and crankshaft position takes place
during the first two revolutions each time the engine is started.
This sensor must be properly connected at all times. If the sensor
fails or becomes disconnected for any reason, the engine will
stop running.

Intake Boot

CPS Test
8.

Install the retaining bolt and torque to specification.

The CPS is a sealed, non-serviceable assembly. If fault code
diagnosis indicates a problem within this sensor, test as follows:
1.

T-MAP Retaining Bolt Torque:
25 ± 2.5 in. lbs. (3 ± .3 Nm)

Disconnect CPS (3-wire) harness connector on the lefthand side of the vehicle located below the transmission.
CPS
Connector

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(CPS)
Operation Overview
The crankshaft position sensor is essential to engine operation,
constantly monitoring the rotational speed (RPM) and position
of the crankshaft.
2.
CPS

Connect an ohmmeter between the pin terminals leading
from the Yellow and White wires. A resistance value of
560  10% at room temperature should be obtained.

4.13

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
3.

Measure between the pin terminal leading from the Black
wire and ground. A resistance value of 0 - 0.5 ± 10%
should be obtained.

CPS Harness

Remove the exhaust pipe between the elbow pipe and the
exhaust silencer. Remove the exhaust silencer.

Silencer

Remove

White

Yellow
Black

CPS Resistance Specification:
Yellow to White: 560  10%
Black to Ground: 0 - 0.5  10%
4.

Remove the (3) bolts retaining the front portion of the
mounting bracket to the transmission. Retain the bolts,
washers, and spacers for installation.

Remove the bottom bolt that attaches the bracket to the rear
gearcase through the hole in the frame support as shown.

If the resistance is correct.
- Test the main harness circuit between the sensor
connector terminals and the corresponding pin terminals at
the ECU (see wiring diagram).
- Check the sensor mounting, air gap, flywheel ring gear for
damage or runout, and flywheel key. Follow the “CPS
Replacement” procedure to inspect CPS and flywheel ring
gear for damage.

Transmission
Mounting Bolts

If the resistance is incorrect, follow the “CPS Replacement”
procedure.
Rear Gearcase
Mounting Bolt

CPS Replacement
Removal
1.

Safely support the rear of the vehicle off the ground and
remove the left-hand rear tire.

WARNING
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls.
Be sure the vehicle is secure before beginning
this service procedure.
2.

If not done already; disconnect the CPS harness connector
(see illustration under “CPS Test”).

IMPORTANT: In order to remove the CPS, the rear
portion of the exhaust system and the mounting
bracket between the transmission and rear gearcase
will need to be removed.

4.14

Remove the (2) remaining fasteners that attach the bracket
to the side of the rear gearcase.

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
7.

Remove the bolt from the bracket at the front of the rear
gearcase.

11. Torque the CPS retaining bolt to specification.

=T
CPS Retaining Bolt Torque:
25 in. lbs. (2.8 Nm)
Installation
IMPORTANT: When reinstalling the transmission to
rear gearcase mount bracket, it is extremely important
to torque all (7) fasteners to specification. Refer to the
following procedure.

Lift the mounting bracket straight up and out from the
vehicle.

NOTE: Special tool (PA-48873) will be required to
torque the mounting bracket fasteners when the
transmission and rear gearcase are installed in the
vehicle.
Special Tool
PA-48873

Remove
Bracket

Using a 5 mm hex wrench, remove the CPS retaining bolt
and remove the sensor from the magneto housing.
This tool is specifically designed to access
the critical transmission to rear gearcase
mounting bracket bolts on the RANGER
RZR when the transmission and rear
gearcase are installed in the vehicle. This
tool allows for proper torque to be applied to
½” SAE hex head cap screws with limited
wrench access. When used at a 90° angle
with a torque wrench, no torque multiplier
is necessary.
1.

10. Install new sensor using a light coating of oil on the O-ring
to aid installation.

Clean bolt threads with solvent and allow them to dry.
Coat the circumference of the first 4 threads of the bolts
with Loctite before installing the bolts.

4.15

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
2.

Reinstall mounting bracket and hand tighten the (7) bolts.

Torque ALL mounting bracket bolts to specification.

Bottom Transmission Bolt

=T
Mount Bracket Bolt Torque:
23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm)
4.

Using special tool (PA-48873), torque the (3) bolts that
retain the front portion of the mounting bracket to the
transmission.

Upper Transmission Bolt
5.

Remove the special tool and attach an extension to the
torque wrench. Torque the bottom bolt that attaches the
bracket to the rear gearcase through the hole in the frame
support.

Bottom Rear Gearcase Bolt
NOTE: Special Tool is not required for this torque.

Middle Transmission Bolt

Torque with
an extension

4.16

Using special tool (PA-48873), torque the upper (2) bolts
retaining the mounting bracket to the rear gearcase. Place
the torque wrench through the rear exhaust silencer opening
to gain access to the bolts.

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Middle Rear Gearcase Bolt

FUEL INJECTORS
Operation Overview
NOTE: All EFI units utilize quick connect fuel lines.
The fuel injectors mount into the cylinder head, and the fuel rail
attaches to them at the top end. O-rings on both ends of the
injector prevent external fuel leaks and also insulate it from heat
and vibration.
Fuel
Injectors

Upper Rear Gearcase Bolt
Fuel Rail

Torque the remaining bolt that attaches the bracket to the
front side of the rear gearcase.

Front Rear Gearcase Bolt

When the key switch is on, the fuel rail is pressurized, and the
EFI relay provides voltage to the injectors. During engine
operation, the ECU completes the ground circuit, energizing the
injectors. The valve needle in the injector is opened
electromagnetically, and the pressure in the fuel rail forces fuel
down through the inside. The “director plate” at the tip of the
injector contains a series of calibrated openings which directs
the fuel into the intake port in a cone-shaped spray pattern.
The amount of fuel injected is controlled by the ECU and
determined by the length of time the valve needle is held open,
also referred to as the “injection duration” or “pulse width”. It
may vary in length depending on the speed and load
requirements of the engine.
The ECU gathers fuel injection timing information from the
Crankshaft Position Sensor and Camshaft Phase Sensor to allow
for sequential fuel injection.

NOTE: A multi-directional torque wrench is required
in this application because of the limited access to
this bolt. Check with the manufacturer of your torque
wrench to see if it can be used to tighten left-hand
threaded bolts.

4.17

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Fuel Injector Service

Fuel Injector Test

Injector problems typically fall into three general categorieselectrical, dirty / clogged, or leakage. An electrical problem
usually causes one or both of the injectors to stop functioning.
Several methods may be used to check if the injectors are
operating.

NOTE: The harness connector and locking spring is
bonded to the fuel injectors with an epoxy. DO NOT
attempt to disconnect the connector from the fuel
injectors. Damage will occur to the injector and/or
harness if attempting to separate at that location.
Separate the fuel injector from the vehicle harness
as shown in the illustration below.

• With the engine running at idle, feel for operational
vibration, indicating that they are opening and closing.
• When temperatures prohibit touching, listen for a
buzzing or clicking sound with a screwdriver or
mechanic's stethoscope.

Fuel
Injector

Disconnect Here
Harness

• Disconnect the electrical connector from an injector and
listen for a change in idle performance (only running on
one cylinder) or a change in injector noise or vibration.
NOTE: Do not apply voltage directly to the fuel
injector(s). Excessive voltage will burn out the
injector(s). Do not ground the injector(s) with the
ignition on. lnjector(s) will open/turn on if relay is
energized.
If an injector is not operating, it can indicate either a bad injector,
or a wiring/electrical connection problem. Check as follows:
Injector leakage is very unlikely, but in rare instances it can be
internal (past the tip of the valve needle), or external (weeping
around the injector body). The loss of system pressure from the
leakage can cause hot restart problems and longer cranking
times.
Injector problems due to dirt or clogging are unlikely due to the
design of the injectors, the high fuel pressure, the use of filters
and the detergent additives in the gasoline. Symptoms that could
be caused by dirty/clogged injectors include rough idle,
hesitation/stumble during acceleration, or triggering of fault
codes related to fuel delivery. Injector clogging is usually caused
by a buildup of deposits on the director plate, restricting the flow
of fuel, resulting in a poor spray pattern. Some contributing
factors to injector clogging include; dirty air filters, higher than
normal operating temperatures, short operating intervals and
dirty, incorrect, or poor quality fuel. Cleaning of clogged
injectors is not recommended; they should be replaced.
Additives and higher grades of fuel can be used as a preventative
measure if clogging has been a problem.

4.18

DO NOT
Disconnect Here
The fuel injectors are non-serviceable. If diagnosis indicates a
problem with either injector, test the resistance of the fuel
injector(s) by measuring between the two harness pin terminals:
Disconnect
and test here

Fuel Injector Resistance Specification:
11.4  - 12.6 
NOTE: Be sure to connect like colored fuel injector
connectors for proper engine function. Make note of
PTO and MAG side injectors before disconnecting
them. PTO = GRAY, MAG = BLACK.

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Fuel Injector Replacement

Separate the fuel injector from the vehicle harness
as shown in the illustration below.

Be sure the engine has cooled enough to work on.

Remove the seats and rear service panel (see chapter 5).

3.
4.

Remove the rear cargo box (see chapter 5).
Place a suitable container below the quick connect plug at
the end of the fuel rail. Hold a shop rag over the plug and
remove it to depressurize the fuel system.

Fuel
Injector

Harness

Fuel Rail

DO NOT
Disconnect Here

Quick Connect
Plug

Thoroughly clean the area around the fuel injectors
including the throttle body manifold.

Using a 6 mm hex wrench, loosen the fuel rail mounting
screw from the cylinder head. Carefully pull the rail away
from the injectors and remove the injector(s) from the
cylinder head along with the harness.
Mounting
Screw

Disconnect the harness for the fuel injector(s) located next
to the ignition coil. Cut the plastic tie strap and push the
harness for the fuel injector(s) up over the air box to allow
fuel injector removal.

Fuel Injectors

Fuel Injector
Harnesses

Fuel Rail

NOTE: The harness connector and locking spring is
bonded to the fuel injectors with an epoxy. DO NOT
attempt to disconnect the Bosch connector from the
fuel injectors. Damage will occur to the injector and/
or harness if attempting to separate at that location.

Disconnect Here

Reverse the previous procedures to install the new
injector(s) and reassemble.

Lubricate O-rings lightly with oil to aid installation. Torque
the fuel rail mounting screw to specification.

=T
Fuel Rail Mounting Screw
216 +/- 24 in. lbs. (24 Nm)

4.19

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
FUEL PUMP

The ECU switches off the pump preventing the continued
delivery of fuel in these instances:

Operation Overview
An electric fuel pump assembly is used to transfer fuel to the EFI
system from inside the fuel tank. This assembly includes the fuel
pump, fuel filters, regulator and fuel gauge sender. The pump is
rated for a minimum output of 25 liters per hour at 45 ± 2 psi and
has two non-serviceable fuel filters.
Fuel Pump Assembly

• If the key switch is not promptly turned to the "start"
position.
• If the engine fails to start.
• If the engine is stopped with the key switch "on" (as in
the case of an accident).
In these situations, the “check engine” light will go on, but will
turn off after 4 cranking revolutions if system function is OK.
Once the engine is running, the fuel pump remains on.

Fuel Sender Test
If the fuel gauge reading on the instrument cluster is not
working, or if the display reading differs in large comparison to
the fuel in the tank, perform a resistance test on the fuel sender.
Disconnect the fuel pump / sending unit connection and measure
the resistance (see Chapter 10 “Fuel Sender Testing”). If out of
specification, replace the fuel pump assembly.

Located in Fuel Tank
Fuel Line
Connection
Pump / Sending Unit
Connection

Fuel Pump
Regulator

Preliminary Filter

When the key switch is turned to "ON", the ECU activates the
fuel pump, which pressurizes the system for start-up.

4.20

Fuel Sender Resistance Specifications:
Full: 6 ± 1 
Empty: 90 ± 4.5 

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Fuel Pump Test
If a fuel delivery problem is suspected, make certain the fuel
pump filters are not plugged, that the pump is being activated
through the ECU, all electrical connections are properly
secured, the fuses are good, and a minimum of 7.0 volts is being
supplied. If during starting the battery voltage drops below 7.0
volts, the ECU will fail to operate the system.

Normal Fuel Pressure: 45 ± 2 psi.
NOTE: If the fuel pressure is out of specification,
replace the fuel pump assembly.
6.

WARNING
Fuel is extremely flammable and may cause
severe burns, injury, or death.
Do not use any device that produces a flame or
electrical devices that may spark around
fuel or fuel vapors.
1.

Remove the passenger seat from the vehicle.

Cover the fuel line connection at the fuel tank with a shop
towel and disconnect the fuel line from the fuel pump
outlet.

Install the Fuel Pressure Gauge Adaptor (PV-48656) in-line
between the fuel pump outlet and fuel line.

Connect the hose from the Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit (PU43506-A) to the test valve on the Fuel Pressure Gauge
Adaptor (PV-48656). Route the clear hose into a portable
gasoline container or the vehicle’s fuel tank.

If the pump did not activate (Step 3), disconnect the harness
connector from the fuel pump. Connect a DC voltmeter
across terminals “3” and “4” in the plug on the vehicle
harness side. Turn on the key switch and observe voltage
to ensure a minimum of 7 volts is present.

NOTE: If the voltage was below 7 VDC, test the
battery, ignition switch, relay(s), wiring harness and
ECU.
7.

If the reading is between 7 and 14 volts, turn key switch off
and connect an ohmmeter between the terminals “3” and
“4”' in the plug on the pump harness side to check for
continuity within the fuel pump.

NOTE: If there was no continuity between the pump
terminals, replace the fuel pump assembly.
8.
PU-43506-A

PV-48656
5.

Turn on the key switch to activate the pump and check the
system pressure on the gauge. If system pressure of 45 psi
 2 is observed, the ignition switch, ECU, fuel pump, and
pressure regulator are working properly. Turn the key
switch off and depress the valve button on the tester to
relieve the system pressure.

If voltage at the plug was within the specified range, and
there was continuity across the pump terminals, reconnect
the plug to the pump, making sure you have clean
connections. Turn on the key switch and listen for the pump
to activate.

NOTE: If the pump starts, repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 to
verify correct pressure.
9.

If the pump still does not operate, check for correct ECU
operation by plugging in a known-good ECU of the same
model.

NOTE: If the pump still does not operate, replace the
fuel pump assembly.

4.21

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Fuel Pump Replacement

WARNING

Clean this area

Always wear safety goggles when working with
high pressure or flammable fluids. Failure to do
so could result in serious injury or complications.
1.

Remove the passenger seat to access the fuel pump.

Ensure that static has been discharged from you by
touching a ground source such as the engine or frame.

Disconnect the fuel pump electrical harness.

Fuel Line Connector

Be sure the top of the fuel tank is clean. If it requires
cleaning, hand wash the top of the tank to ensure no debris
will enter the fuel system when the fuel pump is removed.

Pump Harness

CAUTION
Failure to clean area around fuel pump may lead
to debris entering the fuel tank during service.
Excessive debris in fuel tank may cause
premature wear of fuel pump and/or clogging
of internal fuel filters.
6.
4.

While holding a shop towel over the fuel line connector,
disconnect the quick connect fuel line from the fuel pump.

CAUTION

Place the Fuel Pump Service Tool (PU-50326) over the fuel
pump PFA nut. Using a 1/2” drive ratchet or breaker bar,
loosen and remove the PFA nut. Discard the PFA nut.

PU-50326

It is possible for pressurized fuel to be present
when disconnecting the fuel line.
It is recommended to allow the vehicle to sit for
a period of one hour after shutting off the engine
before servicing the fuel pump. This allows the
exhaust to cool and fuel pressure to drop.
NOTE: A small amount of fuel may come out of the
fuel line or tank. Properly drain fuel into a suitable
container.

PFA Nut

NOTE: Apply downward force on the fuel pump
flange while removing the fuel pump PFA nut.

4.22

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
7.

Carefully lift the fuel pump out of the fuel tank. As the fuel
pump assembly is being removed, be aware of float arm and
pump pre-filter. Hold the float arm to the pump body as you
lift and tilt the pump to ensure that the float arm is not bent
when removed from the tank.

12. Install new PFA gasket onto fuel pump assembly using care
not to damage gasket or bend float arm.

Transfer old fuel pump to a suitable container capable of
safely holding fuel. The fuel pump will retain some fuel.

Inspect the inside of the fuel tank for debris (may require
flashlight and mirror). If debris like mud or sand is present,
fuel tank should be flushed and cleaned out prior to
installation of new fuel pump assembly.

IMPORTANT: It is recommended to remove the fuel
tank from the vehicle and rinse it with a small amount
of clean fuel. Do not use water or any other chemicals
to remove debris.
10. Remove new fuel pump assembly, gasket and PFA nut from
packaging. Use care not to bend float arm during unpackaging. Do not lift or carry fuel pump assembly by the
float arm.
11. Use cleaning wipes provided to clean fuel tank surface and
threads. Remove all debris, grease and oil. Allow surfaces
to dry completely.

4.23

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
13. Install fuel pump into fuel tank, hold float arm to the pump
body and tilt assembly to ensure float arm does not get
caught or bent during installation.

17. Torque PFA nut to specification using the Fuel Pump
Service Tool (PU-50326) and a calibrated torque wrench.

14. Gently push down on fuel pump flange ensuring flange is
centered.

70 ± 5 ft. lbs.
(95 ± 7 Nm)

15. Roughly align orientation mark on fuel pump between the
orientation marks on fuel tank to ensure float arm does not
get bent or snagged.

=T
Fuel Pump PFA Nut:
70 ± 5 ft. lbs. (95 ± 7 Nm)
18. Verify alignment of fuel pump and tank orientation marks.
19. Connect the fuel line to the fuel pump outlet.
Press in white retainer
to engage the tabs

CAUTION
Failure to align the orientation marks may lead
to interferences with the fuel level float arm
and cause incorrect function.
16. While maintaining downward pressure, thread new PFA
nut onto fuel tank and hand tighten. Use care when starting
PFA nut, ensuring threads are properly aligned. Verify
orientation marks are still aligned between fuel pump and
fuel tank.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to engage the white retainer on
fuel line until it snaps into place. Pull on fuel line
lightly to confirm connection.
20. Connect the fuel pump electrical harness.
21. Install the passenger seat.
22. Test the fuel pump by turning on the key and listening for
the pump to activate. Cycle the key several times to prime
the system.

4.24

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Fuel Tank Removal

IMPORTANT: Syphon as much fuel from the tank as
possible before attempting to remove it from the
vehicle.

Disconnect the fuel pump electrical harness.

Disconnect Here

WARNING
Always wear safety goggles when working with
high pressure or flammable fluids. Failure to do so
could result in serious injury or complications.
1.

Remove the driver and passenger seats along with the rear
service panel.

Disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery
located under the driver’s seat.

While holding a shop towel over the fuel line connector,
disconnect the quick connect fuel line from the fuel pump.
Move fuel line out of the way for tank removal.

Remove the fuel tank vent hose clamp with a suitable pliers.
Remove the vent line from the fuel tank vent fitting.

Remove the rear seat base assembly from the vehicle by
removing the (2) fasteners from the rear seat base.

Remove the shift knob and the center console from the
vehicle.

NOTE: A small amount of fuel may come out of the
fuel line or tank. Properly drain fuel into a suitable
container.

4.25

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
8.

Remove the push rivets and screws retaining the RH rocker
panel and remove panel from the vehicle (see Chapter 5).

11. Remove the (3) shift lever support bracket bolts by and
place bracket out of the way of the fuel tank, but do not
remove or cut the plastic wire harness retainer.

3
Remove
RH Rocker Panel

Remove the lower bolt retaining the seat belt mechanism
near the rear RH portion of the fuel tank. Once removed,
place the mechanism in the rear cargo box to keep it out of
the way.

Set Bracket by
Shift Lever

Do Not Cut
Plastic Strap

10. Remove the (3) Torx fasteners from the rear RH fender well
and remove the fender well from the vehicle (see chapter 5).

4.26

12. Remove the (2) tank bracket fasteners that retain the fuel
tank in the chassis. Swing the tank fastener straps clear of
the fuel tank for removal.

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
13. Lift the rear of the fuel tank up first and carefully pull it up
and out from the vehicle.

IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC)
Operation Overview
The Idle Air Control (IAC) is used to stabilize the idle quality of
the engine at cold start-up and after warm-up operations.
IAC

4
Fuel Tank Installation
1.

Carefully reinstall the fuel tank assembly.

Reinstall the (2) fuel tank brackets and fasteners.

Reinstall the (3) shift lever support bracket fasteners.

Reinstall the rear RH fender well and secure with fasteners.

Reinstall the seat belt mechanism and secure the lower bolt

Reinstall the RH rocker panel and all previously removed
fasteners.

Reinstall the rear seat base assembly and secure with the (2)
fasteners

Reinstall the center console and shift knob.

Install the fuel line and vent hose and clamp; verify they are
secure.

Mounted on the throttle body, the IAC contains 1 stepper motor
which receives varying voltage signal pulses from the ECU.
These pulses determine the IAC plunger setting, thereby
controlling the amount of air bypassing the closed throttle body
for idle control. If the IAC is disconnected or inoperative, it will
remain at it’s last operated position.

IAC Test
The IAC is a non-serviceable item. If it is faulty, it must be
replaced. It can be ‘bench tested’ using the following method:
Set your meter to read Ohms. Check the resistance values at each
of the following pin locations of the IAC. If any of the readings
are out of specification, replace the IAC.

IAC Valve Connector

10. Reconnect the fuel pump electrical harness.
11. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Test the fuel pump
by turning the ignition key on and listening for the pump
to activate. Check for leaks.
12. Finally, install the rear service panel along with the driver
and passenger seats.

IAC Resistance Readings
Pins

Resistance

Pins

Resistance

1-2

30  ± 1.2 

4-5

30  ± 1.2 

2-3

30  ± 1.2 

5-6

30  ± 1.2 

1-3

60  ± 2.4 

4-6

60  ± 2.4 

4.27

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
IAC Replacement

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS)

Remove the seats, rear main service panel and the rear
cargo box. (See chapter 5)

Operation Overview

Loosen the hose clamps retaining the throttle body.

Remove the throttle body from the intake track and plug
intake boots with a clean shop towel.
IAC

Disconnect vehicle harness from IAC.

Remove the (3) Phillips-head mounting screws and remove
the IAC from the throttle body.

Install the new IAC and torque the mounting screws to 17.7
in. lbs. (2 ± 0.5 Nm).

Reconnect vehicle harness to IAC.

Reinstall the throttle body and securely tighten the hose
clamps.

Reinstall the rear cargo box, rear main service panel and
seats. (See chapter 5)

The throttle position sensor (TPS) is used to indicate throttle
plate angle to the ECU. Mounted on the throttle body and
operated directly off the end of the throttle shaft, the TPS works
like a rheostat, varying the voltage signal to the ECU in direct
correlation to the angle of the throttle plate. This signal is
processed by the ECU and compared to the internal preprogrammed “maps” to determine the required fuel and ignition
settings for the amount of engine load.

TPS

Stop Screw
(Factory calibrated)
DO NOT ADJUST

The correct position of the throttle body stop
screw is established and set at the factory.
DO NOT loosen the throttle body stop screw
or alter its position in any manner. The stop
screw controls the air flow calibration of the
throttle body. If the stop screw is
repositioned or adjusted, the throttle body
assembly must be replaced.

4.28

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
TPS Resistance Tests
The TPS is a non-serviceable item. If it is faulty, it must be
replaced. It can be tested using the following method:

Set-up the TPS Tester Wire Harness (PU-47466) and TPS Tester
Regulator (547927) according to the instructions that
accompanied the tester. Make sure the 9 Volt battery is new.

With the test leads connected and the meter set to the ohms scale,
observe the reading at the following pin locations of the TPS:

TPS Connector

TPS Resistance Readings
Pins

Throttle Position

Resistance

-GND

-----



-

Closed

4k - 5k(reference)

-

Open

1.1k - 1.5k(reference)

-

-----

4k6k

TPS Tester / Regulator
The TPS reading can be checked by using the Throttle Position
Sensor (TPS) Tester (2201519-A).
IMPORTANT: TPS Tester 2201519-A replaces the
existing TPS tester (PU-47082), which included the
4010264 regulator. If your dealership has PU-47082
and 4010264 you DO NOT need to order 2201519-A as
a replacement.

4.29

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Verify TPS Tester Reference Voltage

TPS Replacement

A 5 volt reference voltage from the TPS Tester harness is
required for the TPS test to be accurate. Refer to the instructions
provided with the TPS Tester (2201519-A) or follow the bullet
point steps below to check reference voltage.

NOTE: The correct position of the TPS angle on the
throttle body is established and set at the factory. If
the TPS is replaced, repositioned or loosened it
must be recalibrated. Refer to the “TPS Adjustment”
procedure.

Reference Voltage Test:
• Insert black voltmeter probe into the test port as shown.

Remove the seats, rear main service panel and the rear
cargo box. (See chapter 5)

• Insert red voltmeter probe into the test port as shown
and verify the voltage reads 4.99-5.01 Vdc. If the
reading is low, replace the 9 volt battery.

Loosen the hose clamps retaining the throttle body.

Remove the throttle body from the intake track and plug the
intake boots with a clean shop tow.

TPS

TPS Reference Voltage
5 Vdc Input
IMPORTANT: Always use a fresh 9 Volt battery.

4.30

Disconnect the vehicle harness from the TPS.

Remove the (2) Phillips-head mounting screws and replace
the TPS.

IMPORTANT: If replacing the TPS or throttle body,
you must set the TPS voltage to specification using
the TPS Tester or Digital Wrench™ Sensor Data
Display.
NOTE: To allow better access to the TPS harness
connection, remove the exhaust pipe and exhaust
silencer.
6.

If Digital Wrench™ in unavailable, assemble the TPS
Tester according to the instructions. Refer to “TPS Tester
/ Regulator” for proper set-up and testing. Verify the 9 volt
tester battery is new.

Plug the TPS Tester harness into the new TPS.

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
8.

Set your voltmeter to read DC Volts. Insert the red and
black voltmeter probes into the test ports as shown.

11. Retighten the TPS mounting screws and torque to
specification.

=T
TPS Mounting Screws:
17.7 in. lbs. (2 Nm)
12. Verify voltage reading did not change. If voltage reading
is now out of specification, repeat steps 2 - 4.
13. Reconnect vehicle harness to the TPS.
14. Reinstall the throttle body and securely tighten the hose
clamps.
15. Reinstall cargo box, rear main service cover and seats (see
Chapter 5).

Loosen the TPS mounting screws.

10. Rotate the TPS until your voltmeter reads within the
specification (see Figure 4-28).
TPS Output Reading
.650 - .750 Vdc

4.31

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
CAMSHAFT PHASE SENSOR

Cam Phase Sensor Replacement
1.

Disconnect vehicle harness from the sensor.

Remove the retaining bolt and remove the sensor from the
engine.

Use a light coating of engine oil to lubricate the O-ring upon
installation of the new sensor.

Install the sensor by inserting it with a twisting motion to
allow it to properly seat.

Install the retaining bolt and torque to specification.

Operation Overview
Mounted on the engine crankcase, the Cam Phase Sensor
provides camshaft position information to the ECU to be used
along with the crankshaft position data to allow for sequential
fuel injection.

ECT

Camshaft Phase Sensor

The Cam Phase Sensor provides camshaft position information
to the ECU to be used along with the crankshaft position data to
allow for sequential spark and ignition timing.

Cam Phase Sensor Test
The Cam Phase Sensor is a non-serviceable item. If it is faulty,
it must be replaced.
With the ignition key switch on, the sensor should have battery
voltage present on the Red / Dark Blue wire and ground present
on the Brown wire.

NOTE: Use Digital Wrench™ Diagnostic Software
(dealer only) if you suspect this sensor is faulty.

4.32

=T
Cam Phase Sensor Retaining Bolt Torque:
50 ± 5 in. lbs. (5.65 ± .55 Nm)

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (ECT)

Refer to Chapter 10 for additional ECT sensor information.
Polaris dealers can test the sensor by using the Digital Wrench™
Diagnostic Software (dealer only).

Operation Overview

ECT Sensor Resistance Readings

Mounted on the cylinder head, the engine temperature sensor
measures coolant temperature. The engine temperature sensor is
a Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) type sensor, as the
temperature increases the resistance decreases.

ECT

Temperature F (C)

Resistance

68 F (20 C)

2.5 k ± 6%

86 F (30 C)

1.7 k ± 6%

104 F (40 C)

1.2 k ± 6%

122 F (50 C)

834  ± 6%

140 F (60 C)

596  ± 6%

158 F (70 C)

435  ± 6%

176 F (80 C)

323  ± 6%

194 F (90 C)

243  ± 6%

212 F (100 C)

186  ± 6%

ECT Sensor Replacement
Coolant passes through the cylinder and by the sensor probe,
varying a resistance reading which is relayed to the ECU. This
signal is processed by the ECU and compared to its
programming for determining the fuel and ignition
requirements during operation. The ECU also uses this signal to
determine when to activate the fan during operation.

ECT Sensor Test
To quickly rule out other components and wiring related to the
ECT, disconnect the harness from the ECT sensor and start the
engine. After a few seconds, the fan should turn on and the
“Check Engine” indicator should display on the instrument
cluster. This indicates all other components are working
properly.

Remove the driver and passenger seats.

Remove the rear service panel to access the ECT sensor.

Drain coolant to level below sensor.

Disconnect sensor from engine harness.

Using a wrench, remove and replace the sensor, applying
a light coating of thread sealant to aid installation.

Torque the sensor to 17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm).

=T
ECT Retaining Bolt Torque:
17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm)
7.

Add the required amount of coolant and properly bleed the
cooling system (see Chapter 3).

ECT Sensor

4.33

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
IGNITION COIL

Ignition Coil Tests

Operation Overview

The ignition coil can be tested by using an ohm meter. Use the
following illustration and specification table to test the ignition
coil.

The ignition coil is used to provide high voltage to fire the spark
plugs. When the ignition key is on, DC voltage is present in
primary side of the ignition coil windings. During engine
rotation, an AC pulse is created within the crankshaft position
sensor for each passing tooth on the flywheel. The two-tooth gap
creates an “interrupt” input signal, corresponding to specific
crankshaft position. This signal serves as a reference for the
control of ignition timing. The ECU then calculates the time
interval between the consecutive pulses, and determines when
to trigger the voltage spike that induces the voltage from the
primary to the secondary coil windings to fire the spark plugs.
Ignition Coil

Ignition Coil Resistance Readings
Test

Pin Connection
Between 1 & 2
Between 2 & 3

Primary
Secondary

Between High Tension
Lead End Caps
(Red end caps on coil end)

Primary Test

Measure Between
Connector Pins

0.4 

Ignition Coil / HT Lead Replacement
1.

Remove the driver and passenger seats.

Remove the rear service panel to access the ignition coil.

Disconnect the ignition coil harness and remove the high
tension leads from the coil.

Remove the fastener retaining the ignition coil and remove
it from the vehicle. If replacing the high tension lead(s),
remove the other end of the lead(s) from the spark plug.

Install the new ignition coil and/or high tension lead(s).

Secondary Test

=T
Ignition Coil Retaining Bolt Torque:
75 in. lbs. (8.5 Nm)
NOTE: Be sure to mark / note which ignition coil
wire goes to which cylinder and ignition coil post.
The engine will misfire if the spark plug wires are
installed incorrectly. The spark plug wires are
marked PTO and MAG and should be installed to the
corresponding cylinder spark plug and coil post.

4.34

Measure Between End Caps

6.6k 

Resistance
0.4 
6.6 k 

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
EFI DIAGNOSTICS

A set of three numbers will appear in the information area.
• The first number (located far left) can range from 0 to 9.
This number represents the total number of trouble code
present (example: 2 means there are 3 codes present).

Instrument Cluster Trouble Code Display
NOTE: The diagnostic mode is accessible only
when the check engine MIL has been activated.

• The second number (located top right) can be 2 to 6
digits in length. This number equates to the suspected
area of fault (SPN).

Use the following procedure to display diagnostic trouble codes
that were activated during current ignition cycle causing the
MIL to illuminate. Diagnostic trouble codes will remain stored
in the gauge (even if MIL turns off) until the key is turned off.

• The third number (located bottom right) can be 1 to 2
digits in length. This number equates to the fault mode
(FMI).

NOTE: If there is a diagnostic problem with the
power steering system, the power steering MIL will
illuminate and blink in place of the check engine MIL.
1.

If the trouble code(s) are not displayed, use the MODE
button to toggle until “CK ENG” displays on the
information display area.

If more than one code exists, press the MODE button to
advance to the next trouble code.

To exit the diagnostic mode, press and hold the MODE
button or turn the ignition key OFF once the codes are
recorded.

Press and hold the MODE button to enter the diagnostics
code menu.

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE TABLE
Component
Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)

Vehicle Speed Signal

Condition
Voltage Too High
Voltage Too Low
Data Erratic or Intermittent (or missing)
Received Vehicle Speed Has Error

Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage Too High
(T-MAP)
Voltage Too Low
Intake Air Temperature (T-MAP)

Voltage Too High
Voltage Too Low

SPN
51

102

105

Voltage Too High
Engine Temperature Sensor (ECT)

Voltage Too Low
Temperature Too High
Engine Overheat Shutdown

110

FMI

Digital Wrench™
P-Code

P0123

P0122

P0503

C1069

P0108

P0107

P0113

P0112

P0118

P0117

P0217

P1217

4.35

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE TABLE
Component

Condition

SPN

Voltage Too High
System Power
(Battery Potential / Power Input)

FMI
3

168
Voltage Too Low

Digital Wrench™
P-Code
P0563
C1063
P0562
C1064

Engine Speed (This is applicable
when the EPS module gets the
engine speed from the ECM)

Received Engine Speed Has Error

190

C1066

Gear Sensor Signal

Voltage Too Low

523

P0916

ECU Memory

EEPROM: Read/Write Failure

628

C1073

Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)

Plausibility Fault

636

P0335

Camshaft Phase Sensor

Circuit Fault

637

P0340

P0261

P0262

Driver Circuit Grounded

P1262

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded

P0264

P0265

Driver Circuit Grounded

P1265

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded

P1691

P1692

Driver Circuit Grounded

P1693

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded

P1481

P1482

P1483

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded
Injector 1 (MAG)

Injector 2 (PTO)

Rear Differential Output

Fan Relay Driver Circuit

Driver Circuit Short to B+

651

652

746

1071

Driver Circuit Grounded
Ignition Coil Primary Driver 1 (MAG) Driver Circuit Short to B+

1268

P1353

Ignition Coil Primary Driver 2 (PTO) Driver Circuit Short to B+

1269

P1354

P0230

P0232

P0231

P16A2

P16A1

P16A9

P16A8

P1836

P1835

P1834

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded
Fuel Pump Driver Circuit

Driver Circuit Short to B+

1347

Driver Circuit Grounded
ECU Output Supply Voltage 1

ECU Output Supply Voltage 2

Voltage Too High
Voltage Too Low
Voltage Too High
Voltage Too Low

3597

3598

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded
All Wheel Drive Control Circuit
(AWD)

Driver Circuit Short to B+

520207

Driver Circuit Grounded
Steering Over Current Shut Down

Current Above Normal or Grounded

520221

C1050

Steering Excessive Current Error

Current Above Normal or Grounded

520222

C1051

Steering Torque Partial Failure

Condition Exists

520223

C1052

4.36

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE TABLE
Component
Steering Torque Full Failure
EPS Inverter Temperature

Condition
Condition Exists
Greater than 110° C (230° F)
Greater than 120° C (248° F)

SPN

FMI

Digital Wrench™
P-Code

520224

C1053

C1054

C1055

520225

EPS CAN Communications
Receive Error

No RX Message for 2 Seconds

520226

U0100

EPS CAN Communications
Transmit Error

No TX Message for 2 Seconds

520227

U1100

Position Encoder Error

520228

C1065

EPS Software Error

Software Error

520229

C1070

IC CAN Communication with EPS

EPS Off Line (EPS DM1 not seen)

520230

U0131

P1505

P1509

Driver Circuit Grounded

P1508

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded

P1515

P1519

Driver Circuit Grounded

P1518

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded

P1525

P1529

Driver Circuit Grounded

P1528

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded

P1535

P1539

P1538

Driver Circuit Open / Grounded
Idle Air Control Valve (IAC)
M17; IAC Stepper Pin 1

Idle Air Control Valve (IAC)
M17; IAC Stepper Pin 3

Idle Air Control Valve (IAC)
M17; IAC Stepper Pin 4

Idle Air Control Valve (IAC)
M17; IAC Stepper Pin 6

Driver Circuit Short to B+

Driver Circuit Short to B+
Driver Circuit Grounded

520267

520268

520269

520270

4.37

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
EFI Troubleshooting

Poor Idle

Fuel Starvation / Lean Mixture

Symptom: Idle Too High (If greater than 1300 RPM when
engine is warm).

Symptoms: Hard start or no start, bog, backfire, popping
through intake / exhaust, hesitation, detonation, low power,
spark plug erosion, engine runs hot, surging, high idle, idle
speed erratic.
• No fuel in tank
• Restricted tank vent, or routed improperly

• Throttle stop screw set incorrect
• Throttle cable sticking, improperly adjusted, routed
incorrectly
Symptom: Idle Too Low (if less than 900 RPM when engine is
warm).

• Fuel lines or fuel injectors restricted

• Plugged air filter

• Fuel filter plugged

• Leaking injector (rich condition)

• Fuel pump inoperative

• Belt dragging

• Air leak in system

• Throttle stop screw tampering

• Intake air leak (throttle shaft, intake ducts, airbox or air
cleaner cover)
• Incorrect throttle stop screw adjustment

Symptom: Erratic Idle.
• Throttle cable incorrectly adjusted
• Air Leaks, dirty injector

Rich Mixture

• TPS damaged or adjusted

Symptoms: Fouls spark plugs, black, sooty exhaust smoke,
rough idle, poor fuel economy, engine runs rough/ misses, poor
performance, bog, engine loads up, backfire.

• Tight valves
• Ignition timing incorrect
• Belt dragging

• Air intake restricted (inspect intake duct)
• Air filter dirty/plugged
• Poor fuel quality (old fuel)
• Fouled spark plug
• TPS setting incorrect
• Injector failure

4.38

• Dirty air cleaner
• Engine worn
• Spark Plug fouled
• Throttle stop screw set incorrectly (out of sync with
ECU)

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
DIGITAL WRENCH™ OPERATION
Digital Wrench™ Diagnostic Software Overview
IMPORTANT: Refer to Section 2, 3 and 4 in the Instruction Manual provided in the Digital Wrench™ Diagnostic
Kit to install the Polaris Digital Wrench™ diagnostic software on your computer.
The Digital Wrench™ diagnostic software allows the technician to perform the following tests and observations:
• View or clear trouble codes

• Perform guided diagnostic procedures

• Analyze real-time engine data

• Create customer service account records

• Reflash ECU calibration files

• Perform output state control tests (on some models)

Special Tools (also refer to page 4.2)
DIGITAL WRENCH™ DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE
Digital Wrench™ Diagnostic Kit

PART NUMBER
PU-47063-A
Digital Wrench™ Software: PU-48731

PU-47063-A (listed above) INCLUDES:

Standard Interface Cable: PU-47151
SmartLink Module Kit: PU-47471

Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit
Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter
Fluke 73 Digital Multi-Meter or Fluke 77 DMM
Laptop or Desktop Computer
USB/Serial Adaptor: Saelig RS-232

Diagnostic Software Version
Always use the most current version of the Digital Wrench™
software to ensure you have the latest updates or enhancements.
New reprogramming files and guided diagnostic procedures are
added to these updates as they become available. For
information on how to determine if you have the latest update
available, refer to “Digital Wrench™ Version and Update ID”.

ECU Replacement
Although the need for ECU replacement is unlikely, a specific
replacement procedure is required to ensure that all essential
data contained within the original ECU is transferred to the
replacement ECU.

PU-43506-A
PV-48656
PV-48656 (Fluke 77: PV-43568)
Commercially Available (refer to diagnostic software user
manual or HELP section for minimum requirements)
Diagnostic procedures are added to subsequent versions of
Digital Wrench™ as they become available. Check your release
version often and upgrade when available to be sure you are
using the most current software available.

Digital Wrench™ Communication Errors
If you experience problems connecting to a vehicle or any
Digital Wrench™ related problem, visit the Digital Wrench™
Knowledge Base for the most current troubleshooting
information, FAQs, downloads and software updates at:
http://polaris.diagsys.com/.

Refer to procedure and carefully follow all instructions provided
in Digital Wrench™.

Guided Diagnostic Available
Guided diagnostics are available within Digital Wrench™ for
all supported Trouble Codes (that is, any fault that will turn on
the ‘Check Engine’ indicator).
In addition, guided diagnostics are also available for many other
electrical sub systems.

4.39

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Digital Wrench™ - Diagnostic Connector

Digital Wrench™ Version and Update ID

The diagnostic connector is located under the dash and is
accessible from the passenger side.

Knowing what Digital Wrench™ version and update is installed
will help determine which updates are required.
NOTE: Versions and updates are subject to change.
1.

Open the Digital Wrench™ software. Locate the version
ID shown on the lower right side of the Digital Wrench™
start-up screen.

Version: 3.1 03/13/09

Follow these steps to connect the diagnostic interface cable to
the vehicle to allow Digital Wrench™ use:
1.

Assemble the SmartLink Module and attach the PC
Interface Cable to your laptop (see page 4.3).

Remove the protective cap from the Digital Wrench™
connector.

Connect the Vehicle Interface Cable to the Digital
Wrench™ diagnostic connector.

Turn the ignition key to the ‘ON’ position, select the
appropriate vehicle and wait for the status to display
‘Connected’ in the lower left corner of the screen.

Once connected, proceed with using Digital Wrench™.

In this case, the version number is 3.1 with a 03/13/09
update. Proceed to http://polaris.diagsys.com to see if a
newer update is available.

Digital Wrench Update 04-27-09

Digital Wrench™ Serial Number Location
Open the configuration screen by clicking on the wrench icon.
The serial number is located on the right side of the screen.
3.

In this case, a newer update (04-27-09) is available and
should be downloaded before using Digital Wrench™ (see
“Digital Wrench™ Updates”).

IMPORTANT: Always operate with the latest update.

4.40

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Digital Wrench™ Updates

If the update file date listed is newer than your current
version and update (see “Digital Wrench™ Version and
Update ID”), download the file.

Click on the link shown above, save the file to your hard
disk and then double-click the icon to start the update
process.

Updates are released for Digital Wrench™ via the Internet at:
http://polaris.diagsys.com. The Digital Wrench™ website can
also be accessed through the dealer website at:
www.polarisdealers.com.
NOTE: Only authorized Polaris dealers
distributors can access the dealer website.

and

Log on to www.polarisdealers.com.

Locate the “Service and Warranty” drop-down menu.

Click on “Digital Wrench Updates”.

NOTE: Do not "run" or "open" the file from where
they are. Select "save" and download them to your
PC before running the install.
8.

The Digital Wrench™ portal website should appear in a
new web browser.

Click on “Digital Wrench Version 3.1 Updates”.

When the update is complete, the version shown on the
right side of the Digital Wrench™ start-up screen should
match the update you just downloaded.

Digital Wrench Update 04-27-09

IMPORTANT: You must already have version 3.1
installed before adding these updates. They will not
install if you have version 3.0 or older on your PC.

Version: 3.1 04/27/09

NOTE: Versions and updates are subject to change.

4.41

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Digital Wrench™ Feature Map

4.42

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
Engine Controller Reprogramming (Reflash)

• KNOW THE PROCESS: If you are not familiar with
the entire reprogramming process, review the HELP
section of the diagnostic software before you attempt
reprogramming. Click on the ? on the tool bar or press
F11. The information in the on-line help is the most
current and complete information available. This
should be your first step until you are familiar with the
process.

Process Overview
The reprogramming feature is in the Special Tests menu on the
Digital Wrench™ screen. Start Digital Wrench™ and click on
the Special Tests menu icon (red tool box). A technician should
be familiar with the process and with computer operation in
general before attempting to reprogram an ECU.

• COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS: If you have had
problems communicating with a vehicle while
performing diagnostic functions, do not attempt
reprogramming until the cause has been identified and
fixed. Check all connections, and be sure battery
voltage is as specified.

The Digital Wrench™ Engine Controller Reprogramming (or
“Reflash”) feature allows reprogramming of the ECU fuel and
ignition map. To successfully reprogram the ECU, an
Authorization Key must be obtained by entering a Request Code
in the box provided on the Reflash Authorization site. The
Request Code is automatically generated by Digital Wrench™
during the reprogramming process. The Reflash Authorization
site is located under the “Service and Warranty” drop down
menu on the dealer website at: www.polarisdealers.com.

Proceed to http://polaris.diagsys.com for specific
information and FAQs on how to troubleshoot
communication problems.

IMPORTANT: Failure to follow the reprogramming
instructions completely and correctly can result in an
engine that does not run! Replacement ECUs are
programmed as “no-start” and require a reflash for
them to work.
Reprogramming (Reflash) Tips:
• BATTERY VOLTAGE: The majority of problems with
reprogramming can be attributed to a low battery. Be
sure the battery voltage (no load) is at least 13 volts and
at least 12.5 volts with the key ‘ON’. Connect a battery
charger if necessary to bring voltage level above
minimum. Fully charge the battery before you attempt
to reprogram.
• DEDICATED LAPTOP: Best results are obtained using
a laptop computer that is “dedicated to Digital
Wrench™”. A laptop that is used by a variety of people
and in several applications around the dealership is
more likely to cause a reprogramming problem than one
dedicated to Digital Wrench™ diagnostics only.
• OBTAINING
THE
LATEST
UPDATE:
Reprogramming updates are provided periodically and
contain the most recent calibrations (see “Digital
Wrench™ Updates”).
• CLOSE NON-ESSENTIAL PROGRAMS: Polaris
recommends that you DO NOT install non-essential
programs on a Service Department laptop. Camera
detection software, Virus Scanners, Tool Bars, etc. may
clog up memory if running in the background and make
it harder for the diagnostic software to operate.

• DON’T DISTURB THE PC: While reprogramming is
in progress, don’t move the mouse and don’t touch the
keyboard. The process only takes a few minutes, and is
best left alone until complete.
Reprogramming (Reflash) Procedure:
If you are not familiar with the reprogramming process, review
the “Reprogramming (Reflash) Tips” before you begin. Follow
the on-screen instructions as you progress through the steps. If
you encounter a problem, always check the On-Line help for
current tips and information.
1.

Verify the most current update has been downloaded and
loaded into Digital Wrench™. See “Digital Wrench™
Version and Update ID” on page 4.40.

4.43

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
2.

Connect the SmartLink Module cables to the PC and
vehicle. See “Digital Wrench™ - Diagnostic Connector”
on page 4.40.

Open the Digital Wrench™ program.

Select the model year, product line and vehicle description
by selecting the “Change Vehicle Type” icon.

Select the “Special Tests” icon.

4.44

Select “Engine Controller Reprogramming”.

Select the file you want to load into the ECU then click the
“Continue” icon to proceed to the Integrity Check.

Follow the on screen instructions and connect a 9V battery
to the reflash battery connector located off the main
diagnostic connector. Click the “Continue” icon to obtain
a Request Code.

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
9.

Copy (CTRL+C) the Request Code that will be required on
the dealer website in the next step. DO NOT CLOSE
Digital Wrench™ or the Request Code will be invalid.
NOTE: All characters are letters; there are no numbers
in a request code.

12. Select the same file type from the list that you selected
previously while in Digital Wrench™. Enter the VIN along
with the customer’s name and address. When completed,
click the Authorize button once to proceed.

Authorization Key goes here after
obtained from the dealer website

Copy Request Code to
obtain Authorization Key

NOTE: Request Codes and Authorization Keys must
be entered EXACTLY as they appear on the screen.

Enter ALL the information and
click on the “Authorize” button

13. An “Authorization Key” will appear in the upper left corner
of the screen. Copy (CTRL+C) this key exactly as it
appears.

10. Go to www.polarisdealers.com and click on “ReFlash
Authorization” from the “Service and Warranty” dropdown menu.

“Authorization Key”

“Service and Warranty”

“Reflash Authorization”

14. Enter or paste (CTRL+C) the Authorization Key in the box
located on the Digital Wrench™ screen. Click the
‘Continue’ button and follow instructions provided on the
screen to complete the reprogramming procedure.

11. Enter or paste (CTRL+V) the Request Code into the box.

Enter the
“Request Code”

Enter the
“Authorization Key”

4.45

ELECTRONIC FUEL INJECTION
15. At this point the reflash process will begin. Do not touch
the vehicle or PC during the process.

16. Once the ECU reprogramming procedure is complete, click
the ‘Finish’ button on the screen. Verify the reflash was a
success by starting the vehicle.

4.46

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION

CHAPTER 5
BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAB FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BODY EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2
5.2
5.3
5.4

HOOD / FRONT BODY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
FRONT BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
REAR BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
SEAT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
SEAT BELTS / MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
FLOOR / ROCKER PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
REAR CARGO BOX / FENDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
CHASSIS / MAIN FRAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9

BODY COMPONENT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
REAR SERVICE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
FRONT BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
REAR BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
HOOD AND FRONT BODY WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
REAR FENDER, FLAIR AND TIE DOWN REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
CARGO BOX ASSEMBLY REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
ROCKER PANELS, CONSOLE AND FLOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13

STEERING ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
STEERING SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
STEERING SHAFT BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15

FRONT A-ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17

BALL JOINT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19

REAR A-ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21

REAR STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22
REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22

DECAL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
SHOCKS / SPRINGS / FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
SHOCK REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
SHOCK REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24

FOX™ SHOCK EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
FOX™ SHOCK SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26

5.1

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM

TORQUE VALUE

Front LH/RH Upper / Lower
A-Arm Bolt

40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Rear LH/RH Upper / Lower
A-Arm Bolt

40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Lower LH/RH
Rear Bearing Carrier

SPECIAL TOOLS
TOOL DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Gas Shock Recharging Kit

2200421

Shock Shaft Seal Protector
.625" Diameter

2201640

IFP Tool

PS-45908

40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Shock Spanner Wrench

2871095

Upper LH/RH
Rear Bearing Carrier

40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Shock Spanner Wrench
(Walker Evans and Fox Shocks)

2870803

Outer Tie Rod to
Bearing Carrier Housing

Shock Spring Compressor Tool

2870623

42.5 ft. lbs. (58 Nm)

Multi-Function Pliers

2876389

Front Ball Joint Pinch Bolts

22.5 ft. lbs. (30.5 Nm)

Shock Mounting Bolts

30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm)

Wheel Hub Castle Nuts

80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm)

Wheel Nuts (Steel Rims)

35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)

Tie Rod End Jam Nut

13 ft. lbs. (18 Nm)

Seat Belt to Seat Base

40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Tilt Shock Upper Fastener

7 ft. lbs. (10 Nm)

Tilt Shock Lower Fastener

12 ft. lbs. (16 Nm)

Steering Pivot Tube Fasteners

23 ft. lbs. (31 Nm)

Steering Wheel to Shaft

28 ft. lbs. (38 Nm)

Lower Steering Shaft to Box

30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm)

Steering Gear Box

17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm)

Multi-Function Pliers
Included in the tool kit, the multi-function pliers is designed to
remove the plastic push rivets used to fasten body components.

Pliers

Push Rivet

5.2

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
CAB FRAME
Assembly / Removal
NOTE: Finger tighten all components until cab frame is completely assembled on vehicle, then tighten to
specifications listed.
1.

Assemble the rear cab frame and the front cab frame at the coupler joints and secure with four (3/8-16 x 1 1/4) screws and
(3/8-16 Nyloc) nuts. Tighten screws to 25-28 ft. lbs. (34-38 Nm).

Place the assembled cab frame onto the vehicle and align the rear mount holes. Fasten the rear cab frame brackets to vehicle
with four (5/16-18) bolts and (5/16-18) nuts. Tighten bolts to 16-18 ft. lbs. (22-24 Nm). Fasten the two self-tapping screws to
the rear inner portion of the bracket on each side. Tighten screws to 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm).

Place the straps from the safety net over the front coupler posts.

Fasten the front of the cab frame to the base brackets and secure with four (3/8-16 x 1 1/4) screws and (3/8-16 Nyloc) nuts.
Tighten screws to 25-28 ft. lbs. (34-38 Nm).

Attach side bars to cab frame using M6 screws and nuts on top and M8 screws and nuts on the bottom. Tighten to 8-10 ft. lbs
(10.8-13.5 Nm)

Install the rear rack assembly to rear of cab frame and vehicle main frame. Attach the upper mounting location with four (3/
8-16 x 1 1/4) screws and (3/8-16 Nyloc) nuts. Tighten screws to 25-28 ft. lbs. (34-38 Nm). Attach the lower mounting location
with four (5/16-18) bolts and (5/16-18) nuts to the rear of the vehicle main frame. Tighten bolts to 16-18 ft. lbs. (22-24 Nm).

To remove the cab frame, reverse the assembly procedure (steps 1-6).

5.3

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
BODY EXPLODED VIEWS
Hood / Front Body Work

1/4 Turn Latch
Washer
Grommet

T25 Screws

T27 Screws

Push Rivet

T27 Screws

5.4

Push Rivets

T27 Screws

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Front Bumper
T30
Screws

O-Ring

Bulb
T25
Screw

5
T27
Screw

Headlight

Rear Bumper
LH Tail Light

T27
Screw

RH Tail Light
Speed
Nuts

T25
Screws
Rear Bumper

T27
Screws

5.5

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Seat Assembly
Seat
Hoop Tube

48 in. lbs.
(5.4 Nm)

Latch Body

Nuts

Lever
Seat Base Asm.

Spring
Plate
Cap
41-57 in. lbs.
(4.6-6.4 Nm)

41-57 in. lbs.
(4.6-6.4 Nm)

Grommets

Seat Belts / Mounting
Driver
Seat
NOTE:Seat Style May
Differ Depending on
Model Number

Passenger
Seat

3 Point
Seat Belt
40 ft. lbs.
(54 Nm)

40 ft. lbs.
(54 Nm)

3 Point
Seat Belt

3 Point
Seat Belt
40 ft. lbs.
(54 Nm)

Latch
Plunger

40 ft. lbs.
(54 Nm)

5.6

40 ft. lbs.
(54 Nm)

Rear
Seat Base

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Floor / Rocker Panels

Self-Tapping
Screw

LH Rocker

Rear
Support Bracket

Push Rivets

Self-Tapping
Screws
T27
Screws

Console Cover

Front
Support Bracket
Rear
Support Bracket
Self-Tapping
Screw

T27
Screws

T27
Screw

T27
Screws
Push Rivets
Upper Floor
Torx
Screws
Plastic Dart

U-Type
Nuts

T27
Screws

RH Rocker

Front
Support Bracket
Self-Tapping
Screws

Lower Floor

5.7

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Rear Cargo Box / Fenders

Torx Screws
Nut
1/4 turn
Latch

T27
Screw

Push Rivets

Cargo Box Support

5.8

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Chassis / Main Frame

Bolt-In Brace

15 ft. lbs.
(20 Nm)

Rear Bumper
Support
Main Frame

15 ft. lbs.
(20 Nm)

17 ft. lbs.
(23 Nm)

Skid Plate

Washer
6-8 ft. lbs.
(8-11 Nm)

5.9

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
BODY COMPONENT REMOVAL

Front Bumper

Seats

Remove the (4) push rivets from the sides of the front
bumper.

To remove any of the seats, lift upward on the latch lever
located behind the seat bottom.

Latch
Lever
Push
Rivets

Torx
Screws

NOTE: Seat Style May
Change Depending on
Model Number

Lift upward and forward on the seat while lifting up on the
latch lever and remove the seat from the vehicle.

Rear Service Panel
1.
2.

Remove the (6) Torx screws retaining the upper, middle
and lower portion of the bumper.

Disconnect the front head lamp connectors and remove the
front bumper from the vehicle.

Rear Bumper

Remove driver and passenger seats.
1.

Remove the (4) Torx screws retaining the upper portion of
the rear bumper to the cargo box.

Remove the (4) Torx screws retaining the lower portion of
the rear bumper to the frame.

Remove the (2) fasteners retaining the middle portion of the
rear bumper to the cargo box.

Turn both latches 1/4 turn to disengage the panel.

Lift the panel upward and towards the front of the vehicle
to remove it.

5.10

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Hood and Front Body Work
Hood Removal
1.

To remove the hood, turn both latches to disengage the rear
portion of the hood.

Remove the (2) Torx screws and (2) push rivets that retain
the front and rear portions of the dash assembly.
Push
Rivets

5
2.

Tilt the hood back to disengage the front tabs and remove
the hood from the vehicle.

Torx
Screws

Front Body / Dash Removal
1.

Remove the hood as previously described.

Disconnect all electrical dash components noting their
location and wire routing.

Remove the front bumper (see “BODY COMPONENT
REMOVAL - Front Bumper”).

Remove the dash assembly from the vehicle.

Remove the front portion of the cab frame assembly to
allow dash removal. Refer to appropriate “CAB FRAME Assembly / Removal” procedure for assembly torque
specifications.

Front Fender Flair Removal
1.

If dash is installed, remove the (2) push rivets that attach
the lower portion of the fender flair to the rocker panels.

Remove the (8) T27 Torx screws and remove fender flairs
from the dash assembly.

Remove

Remove the push rivets that attach the dash assembly to the
rocker panels on each side.

Remove Screws
and Push Pins

5.11

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Rear Fender, Flair and Tie Down Removal

Cargo Box Assembly Removal

Remove the rear bumper (see “BODY COMPONENT
REMOVAL - Rear Bumper”).

Remove the seats and rear panel or cover (see “Seats” and
“Rear Service Panel”).

Remove the push rivets that retain the rear portion of the
rocker panels to the rear fenders.

Remove the (4) Torx screws retaining the lower portion of
the rear bumper to the frame (see “Rear Bumper”).

Remove the (8) T27 Torx screws and remove the fender
flair.

Remove the (4) screws from the middle of the cargo box.

Remove the (4) Torx screws that attach the front portion of
the cargo box to the frame.

Remove the (6) Torx screws and (2) push rivets that attach
the rocker panels to the cargo box on each side.

Disconnect the taillight harness from the chassis harness
and remove the cargo box assembly from the vehicle.

Tie-Down
Torx
Screws
Push
Rivet
Fender
Push
Rivets
4.

Fender
Flair

Remove the (3) Torx screws from the bottom side of the
fender and the upper push rivet from the top side. Remove
the fender from the vehicle.
Remove the (4) fasteners that retain the tie-down brackets
to the cargo box and remove from vehicle.

Disconnect Taillight
Connector

Air Box

5.12

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Rocker Panels, Console and Floor
Rocker Panel Removal
1.

Remove the push rivets and Torx screws retaining the
rocker panel and remove panel from the vehicle.

Push
Rivets

Screws

Console and Lower Floor Removal
1.

Remove both seats and rocker panels (see “Rocker Panel
Removal”).

Remove the T27 screws retaining the console to the floor.

Remove the shift handle knob and remove the console.

Remove the Torx screws retaining the upper floor to the
lower floor.

Remove the Torx screws retaining the rear portion of the
floor and remove the lower floor from the vehicle.

5.13

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
STEERING ASSEMBLY
Exploded View
Cap
Spacer

Thick
Washers
Thin
Washer
Thin
Washer

Steering Wheel
25-31 ft. lbs.
(34-42 Nm)

Thick
Washer
Thin
Washer

Steering Shaft
Pivot Tube
Spacer
Bearing
Bushing

7 ft. lbs.
(10 Nm)

42.5 ft. lbs.
(58 Nm)

23 ft. lbs.
(31 Nm)
27-33 ft. lbs.
(37-45 Nm)

Bushing
23 ft. lbs.
(31 Nm)

Oil Locking
Shock Asm.
12 ft. lbs.
(16 Nm)

Bearing

LH Boot
Gear Box
Asm.

12-14 ft. lbs.
(16-19 Nm)

RH Boot

42.5 ft. lbs.
(58 Nm)

Boot

17 ft. lbs.
(23 Nm)

12-14 ft. lbs.
(16-19 Nm)

Nut
Cotter Pin
Rod End

5.14

Tie Rod

17 ft. lbs.
(23 Nm)

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Steering Wheel Removal

Refer to steps 11-13 of the “Steering Shaft Bearing
Replacement” procedure for installation.

Remove the steering wheel cap.

Loosen the nut and back it half way off the steering shaft.

Steering Shaft Bearing Replacement

With a glove on your hand, place it under the steering
wheel. Lift upward on the inner portion of the steering
wheel while using a hammer to strike the steering shaft nut.

Perform the “Steering Shaft Removal” procedure.

Remove the steering wheel cap and retaining nut.

IMPORTANT: If the steering wheel will not pop loose,
proceed to “Steering Shaft Removal”.

Press steering shaft out of the steering wheel and pivot tube.

Note the order and location of the washers and spacers
between the steering wheel and pivot tube.

Drive the bearings out of the pivot tube using a drift punch.

Inspect the pivot tube bearing surfaces for signs of
excessive wear or damage.

Slide a new lower bearing onto the steering shaft and install
the steering shaft through the pivot tube.

Once the steering wheel pops loose, completely remove the
nut and lift the steering wheel off the shaft.

Steering Shaft Removal
1.

Remove the pinch bolt retaining the lower portion of the
steering shaft to the steering gear box assembly.
Steering Shaft

NOTE: Be sure the lower washers and spacers are
still on the steering shaft.

Pinch Bolt

Thick
Washer
Gear Box
Asm.

Spacer
Pivot Tube

Cap
Nut
Figure 5-16

Thin
Washer

Remove the fastener retaining the upper portion of the
steering wheel tilt shock to the pivot tube.

Spacer

Bearing

Thick
Washers

Figure 5-17
Bearing
Pivot Tube

Thin
Washers

Slide a new upper bearing onto the steering shaft and press
it into the pivot tube by hand.

NOTE: Bearings will be seated in the pivot housing
upon tightening the steering wheel nut in step 14.
9.
Tilt Shock

Reinstall the upper washers and spacers in the order in
which they were removed.

10. Install the steering wheel and hand tighten the nut.
3.

Remove the (2) fasteners that retain the pivot tube.

Remove the steering shaft, pivot tube and steering wheel
from the vehicle as an assembly.

5.15

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
11. Reinstall the steering shaft assembly in the vehicle. Install
the lower portion of the steering shaft onto the steering gear
box assembly (see Figure 5-16). Torque the lower pinch
bolt to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm).
12. Install the (2) fasteners that retain the pivot tube (see Figure
5-17). Torque fasteners to 23 ft. lbs. (31 Nm).
13. Install the fastener retaining the upper portion of the
steering wheel tilt shock to the pivot tube (see Figure 5-17).
Torque fastener to 7 ft. lbs. (10 Nm).
14. Be sure the front wheels are facing straight forward.
Remove the steering wheel and align as needed. Torque the
steering wheel nut to 28 ft. lbs. (38 Nm).

FRONT A-ARMS
Removal / Replacement
The following procedure details upper and lower A-arm
removal and replacement on one side of the vehicle.
1.

Elevate and safely support the front of the vehicle and
remove the front wheel.

Remove lower shock fastener (A) from the upper A-arm.

Remove upper ball joint pinch bolt (B) from bearing carrier.

Using a soft face hammer, tap on bearing carrier to loosen
the upper A-arm ball joint end while lifting upward on the
upper A-arm. Completely remove the ball joint end from
the bearing carrier.

Remove the front bumper to allow A-arm bolt removal.

Loosen and remove the upper A-arm through-bolt fastener
(C) and remove the upper A-arm from the vehicle.

Examine A-arm bushings and pivot tube (see “Exploded
View”). Replace if worn. Discard hardware.

15. Install steering wheel cap and field test steering operation.

WARNING
The locking agent on the existing bolts was
destroyed during removal. DO NOT reuse old
hardware. Serious injury or death could result if
fasteners come loose during operation.
8.

If not replacing the A-arm, thoroughly clean the A-arm and
pivot tube.

Install new ball joint into A-arm. Refer to “Ball Joint
Replacement” section.

10. Insert new A-arm bushings and pivot tube into new A-arm.
11. Install new upper A-arm assembly onto vehicle frame.
Torque new bolt to specification.
12. Insert upper A-arm ball joint end into the bearing carrier.
Install upper ball joint pinch bolt (B) into the bearing carrier
and torque bolt to specification.
13. Attach shock to A-arm with fastener (A). Torque lower
shock bolt to specification.
14. Remove lower ball joint pinch bolt (E) from bearing carrier.
15. Using a soft face hammer, tap on bearing carrier to loosen
the lower A-arm ball joint end while pushing downward on
the lower A-arm. Completely remove the ball joint end
from the bearing carrier.
16. Loosen and remove the lower A-arm through-bolt fastener
(F) and remove the lower A-arm from the vehicle.
17. Examine A-arm bushings and pivot tube (see “Exploded
View”). Replace if worn. Discard hardware.

5.16

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
18. If not replacing the A-arm, thoroughly clean the A-arm and
pivot tube.

Exploded View

19. Install new ball joint into A-arm. Refer to “Ball Joint
Replacement” section.
20. Insert new A-arm bushings and pivot tube into new A-arm.

Bushings

21. Install new lower A-arm assembly onto vehicle frame.
Torque new bolt to specification.
22. Insert lower A-arm ball joint end into the bearing carrier.
Install lower ball joint pinch bolt (E) into the bearing carrier
and torque bolt to specification.

Upper
A-arm

Upper Fastener
Pivot
Tube

Grease
Zerk

WARNING
Upon A-arm installation completion, test vehicle
at low speeds before putting into service.

Ball Joint

Lower Fastener
Pivot
Tube

Bushings

Front Upper / Lower A-arm Bolts:
40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Bearing
Carrier

Lower
A-arm

=T
Front Ball Joint Pinch Bolts:
22.5 ft. lbs. (30.5 Nm)

Grease
Zerk

Pinch
Bolts

Shock Mounting Bolts: 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm)
C
CV Shield
Ball Joint

Screws

F
B

5.17

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
BALL JOINT SERVICE

Removal
IMPORTANT: Do not reuse a ball joint if it has been
removed for any reason. If removed, it must be
replaced. Use this removal procedure only when
replacing the ball joint.
1.

Use a press and correct size driver to remove the ball joint
from the A-arm.
Correct
Driver Placement

The A-arm must be removed to perform this procedure
(see “FRONT A-ARMS - Removal / Replacement”).

The driver must fit the
inside diameter of the
A-arm end.

Ball Joint

Upper A-Arm Shown

Upper A-arm

NOTE: The driver must fit the ball joint housing in
the A-arm. This will allow the ball joint to be properly
pressed out of the A-arm without damaging the Aarm.

Retaining Ring

Press out of the A-arm
in this direction
2.

Remove the retaining ring from the ball joint.

A driver must be used for the removal of the ball joint. Use
the dimensions below to fabricate or locate the correct size
driver to use in the following process.

Upper A-Arm Shown

Driver Dimensions

Place driver HERE
to support A-arm

1.375 in.
(3.49 cm)
3 in.
(7.62 cm)
1.75 in.
(4.45 cm)

- Outside diameter of driver cannot be any
larger than 1.75 in. (4.45 cm).
- Inside diameter cannot be any smaller than
1.375 in. (3.49 cm).
- Driver must be at least 3 in. (7.62 cm) tall.

5.18

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Installation

REAR A-ARMS

Removal

Place the A-arm in the correct position for ball joint
installation. Face the A-arm end flat on top of the driver.
Carefully drive the ball joint into place until the ball joint
is properly seated.
Press into the A-arm
in this direction

The following procedure details upper and lower A-arm
removal and replacement on one side of the vehicle. Repeat the
following steps to remove the A-arm(s) from the opposite side.
NOTE: Use the exploded view in this section as a
reference during the procedure (see page 5.41).
1.

Elevate and safely support the rear of the vehicle off the
ground.

Remove the wheel nuts, and rear wheel.

Place driver HERE
to support A-arm
Upper A-Arm Shown

After the new ball joint is installed into the A-arm, install
a NEW retaining ring.

Ball Joint

Upper A-arm Removal
1.

Remove the fastener (A) attaching the upper A-arm to the
bearing carrier.

Upper A-arm
NEW
Retaining Ring

Reinstall the A-arm (see “FRONT A-ARMS - Removal /
Replacement”).

Repeat the ball joint service procedure for any additional
A-arm ball joint replacements.

Remove the fastener (B) attaching the upper A-arm to the
frame and remove the upper A-arm from the vehicle.

Examine A-arm and bearing carrier bushings and pivot
tubes (see “Exploded View” on page 5.41). Replace if
worn. Discard hardware.

5.19

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
3.

Remove the fastener (H) attaching the lower A-arm to the
bearing carrier (see previous illustration).

Remove the (2) fasteners (J) attaching the lower A-arm to
the frame and remove the lower A-arm from the vehicle
(see previous illustration).

Examine A-arm and bearing carrier bushings and pivot
tubes (see “Exploded View”). Replace if worn. Discard
hardware.

If not replacing the A-arm, thoroughly clean the A-arm and
pivot tubes.

Insert new A-arm bushings and pivot tubes into new A-arm.

WARNING
The locking agent on the existing bolts was
destroyed during removal. DO NOT reuse old
hardware. Serious injury or death could result if
fasteners come loose during operation.
4.

If not replacing the A-arm, thoroughly clean the a-arm and
pivot tubes.

Insert new A-arm bushings and pivot tubes into new A-arm.

Lower A-arm Removal
1.

Remove the lower fastener (F) retaining the stabilizer bar
linkage to the lower A-arm.

Remove the fastener (G) retaining the lower portion of the
shock to the lower A-arm.

5.20

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Installation
1.

Exploded View

Install lower A-arm assembly onto vehicle frame. Torque
new fasteners to specification.

Attach lower A-arm to bearing carrier. Torque new fastener
to specification.

Route brake line on top of the lower A-arm and between
lower shock mounting tabs.

Reinstall the lower portion of the shock to the lower A-arm.
Torque shock fastener to specification.

Install upper A-arm assembly onto vehicle frame. Torque
new fastener to specification.

Attach upper A-arm to bearing carrier. Torque new fastener
to specification.

Install wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification.

Upper Fastener
Pivot Tube

Upper
A-arm
Grease
Zerk
Bushings

Pivot
Tube

WARNING
Upon A-arm installation completion, test vehicle
at low speeds before putting into service.

Bushings

Lower
Fastener

Pivot
Tube

Upper
Fastener

5
Lower
A-arm

=T
Rear Upper / Lower A-arm Bolts:
40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Bushings

=T
Lower Rear Bearing Carrier Bolts:
40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Bearing
Carrier

Pivot
Tube
Lower
Fastener

Screws
CV
Shield

Shock Mounting Bolts: 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm)

=T
Upper Rear Bearing Carrier Bolts:
40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

5.21

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
REAR STABILIZER BAR
Removal / Installation
1.

Remove the exhaust pipe and exhaust silencer from the
vehicle.

Remove the stabilizer bar from the bracket (bracket can
remain attached to the frame).
Leave bracket
attached to frame.

Remove
Fasteners

NOTE: The exhaust silencer can be removed
through the side of the vehicle after the exhaust pipe
is detached from the header pipe.
2.

Inspect the stabilizer bar for straightness. Inspect the
bushings and replace if needed.

Reverse the procedure for installation. Torque the stabilizer
bolts to 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm).

Remove the fastener retaining the stabilizer bar to the
linkage on each side of the vehicle.
Stabilizer Bar

Nuts
Grease
Zerk
Bushings

Bracket

Remove

18 ft. lbs.
(24 Nm)

Linkage
3.

Remove the (4) fasteners retaining the stabilizer bar to the
bracket.

5.22

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
DECAL REPLACEMENT
WARNING
The following procedure involves the use of an
open flame. Perform this procedure in a well
ventilated area, away from gasoline or other
flammable materials. Be sure the area to be
flame treated is clean and free of gasoline
or flammable residue.

WARNING
Do not flame treat components that are installed
on the vehicle. Remove the component from the
vehicle before flame treating.

The side panels, front and rear fender cabs are plastic
polyethylene material. Therefore, they must be “flame treated”
prior to installing a decal to ensure good adhesion. A bonus of
the flame treating procedure is it can be used to reduce or
eliminate the whitish stress marks that are sometimes left after
a fender or cab is bent, flexed, or damaged.

CAUTION
Do not flame treat painted plastic components.
Painted plastic surfaces should only be wiped
clean prior to decal adhesion.
To flame treat the decal area:
1.

Pass the flame of a propane torch back and forth quickly
over the area where the decal is to be applied until the
surface appears slightly glossy. This should occur after just
a few seconds of flame treating. Do not hold the torch too
close to the surface (2-3 inches from the flame tip is
recommended). Keep the torch moving to prevent damage.

Apply the decal on one edge first. Slowly lay down
remainder of the decal while rubbing lightly over the decal
surface to eliminate any air bubbles during the application.

5.23

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
SHOCKS / SPRINGS / FASTENERS

Shock Replacement

Exploded View

Using a spring compressor, compress the shock spring far
enough to remove the spring retainer.
Shock Spring
Compressor Tool
2870623

Retainer gap
should be 180°
from spring end

Remove the spring and adjusting cam from the existing
shock and install components onto the new shock.

Compress the shock spring and install the spring retainer.

IMPORTANT: The spring retainer gap should be 180°
from the end of the spring upon installation.
4.

Shock Removal / Installation
1.

Elevate the vehicle off the ground to relieve the suspension
load.

Remove the upper and lower fasteners retaining the shock
and remove the shock from the vehicle.

Reverse the procedure to reinstall the shock. Torque new
fasteners to 27-33 ft. lbs. (37-45 Nm).

5.24

Reinstall the shock onto the vehicle and torque new
fasteners to 27-33 ft. lbs. (37-45 Nm).

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
FOX™ SHOCK EXPLODED VIEWS
FOX™ 2.0 ‘Piggyback’ Shock

18 ft. lbs.
(24 Nm)

Loctite® 638™ / Primer N™
100 ft. lbs. (136 Nm)

Loctite® 638™ / Primer N™
50 ft. lbs. (68 Nm)

Preload Ring
10 ft. lbs. (14 Nm)

Ref.

Qty

Description

Ref.

Qty

Description

Body Cap Asm.

16.

Screw Asm.

Body Cap

17.

Reservoir End Cap Asm.

Body

18.

Retaining Ring

Eyelet

19.

Pellet Retainer Set Screw, Air Valve

Shaft

20.

Nylon Ball, Air Valve

Bearing Cap Asm.

21.

Preload Ring, Jam Nut

Bearing Asm.

22.

Preload Ring

Spacer

23.

Damping Adjust Asm., Piston

Plate, Top-Out

24.

Damping Adjust Asm., Concentric Adjuster

10.

Valving Asm.

25.

Bearing, External

11.

12.

2 or 3

Piston, Damping

26.

Bumper

Plate, Back-Up

27.

Bearing, Spherical

13.

Lock Nut

28.

Retaining Ring

14.

Reservoir

29.

Decal

15.

Piston Asm, Floating (IFP)

30.

Shock Oil (2870995)

5.25

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
FOX™ SHOCK SERVICE
General Service Information
Recommended Service Intervals
FOX™ Racing Shocks will perform the best if serviced at regular intervals:
• Every ride - Wash and dry the vehicle and suspension
• Every 100 hours - Visually inspect shock seals
• Every 500 hours or Annually - Change shock oil and replace seals

Front Shock Service Information

Rear Shock Service Information

SHOCK DESIGN DETAILS

Travel

6.22”

Travel

6.22”

Extended Length

19.66”

Extended Length

21.34”

IFP Location

2.40”

IFP Location

3.40”

Nitrogen Pressure

200 psi

Nitrogen Pressure

200 psi

Gas Shock Oil

2870995 (qt.)

Gas Shock Oil

2870995 (qt.)

SHOCK VALVING

COMPRESSION

REBOUND

COMPRESSION

REBOUND

1.600 x 0.008

1.425 x 0.010

1.600 x 0.015

1.425 x 0.010

1.350 x 0.012

1.425 x 0.015

1.350 x 0.012

1.350 x 0.010

1.250 x 0.012

1.350 x 0.015

1.250 x 0.012

1.250 x 0.010

1.100 x 0.015

1.250 x 0.015

1.100 x 0.012

1.100 x 0.010

0.950 x 0.012

1.100 x 0.015

0.950 x 0.012

0.950 x 0.010

0.800 x 0.010

1.100 x 0.015

0.800 x 0.012

0.800 x 0.020

0.875 x .100 Back-Up

0.950 x 0.015

0.875 x 0.100 Back-Up

1.570 x 0.128 Top-Out

0.875 x .100 Back-Up

0.950 x 0.015

0.875 x 0.100 Back-Up

0.875 x .100 Back-Up
Piston Orifice: 2x 0.070

0.800 x 0.020
1.570 x 0.128 Top-Out
Piston Orifice: 2x 0.070

5.26

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
FOX™ Shock Rebuild Information
When performing maintenance on FOX™ shocks, use the Gas
Shock Recharging Kit (PN 2200421), as it contains the
necessary valves, pressure gauge, and fittings to deflate and
pressurize shocks.

Special Tools Required:
Body Holding Tool (PN 2871071)
Charging Needle (PN 7052069-A)
Gas Shock Recharging Kit (PN 2200421)
FOX™ Shock IFP Tool (PN 2871351)
Seal Installation Bullet Tool (PN 2201640) (PN 2201639)

WARNING
FOX™ shocks contain high pressure nitrogen gas.
Extreme caution must be used while handling and
working with FOX™ shocks and related high pressure
service equipment. The pressure must be released from
the shock before disassembly. It is strongly
recommended you wear safety glasses and ear
protection during these procedures.
TIP: Extreme cleanliness is very important during all
disassembly and reassembly operations. This prevents dirt or
foreign particles from entering the shock, which causes
premature failure.

1. Safety Glasses
2. Latex Gloves
3. Lint Free Towels
4. Assembly Lube (lithium based grease)
5. Loctite #271
6. 12” Tie Wrap (Zip Tie)
7. MAPP Gas or Propane Torch
8. 1.834 TC Seal Kit
9. 5wt. Shock Fluid

5
10. IFP Depth Setting Tool
11. Seal Installation Bullet (5/8”)
12. Nitrogen Safety Needle
13. 5/8” Shaft Clamps
14. Adjustable Wrench
15. Pin Spanner Wrench (3/16” Pins)
16. 3/32” Hex Key (Allen Wrench)
17. 5/32” Hex Key (Allen Wrench)
18. Scribe or Dental Pick
19. 1/4” Flat Blade Screwdriver
20. #2 Phillips Screwdriver
21. 3/4” Open End Wrench
22. Standard Pliers
23. Small Needle Nose Pliers
24. Snap Ring Pliers
25. Socket
26. Torque Wrench
27. Torque Driver
28. Soft Faced Rubber Mallet
29. Nitrogen Tank w/ Regulator
30. Cleaning Solvent
31. Vise with soft jaws
32. Tape Measure

5.27

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
FOX™ Shock Disassembly

Figure 2

NOTE: Read through all of these instructions first to
familiarize yourself with the rebuild procedure. Make
sure you have a clean work area, and all of the
necessary tools are available. Always use proper
safety equipment when working on shock
absorbers.
NOTE: Clean the entire shock assembly with soapy
water. Try to remove as much dirt and grime as
possible by scrubbing with a soft bristle brush.
Never pressure wash your shock, as this can force
water and debris inside which will damage the seals.
Dry the shock assembly with compressed air, if
available, or use clean towels.
1.

If your shock DOES NOT have a spring installed, skip to
Step #4.
Measure the spring set length (Fig. 1). Record this number.

Back the preload adjustment ring off until spring is loose
on the body. Remove the lower spring retaining clip.

Remove the spring.

If the shock has spherical bearings in the body cap or shaft
eyelet, remove the reducer bushings and O-rings from both
ends of the shock. If your shock has polyurethane bushings
and sleeves, remove them from both ends of the shock
(Fig. 1).

Clean the entire shock assembly with soapy water. Try to
remove as much dirt and grime as possible by scrubbing
with a soft bristle brush. Never pressure wash your shock,
as this can force water and debris inside which will damage
the seals. Dry the shock assembly with compressed air, if
available, or use clean towels.

Use a 3/32” Hex Key to remove the button head screw from
the FOX™ air valve in the reservoir end cap.

Securely clamp FOX™ Nitrogen Safety Needle in vise.

CAUTION

Figure 1

Point air valve away from face and body when
charging or discharging any shock.
9.

Insert the FOX™ Safety Needle squarely into center of gas
valve (Fig. 3).
Figure 3

Note and record the setting on the Compression Adjuster
Screw. Using the Flat Blade Screwdriver, count the clicks
as you turn the adjuster clockwise until it stops (Fig. 2).
Once you have written this number down, turn the screw
all the way counterclockwise until it stops.
10. Using a blunt object, depress the air valve core to release
pressure.
11. When the shock is fully discharged, pull reservoir away
from the FOX™ Safety Needle in a straight, smooth
motion.

5.28

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
12. Clamp the body cap of the shock securely in vise with shaft
side up.
13. Gently tap the reservoir end cap with a rubber mallet to
expose the wire retaining ring. Locate the end of the ring
and push inward with fingertip. Remove the retaining ring.
A scribe or dental pick can also be used for this step, but
use extreme caution not to scratch the bore of the reservoir
tube (Fig. 4).
Figure 4

17. Align the slot of the IFP Depth Setting Tool with the end
of the IFP (Internal Floating Piston). Engage the IFP by
rotating the tool 90 degrees (Fig. 6). Gently pull the IFP out
of the reservoir tube using the IFP Depth Setting Tool, and
place it on a clean, lint free towel. Remove the shock from
the vise and pour shock oil from body and reservoir tubes
into a proper disposal container. DO NOT RE-USE OLD
SHOCK OIL.
Figure 6

5
14. Use pliers to grab flats of the gas valve of reservoir cap.
Extract cap from reservoir tube using a rocking or twisting
motion. Set reservoir cap aside on a clean, lint free paper
towel.
15. Use the appropriate size wrench to loosen the bearing
assembly (Fig. 5).
Unscrew the bearing assembly completely from the body
tube. Remove the shaft assembly from the body tube, and
place on a clean, lint free paper towel. Remove the shock
from the vise and pour shock oil from body tube into a
proper disposal container.
NOTE: DO NOT RE-USE OLD SHOCK OIL.
Figure 5

18. Using the 1/8” Hex Tool, remove the IFP bleed screw from
the IFP.
19. Clean the body tube, reservoir tube, and the IFP using
solvent. Dry with compressed air in a well ventilated area.
If compressed air is not available, dry parts using clean, lint
free paper towels and let sit in a well ventilated area to allow
the solvents to evaporate.
20. Set body assembly aside on a clean, lint free paper towel.
21. Clamp the shaft eyelet securely in vise with the piston end
up.
22. Using a 9/16” wrench, remove the piston lock nut from the
end of the shaft.
23. Hold the tip of a phillips head screwdriver against the end
of shaft. Hold the piston assembly under the top-out plate
and lift upwards (Fig. 7). Slide the piston assembly onto the
shaft of the Screwdriver. Pull the Screwdriver away from
shock shaft while supporting the piston assembly. Slide a
12” tie wrap through the entire piston assembly. Secure the
two ends of the zip tie together and remove the screwdriver.
There are many pieces to the piston assembly, and the
assembly order of these pieces is critical to the proper
performance of your shock. This step ensures that the
proper order is kept. Place piston assembly on a clean, lint
free paper towel.

16. Clamp the body cap of the shock securely in vise with the
open end of the body tube pointing up.

5.29

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Figure 9

Figure 7

24. Slide bearing assembly off of shaft. Use extreme caution
not to scratch inside of the bearing assembly when passing
it over the threads at end of shaft.

Thoroughly clean the bearing housing, and piston assembly
with solvent. Dry with compressed air in a well ventilated
area. If compressed air is not available, dry parts using
clean, lint free paper towels and let sit in a well ventilated
area to allow the remaining solvent to evaporate.

FOX™ Shock Rebuild

Use a scribe or dental pick to remove the O-ring seal from
the IFP.

Use a scribe or dental pick to remove the O-ring seals from
the reservoir end cap.

Install the new, well lubricated, O-rings into the bearing
housing. Correct placement of the shaft seal O-ring is in the
groove next to the DU bushing. Check to make sure the
seals are properly seated, and are not twisted. If a tool is
required to aid in proper seating of O-ring, use the nonwriting end of a pen, or a similar soft, blunt object, to push
it in.

Install the new U-cup seal into bearing. U-cup should be
installed so the cupped end is facing the DU bushing inside
of bearing. Check to make sure seal is properly seated. If a
tool is required to aid in proper seating of U-cup seal, use
the non-writing end of a pen, or a similar soft, blunt object,
to push it in (Fig. 10).

Use a scribe or dental pick to remove the U-cup wiper
(Fig. 8) and O-ring seals (Fig. 9) from the bearing housing.
Be careful not to scratch the seal grooves or the DU
bushing that is pressed into the bearing.
Figure 8

IMPORTANT: Use extreme caution when using a
scribe to remove seals. Always ”spear” the seal with
the point of the scribe. Do not wedge the point of the
scribe in behind the seal. This can scratch the surface
of the seal groove which will compromise the
performance and reliability of the shock absorber.

Figure 10

5.30

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
7.

Install the scraper in the bearing housing. Check for proper
orientation of the scraper in the bearing. The stepped side
of the scraper should be visible.

Install the new, well greased O-ring onto the IFP.

Replace the IFP bleed screw O-ring.

10. Install the new, well greased O-rings into the reservoir end
cap.

Fill the reservoir to the retaining ring groove with the
recommended oil. You should see bubbles rising to oil
surface. Wait until bubbling slows or stops completely. If
oil level has fallen, add more oil until level is at retaining
ring groove. Insert IFP into reservoir. Use a smooth motion
and push straight in until O-ring seats into the retaining ring
groove. Use your free hand to wrap new piston band around
IFP with the rounded edge out, and push the IFP into the
reservoir. Shock oil will come up through the IFP bleed
hole.

FOX™ Shock Reassembly
1.

Clamp shaft eyelet securely in vise, and place seal bullet
tool on end of shaft.

Lubricate the bearing assembly seals with an ample amount
of assembly lube. Slide the bearing assembly onto shaft
with the scraper facing the eyelet (Fig. 11). This should be
done in a single smooth motion to avoid damaging the seals.
Figure 11

Polaris Gas Shock Oil - 5 wt.
PN 2870995 - qt.
PN 2872279 - 2.5 gal.
9.

Push the IFP into the reservoir until you have enough oil
on top of the IFP so that the bleed hole is under the surface
of the oil (Fig. 12).
Figure 12

Insert the shaft of a Phillips head screwdriver through the
center of the piston assembly. The pointed end of the
screwdriver should be on the same side as the top-out plate.
Cut and remove the tie wrap that was holding the piston
assembly together.

Hold the piston assembly from underneath the top-out plate
and place the end of the screwdriver onto the end of the
shock shaft. Slide the piston assembly onto the shaft end.
Check to make sure the piston assembly is properly seated,
then install the piston lock nut. Torque the nut to 18 ft. lbs.
(24 Nm) using a torque wrench and 9/16” socket. Remove
shaft assembly from vise and set it aside on a clean, lint free
paper towel.

Clamp the body cap of the shock securely in the vise, with
the open end of the body facing up.

Using the flat blade screwdriver, turn the compression
adjuster screw counter clockwise until it stops turning.

Lubricate the new IFP O-ring with an ample amount of
assembly lube.

10. Quickly install the IFP Bleed Screw before the oil level
drops and tighten it with the 1/8” Hex Tool (Fig. 13).
NOTE: The IFP will spin in the reservoir when the
screw bottoms. This is OK.
Figure 13

11. Using the IFP Depth Setting Tool, push the IFP into the
reservoir until it stops.

5.31

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
12. Fill shock body to the bottom of bearing threads with oil.
13. Using the IFP Depth Setting Tool, slowly pull the IFP up
to the mid point of the reservoir. Then push it down to the
bottom again (Fig. 14). Be careful not to pull the IFP out
completely. Also, be careful that the oil level in the shock
body does not disappear below the bottom of the body and
into the reservoir. If the oil does recede completely from the
body, you must remove the IFP and go back to step 7 of
reassembly.
Figure 14

14. As you push the IFP down, you should see bubbles rising
to the surface inside the body tube. Repeat this process
several times until you don’t see any new bubbles inside the
body tube.
15. Pull the IFP up until it’s top is approximately 1” from the
end of the reservoir and remove the IFP depth setting tool.
Again, be sure the oil level in the shock body does not drop
below the bottom of the body. If the oil does recede
completely from the body, you must remove the IFP and go
back to step 7 of reassembly. Add oil if necessary while
pulling up on the IFP.
16. Using the flat blade screwdriver, turn the Compression
Adjuster Screw clockwise until it stops turning.
17. Fill the body tube with oil approximately 1/4” below the
threads. Wrap the new piston band around the piston,
making sure the rounded edges face out. Insert the shaft
assembly into the body tube. Slowly push shaft into body
until piston assembly is approximately 1” below oil surface.
18. Stroke the shaft up and down slowly over about a 1” range
until no air bubble rise from the damping piston. Be careful
to keep the damping piston at least 1/4” below the surface
of the oil during this process.
19. Bring the damping piston up until it is approximately 1/4”
below the surface of the oil. Using the mallet, give 2 - 3
sharp blows to the eyelet, driving the damping piston down
into the shock body. This opens the valves on the damping
piston. You will see the released air bubbles come to the
surface of the oil.

5.32

20. Add oil to the body tube until the surface of the oil is to the
top of the threads inside the body tube.
21. Pull the damping piston up until it is just below the surface
of the oil. Add more oil if necessary.
22. Hold the shaft eyelet with one hand. With other hand, slide
the bearing assembly down the shaft until contact with the
body is made. Oil will overflow from around the bearing
(Figure 16).
Figure 16

23. Screw the bearing assembly into the body tube by hand,
holding the shaft up so that the bearing is in contact with
the bottom of the damping piston assembly. Be careful not
to cross-thread the bearing assembly. When the bearing will
no longer thread in by hand, turn the Compression Adjuster
Screw all the way counter clockwise using the flat blade
screwdriver.
24. Tighten the bearing assembly using the appropriate size
open end wrench.
25. Set IFP depth tool to specified length for the correct IFP
depth.

Shock IFP Depth:
Front: 2.40” (6.10 cm)
Rear: 3.40” (8.64 cm)
26. Insert IFP depth setting tool into reservoir and engage IFP.
Using a long 1/8” hex tool, remove the bleed screw from
the center of the IFP. TIP: Apply grease to the end of the
hex tool so that the bleed screw sticks to it. This will make
it easier to remove it from the IFP.
27. Push the IFP down to the correct depth setting. As you do
this, keep the open end of the IFP depth setting tool covered
with your hand. Oil will stream through the bleed hole in
the IFP as you push it further into the reservoir (Fig. 17).

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION
Figure 17

34. Continue charging with gas as you pull the reservoir away
from the FOX™ Nitrogen Safety Needle using a smooth,
straight motion. Keep the reservoir as straight as possible
to prevent the safety needle from bending. As the safety
needle is pulled free from the FOX™ air valve, a popping
sound should be heard.
Figure 19

28. Install IFP bleed screw and tighten using the 1/8” hex tool.
Remove the IFP depth setting tool. Pour the residual oil out
of the reservoir tube into a proper disposal container.
29. Install the reservoir end cap with the FOX™ air valve
facing the outside of the reservoir tube. Push down on the
reservoir end cap using even pressure, until the retaining
ring groove is exposed. Install the wire retaining ring, and
check to make sure retaining ring is seated properly.
30. Push the shaft assembly completely into the body tube
(Fig. 18). It should go all the way down smoothly and
without interference. If it does not, disassemble and
reassemble per this procedure. Do not attempt to pull the
shaft assembly back out by hand.
Figure 18

5
WARNING
CHARGE THE SHOCK USING NITROGEN GAS
ONLY. DO NOT FILL WITH ANY OTHER GASES.
Doing so compromises the performance of the shock
and may be EXTREMELY DANGEROUS!
35. Install the button-head screw into the FOX™ air valve,
using a 3/32” hex key.
36. Remove the shock from the vise.
37. Clean all oil residue from the shock and reservoir with
solvent, and dry with compressed air in a well ventilated
area. If compressed air is not available, dry the shock and
reservoir using clean, lint free paper towels and let sit in a
well ventilated area to allow the solvents to evaporate.
38. Reinstall the spring and the spring retainer.
39. Thread the spring preload ring down against the spring, and
set the preload to the measurement you took when you
removed the spring.

31. If reservoir cap is not properly seated against the retaining
clip, tap it gently with a rubber mallet until it snaps into
place. Remove shock assembly from vise.
32. Securely clamp FOX™ Nitrogen Safety Needle in the vise.
Be sure to point the air valve away from your face and body.
33. Insert the safety needle squarely into center of FOX™ air
valve, and pressurize the reservoir. Continue filling until
the shaft has fully extended and the reservoir pressure is at
200 psi (Fig. 19).

40. Using the flat blade screwdriver, turn the Compression
Adjuster Screw all the way clockwise until it stops. Now
turn it counter clockwise while counting the clicks until it
matches the original setting which you wrote down during
disassembly.
41. Remove the shock from the vise.
42. Reinstall spherical bearing O-rings and reducers or
polyurethane bushings and sleeves.
NOTE: After installation, be sure to RIDE SLOWLY
initially to ensure the shock and the vehicle’s
suspension is performing correctly.

5.33

BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION

NOTES

5.34

CLUTCHING

CHAPTER 6
CLUTCHING
SPECIAL TOOLS AND SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
PVT SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
GENERAL OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
DRIVE CLUTCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
DRIVEN CLUTCH OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
PVT BREAK-IN (DRIVE BELT / CLUTCHES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
MAINTENANCE / INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
OVERHEATING / DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4

PVT SYSTEM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
PVT COVERS AND DUCTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
PVT DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
PVT ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
CLUTCH OFFSET PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7

DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
BELT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
BELT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
BELT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
PVT BREAK-IN (DRIVE BELT / CLUTCHES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9

DRIVE CLUTCH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
SHIFT WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
NON-BRAKING EXPLODED VIEW (ALL MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
SPIDER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
ROLLER, PIN, AND THRUST WASHER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
BUTTON TO TOWER CLEARANCE INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
SHIFT WEIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
BEARING INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
CLUTCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
MOVEABLE SHEAVE BUSHING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
BUSHING SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18

DRIVEN CLUTCH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22

TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23

6.1

CLUTCHING
SPECIAL TOOLS AND SUPPLIES
TOOL DESCRIPTION

PART NUMBER

Drive Clutch Puller (Short)

PA-48595

Clutch Holding Wrench

9314177

Clutch Holding Fixture

2871358

Drive Clutch Spider Removal and
Installation Tool

2870341

Roller Pin Tool

2870910

Clutch Bushing Replacement
Tool Kit

2871226

Piston Pin Puller

2870386

Clutch Compression Tool

8700220

Clutch Bushing Replacement
Tool Kit

2871025

PVT SYSTEM OVERVIEW
General Operation
WARNING
All PVT maintenance or repairs should be performed by
a certified Polaris Master Service Dealer (MSD)
technician who has received the proper training and
understands the procedures outlined in this manual.
Because of the critical nature and precision balance
incorporated into the PVT components, it is
absolutely essential that no disassembly or repair
be made without factory authorized special tools
and service procedures.
The Polaris Variable Transmission (PVT) consists of three
major assemblies:
1) The Drive Clutch

SPECIAL SUPPLIES

PART NUMBER

Loctite™ 609

N/A

RTV Silicone Sealer

8560054

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
PVT System Fastener Torques

2) The Driven Clutch
3) The Drive Belt
The internal components of the drive clutch and driven clutch
control engagement (initial vehicle movement), clutch upshift
and backshift. During the development of the Polaris vehicle,
the PVT system is matched first to the engine power curve; then
to average riding conditions and the vehicle’s intended usage.
Therefore, modifications or variations of components at random
are never recommended. Proper clutch setup and careful
inspection of existing components must be the primary
objective when troubleshooting and tuning.

ITEM

TORQUE VALUE

Drive Clutch Retaining Bolt

40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Driven Clutch Retaining Bolt

17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm)

Drive Clutch Operation

PVT Inner Cover Bolts

12 ft. lbs. (16 Nm)

PVT Outer Cover Bolts

45-50 in. lbs (5-5.6 Nm)

Drive Clutch Spider

200 ft. lbs. (271 Nm)

Drive Clutch Cover Plate

90 in. lbs. (10 Nm)

Drive clutches primarily sense engine RPM. The two major
components which control its shifting function are the shift
weights and the coil spring. Whenever engine RPM is
increased, centrifugal force is created, causing the shift
weights to push against rollers on the moveable sheave, which
is held open by coil spring preload. When this force becomes
higher than the preload in the spring, the outer sheave moves
inward and contacts the drive belt. This motion pinches the
drive belt between the spinning sheaves and causes it to rotate,
which in turn rotates the driven clutch.
At lower RPM, the drive belt rotates low in the drive clutch
sheaves. As engine RPM increases, centrifugal force causes the
drive belt to be forced upward on drive clutch sheaves.

6.2

CLUTCHING
Driven Clutch Operation

Maintenance / Inspection

Driven clutches primarily sense torque, opening and closing
according to the forces applied to it from the drive belt and the
transmission input shaft. If the torque resistance at the transmission input shaft is greater than the load from the drive belt,
the drive belt is kept at the outer diameter of the driven clutch
sheaves.

Under normal use the PVT system will provide years of trouble
free operation. Periodic inspection and maintenance is required
to keep the system operating at peak performance. The
following list of items should be inspected and maintained to
ensure maximum performance and service life of PVT
components. Refer to the troubleshooting checklist at the end of
this chapter for more information.

As engine RPM and horsepower increase, the load from the
drive belt increases, resulting in the belt rotating up toward the
outer diameter of the drive clutch sheaves and downward into
the sheaves of the driven clutch. This action, which increases the
driven clutch speed, is called upshifting.
Should the throttle setting remain the same and the vehicle is
subjected to a heavier load, the drive belt rotates back up toward
the outer diameter of the driven clutch and downward into the
sheaves of the drive clutch. This action, which decreases the
driven clutch speed, is called backshifting.
In situations where loads vary (such as uphill and downhill) and
throttle settings are constant, the drive and driven clutches are
continually shifting to maintain optimum engine RPM. At full
throttle a perfectly matched PVT system should hold engine
RPM at the peak of the power curve. This RPM should be
maintained during clutch upshift and backshift. In this respect,
the PVT system is similar to a power governor. Rather than vary
throttle position, as a conventional governor does, the PVT
system changes engine load requirements by either upshifting or
backshifting.

PVT Break-In (Drive Belt / Clutches)

Belt Inspection.

Drive and Driven Clutch Buttons and Bushings, Drive
Clutch Shift Weights and Pins, Drive Clutch Spider
Rollers and Roller Pins, Drive and Driven Clutch
Springs.

Sheave Faces. Clean and inspect for wear.

PVT System Sealing. Refer to the appropriate
illustration(s) on the following pages. The PVT system is
air cooled by fins on the drive clutch stationary sheave. The
fins create a low pressure area in the crankcase casting,
drawing air into the system through an intake duct. The
opening for this intake duct is located at a high point on the
vehicle (location varies by model). The intake duct draws
fresh air through a vented cover. All connecting air ducts
(as well as the inner and outer covers) must be properly
sealed to ensure clean air is being used for cooling the PVT
system and also to prevent water and other contaminants
from entering the PVT area. This is especially critical on
units subjected to frequent water forging.

A proper break-in of the clutches and drive belt will ensure a
longer life and better performance. Break in the clutches and
drive belt by operating at slower speeds during the 10 hours as
recommended (see Chapter 3 “Engine Break-In Period” for
break-in example). Pull only light loads. Avoid aggressive
acceleration and high speed operation during the break-in
period.

6.3

CLUTCHING
Overheating / Diagnosis
During routine maintenance, or whenever PVT system overheating is evident, it’s important to check the inlet and outlet ducting
for obstructions. Obstructions to air flow through the ducts will significantly increase PVT system operating temperatures. The
vehicle should be operated in Low when plowing or pulling heavy loads, or if extended low speed operation is anticipated.
CLUTCH DRIVE BELT & COVER RELATED ISSUES: DIAGNOSIS
Possible Causes
Solutions / What to do
Loading the vehicle into a truck or tall
Shift transmission to Low during loading of the vehicle to prevent belt burning.
trailer when in high range.
Starting out going up a steep incline from When starting out on an incline, use Low gear. Shift transmission to Low
a stopped position.
during loading of the vehicle to prevent belt burning.
Driving at low RPM or low ground speed Drive at higher speed or use Low. The use of Low is highly recommended for
(at approximately 3-7 MPH).
cooler PVT operating temperatures and longer component life.
Warm engine at least 5 min., then with transmission in neutral, advance
Insufficient engine warm-up when
throttle to approx. 1/8 throttle in short bursts, 5 to 7 times. The belt will
exposed to low ambient temperatures.
become more flexible and prevent belt burning.
Slow and easy clutch engagement.
Fast, effective use of the throttle for efficient engagement.
Towing/Pushing at low RPM or low
Use Low only.
ground speed.
Plowing snow, dirt, etc./utility use.
Use Low only.
Shift the transmission to Low, carefully use fast, aggressive throttle
Stuck in mud or snow.
application to engage clutch. WARNING: Excessive throttle may cause loss
of control and vehicle overturn.
Shift the transmission to Low, carefully use fast, aggressive, brief throttle
Climbing over large objects from a
application to engage clutch. WARNING: Excessive throttle may cause loss
stopped position.
of control and vehicle overturn.
Shift the transmission to neutral. Using the throttle, vary the engine rpm from
Belt slippage from water or snow
idle to full throttle. Repeat several times as required. During this procedure,
ingestion into the PVT system.
the throttle should not be held at the full position for more than 10 seconds.
Clutch seals should be inspected for damage if repeated leaking occurs.
Clutch component inspection should be performed by a Polaris MSD certified
Clutch malfunction.
technician.
Fouled spark plugs, foreign material in fuel tank, restricted fuel lines, or faulty
Poor engine performance.
fuel pump may cause symptoms similar to clutching malfunction.
Low: Heavy pulling, basic operational speeds less than 7 MPH, riding
GENERAL RANGE OPERATION
through rough terrain (swamps, mountains, ect.), or low ground speeds.
GUIDELINES:
High: High ground speeds, or speeds above 7 MPH.

Operating in Low Gear
Low gear should be used when pulling heavy loads, riding through rough terrain, or when basic operational ground speeds are less
than 7 MPH. Use High gear when basic operational ground speeds are more than 7 MPH.
IMPORTANT: Using High gear for heavy loads, hilly terrain, or in wet, muddy conditions will increase the chance
of drive belt burning.

6.4

CLUTCHING
PVT SYSTEM SERVICE
PVT Covers and Ducting Components
Clutch
Inlet Duct

Push
Rivets

Clamps
Boot

Clutch
Outlet Duct

Boot
Cover
Screws

Clamp
Clamps

Bolt &
Washer

Inner
Clutch Cover
Retainer
Screws

Outer
Cover Seal

Outer
Clutch Cover

PVT Disassembly
Some fasteners and procedures will vary. Refer to the Electronic
Parts Catalog for proper fastener placement.

Remove the (2) fasteners from the rear seat base as shown
and remove it from the vehicle.

Remove the driver’s seat.

Loosen the hose clamp on the clutch outlet duct.

Remove the passenger seaT and rear service panel to gain
access to the outer clutch cover (see Chapter 5).

Remove the outer clutch cover screws and remove the
clutch cover.

Remove the (2) screws from the rear of the center console.

Mark the drive belt direction of rotation and remove drive
belt (see “DRIVE BELT - Belt Removal”).

Seat Base

Mark Rotation

6.5

CLUTCHING
8.

Remove the driven clutch retaining bolt and driven clutch.

PVT Assembly

Remove driven clutch offset spacers from the transmission
input shaft.

Inspect inner clutch cover. Replace if cracked or damaged.

Inspect the seal on the transmission input shaft. Replace if
damaged.

Apply RTV silicone sealant to the back side of the inner
clutch cover to ensure a water tight fit between the engine
and inner clutch cover. Both surfaces must be clean to
ensure adhesion of silicone sealant.

Install and properly align the inner clutch cover.

Install the bolts and washers that retain the cover to the
transmission. Torque bolts to specification (see next page).

Install the screws that retain the cover to the engine. Torque
screws to specification (see next page). Remove any excess
silicone sealant.

Install clutch offset washers on the transmission input shaft.

Keep Spacers In Order (Note Thickness)

Retaining
Bolt

10. Install the Drive Clutch Holder (PN 9314177) (A).
11. Remove drive clutch retaining bolt and remove drive clutch
using the Drive Clutch Puller (PA-48595) (B).
A

Drive Clutch Puller ( PA-48595)

Offset
Washers

Drive Clutch Holder (9314177)
12. Remove the (3) screws and (3) bolts that retain the inner
clutch cover to the engine and transmission.

Clean the splines inside the driven clutch and on the
transmission input shaft.

Apply a light film of grease to the splines on the shaft.

10. Install the driven clutch, washer, lock washer, and retaining
bolt. Torque to specification (see next page).

6.6

CLUTCHING
11. Clean end of taper on crankshaft and the taper bore inside
drive clutch.
12. Install drive clutch and torque retaining bolt to
specification.
13. Reinstall drive belt noting direction of belt rotation (see
“DRIVE BELT - Belt Installation”). If a new belt is
installed, install so numbers can be easily read.

Clutch Offset Procedure
If the vehicle exhibits drive clutch drag or hard shifting while at
idle speed, a clutch offset adjustment is required. Washers
located behind the driven clutch on the transmission input shaft
may need to be added or removed in order to obtain the proper
offset. Refer to the “Clutch Offset Procedure” provided below.
1.

Follow steps 1-6 of the “PVT Disassembly” procedure.

14. Replace the outer clutch cover rubber gasket with the
narrow side out.

CAUTION

15. Reinstall outer clutch cover and secure with screws. Torque
screws to specification.

Inner Cover Bolt Torque (Rear):
12 ft. lbs. (16.6 Nm)

Do not start the engine with the outer clutch cover
removed. Serious injury may result.
2.

Inspect the drive clutch belt to sheave clearance. If the belt
is contacting either sheave, remove the drive belt and driven
clutch.

Outer Cover Bolt Torque:
45-50 in. lbs. (5-5.6 Nm)
Driven Clutch Retaining Bolt Torque:
17 ft. lbs. (23.5 Nm)

Drive Clutch Retaining Bolt Torque:
40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)
16. Install the clutch cover outlet duct and tighten the clamps.

Incorrect
Offset

Add or remove offset washers behind the driven clutch
accordingly to avoid belt contact with either drive clutch
sheave.
Offset
Washers

17. Reinstall the rear seat base assembly and torque the
mounting bolts to 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm).

• .030" Offset Washer - PN 7556454
• .060" Offset Washer - PN 7556120

6.7

CLUTCHING
4.

Reinstall the driven clutch and drive belt. Torque the driven
clutch retaining bolt to 17 ft. lbs. (23.5 Nm). Be sure to
rotate the driven clutch counterclockwise several times to
ensure the belt is tight and riding at the proper height in the
clutch.
Proper
Height

Install the outer clutch cover and torque the cover screws
to 45-50 in. lbs. (5-5.6 Nm).

Install the clutch cover outlet duct and tighten the clamps.

10. Sit in the driver’s seat, apply the brake and start the engine.
Place the gear selector in high range and test the vehicle for
drive clutch drag or hard shifting while at idle speed. If
shifting remains difficult, refer to the note below.
NOTE: If the vehicle or drive clutch is new (less than
0.2 hours), remain in the driver's seat with the gear
selector in high range. Allow the engine to idle for
five minutes to break in the drive clutch hub bearing.

CAUTION
17 ft. lbs.
(23.5 Nm)

Inspect the belt to sheave clearance again. If the belt rests
evenly between the drive clutch stationary and moveable
sheaves, the offset is correct and the vehicle can be
reassembled (see Step 7). If the belt is still contacting either
sheave, remove the drive belt and driven clutch. Add or
remove offset washers behind the driven clutch
accordingly.

Correct
Offset

• .030" Offset Washer - PN 7556454
• .060" Offset Washer - PN 7556120
6.

Inspect the outer clutch cover gasket. Replace if damaged.

6.8

Do not leave the vehicle unattended.
11. Reinstall the rear seat base assembly and torque the
mounting bolts to 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm).
12. Reinstall the rear service panel and seats.

CLUTCHING
DRIVE BELT

Belt Inspection

Belt Removal

Inspect belt for hour glassing (extreme circular wear in at
least one spot and on both sides of the belt). Hour glassing
occurs when the drive train does not move and the drive
clutch engages the belt.

Inspect belt for loose cords, missing cogs, cracks,
abrasions, thin spots, or excessive wear. Compare belt
measurements with a new drive belt. Replace if necessary.

Belts with thin spots, burn marks, etc., should be replaced
to eliminate noise, vibration, or erratic PVT operation. See
the Troubleshooting Chart at the end of this chapter for
possible causes.

Remove outer clutch cover as described in the “PVT
Disassembly” section.

Mark the drive belt direction of rotation so that it can be
installed in the same direction.

NOTE: Belt is normally positioned so that the part
number can be easily read.
3.

To remove drive belt, place the transmission in “Park” and
push down on the belt firmly to open the clutch sheaves.

Belt Installation
NOTE: Be sure to position belt in the same position
as when removed or so part number is easily read.
1.

Loop belt over the drive clutch and over top of the driven
sheave.

6
4.

Then lift upward on the belt while pulling it out and down
over the driven clutch outer sheave.

While pushing down on top of belt, turn the back, or
moveable driven sheave, clockwise.

The belt then should be able to be pushed down into and
between the sheaves.

Continue rotating the driven clutch and belt clockwise until
the belt is fully installed.

PVT Break-In (Drive Belt / Clutches)
A proper break-in of the clutches and drive belt will ensure a
longer life and better performance. Break in the clutches and
drive belt by operating at slower speeds during the 10 hour
break-in period as recommended (see Chapter 3 “Engine
Break-In Period” for break-in example). Pull only light loads.
Avoid aggressive acceleration and high speed operation during
the break-in period.

6.9

CLUTCHING
DRIVE CLUTCH SERVICE
Spring Specifications
The drive clutch spring has two primary functions:
1.

To control clutch engagement RPM. The springs,
which have a higher rate when the clutch is in
neutral, will increase clutch engagement RPM.

To control the rate at which the drive belt moves
upward in the drive clutch sheaves. This is referred
to as drive clutch upshift.

Red/White
7043349
Red/Blue
7043372

There are other components which control upshift, but the
spring is one of the primary components in insuring
optimum performance. It is very important that the spring
is of the correct design and is in good condition.

Red/Green
7043382

CAUTION
Never shim a drive clutch spring to increase its
compression rate. This may result in complete
stacking of the coils and subsequent clutch
cover failure.

Blue/Red
7043199
Black
7043594

The drive clutch spring is one of the most critical components of the PVT
system. It is also one of the easiest to service. Due to the severe relaxation the
spring is subject to during operation, it should always be inspected for
tolerance limits during any clutch operation diagnosis or repair.
With the spring resting on a flat surface, measure its free length from the outer
coil surfaces as shown. Refer to the spring specification chart for specific free
length measurements and tolerances. Also check to see that spring coils are
parallel to one another. Distortion of the spring indicates stress fatigue,
requiring replacement.

Primary Clutch Springs

6.10

PART NUMBER

COLOR CODE

WIRE DIAMETER

FREE LENGTH ± .125”

7041021
7041022
7041063
7041132
7041157
7041168
7043199
7043349
7043372
7043382

Plain
Black
Purple
White
Blue / Green
Green
Blue / Red
Red / White
Red / Blue
Red / Green

.157"
.140"
.168"
.177"
.177"
.177"
.177"
.200"
.187"
.177"

4.38"
4.25"
4.37"
2.92"
2.53"
3.05"
2.53"
2.58"
2.56"
2.63"

CLUTCHING
Primary Clutch Springs
7043594

Black

.177"

2.80"

Shift Weights
Shown below are the shift weights which have been designed for the PVT system. These shift weights have many factors designed
into them for controlling engagement RPM and shifting patterns. Shift weights should not be changed or altered without first having
a thorough understanding of their positioning and the effects they may have on belt to sheave clearance, clutch balance and shifting
pattern.

6
Non-Braking Exploded View (All Models)
Bushing
Spring

Lock
Washer

Cover
Bearing

Bolt

Spider
Bearing
Non-Braking
Bearing

Spacer

Button
Roller

Button

Flat
Cover Washer
Screws

Washers

Nut

Washers

Bolt

Shift
Weight

6.11

CLUTCHING
Clutch Disassembly
1.

Using a permanent marker, mark the cover, spider, and
moveable and stationary sheaves for reference, as the cast
in X's may not have been in alignment before disassembly.

Inspect Shaft

6.
2.

Mark the stationary sheave and clutch shaft to verify the
shaft has not turned in the sheave after tightening the spider
during clutch assembly.

Remove cover bolts evenly in a cross pattern and remove
cover plate.

Inspect cover bushing (A). The outer cover bushing is
manufactured with a Teflon coating. Wear is determined
by the amount of Teflon remaining on the bushing.

Inspect area on shaft where bushing rides for wear, galling,
nicks, or scratches. Replace clutch assembly if worn or
damaged.

Remove and inspect the clutch spring. See “Drive Clutch
Spring Specifications” for spring inspection.

Spider Removal
1.

Install clutch in holding fixture (PN 2871358) and loosen
the spider (counterclockwise) using Clutch Spider
Removal Tool (PN 2870341).

Spider Removal Tool may
differ from what is shown

Clutch Holding Fixture:
(PN 2871358)
Cover Bushing Inspection:
Replace the cover bushing if more
brass than Teflon is visible on
the bushing. Refer to bushing
replacement in this chapter.

6.12

Spider Removal Tool:
(PN 2870341)

CLUTCHING
NOTE: It is important that the same number and
thickness of washers are reinstalled beneath the
spider during assembly. Be sure to note the number
and thickness of these washers.

Roller, Pin, and Thrust Washer Inspection
1.

Inspect all rollers, bushings and roller pins by pulling a flat
metal rod across the roller. Turn roller with your finger. If
you notice resistance, galling, or flat spots, replace rollers,
pins and thrust washers in sets of three. Also inspect to see
if roller and bushing are separating. Bushing must fit
tightly in roller. Use the Roller Pin Tool (PN 2870910) to
replace rollers and pins. Take care not to damage roller
bushing or bearing surface of the new pin during
installation.

Rubber backed buttons can be used in all RANGER clutches
if the hollow roller pin is changed to the solid roller pin.

To maintain proper clutch balance and
belt-to-sheave clearance, be sure to
reinstall original quantity and thickness
washers

Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection
2.

Inspect the Teflon™ coating on the moveable sheave
bushing.

NOTE: The rubber side of the button is positioned
toward the solid roller pin.
TeflonTM

Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection:
Replace the cover bushing if more brass
than Teflon is visible on the bushing.
Refer to bushing replacement
in this chapter.

6.13

CLUTCHING
Button To Tower Clearance Inspection
1.

Inspect for any clearance between spider button to tower.
If clearance exists, replace all buttons and inspect surface
of towers. See “Spider Removal” procedure.

Remove shift weight bolts and weights. Inspect the contact
surface of the weight. The surface should be smooth and
free of dents or gall marks. Inspect the weight pivot bore
and pivot bolts for wear or galling. If weights or bolts are
worn or broken, replace in sets of three with new bolts.

NOTE: A damaged shift weight is usually caused by
a damaged or stuck roller in the spider assembly.
See “Roller, Pin and Thrust Washer Inspection”.

Bearing Inspection

Button to Tower Clearance:
000-.001”
2.

Inspect sheave surfaces. Replace the entire clutch if worn,
damaged or cracked.

Shift Weight Inspection
WARNING
The clutch assembly is a precisely balanced
unit. Never replace parts with used parts from
another clutch assembly!
1.

If clutch is not disassembled, inspect as shown, using a
clutch holding tool to compress the moveable sheave. The
contact surface of the weight should be smooth and free of
dents or gall marks.

6.14

Rotate the clutch bearing in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. The non-braking bearing should
rotate in both directions on the shaft with only a slight
amount of drag.

Verify there is no binding or rough spots. If problems are
noted continue with disassembly.

CLUTCHING
Clutch Inspection

NOTE: Remove cover, spring, and spider following
instructions for drive clutch removal, then proceed
as follows:
1.

Remove the moveable sheave spacer sleeve (1) and the
thrust washer (2). Visually inspect the washer for damage.

Measure the thickness and compare to specification.
Replace if worn or damaged.

Inspect surface of shaft for pitting, grooves, or damage.
Measure the outside diameter and compare to
specifications. Replace the drive clutch assembly if shaft is
worn or damaged.

= In. / mm.

Thickness of spacer may
differ from what is shown

Shaft Diameter:
Standard: 1.3745” - 1.375” (34.91 - 34.93 mm)
Service Limit: 1.3730” (34.87 mm)

= In. / mm.

Thrust Washer Thickness
Standard: .030” (.76 mm)
Service Limit: .025” (.64 mm)

Visually inspect PTFE thrust washer for damage. Measure
the thickness and compare to specification. Replace if worn
or damaged.

= In. / mm.

Remove the moveable clutch sheave.

Lift bearing (3) and thrust washer (4) off shaft. Replace as
an assembly if worn, damaged, or if problems were noted.

PTFE Washer Thickness
Standard: .030” (.76 mm)
Service Limit: .025” (.64 mm)

4
Size of bearing may
differ from what is shown

6.15

CLUTCHING
Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection

Bushing Service

Inspect the Teflon coating (arrow) on the moveable sheave
bushing. Inspect both sheaves for signs of wear, grooving or
cracking. De-glaze sheave surfaces with a 3M Scotch-Brite
Pad if needed.

IMPORTANT: Special Tools Required

EBS Clutch Bushing Tool Kit - 2201379
Item
A, B
C
D

Qty.
1
1
1

Part #
5132027
5132501
5132029

Part Description
EBS Puller Tool
EBS Puller Nut
EBS Main Adapter
EBS Bushing Removal Tool

E
--

Instructions

9915111

5132028

Additional Special Tools
Qty.
1
1

Part Description
Clutch Bushing Replacement Tool Kit
Piston Pin Puller

Part #
2871226
2870386

*Clutch Bushing Replacement Tool Kit (PN 2871226)

Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection:
Replace the cover bushing if more brass
than Teflon is visible on the bushing.
Refer to bushing replacement
in this chapter.

#10

#8
Item

Qty.

#8
#9

1
1

#10

Part Description
P-90 Drive/Driven Clutch
Bushing Install Tool
Drive Clutch Cover
Bushing Removal/
Installation Tool (all
clutches)
P-90 Driven Clutch Cover
Bushing Removal Tool
Main Puller Adapter
Adapter Reducer
Number Two Puller
Adapter

Part #
5020628

5020629

5020631
5020632
5010279
5020633

NOTE: Bushings are installed at the factory using
Loctite 609. In order to remove bushings it will be
necessary to apply heat evenly to the area around
each bushing. Clean all residual Loctite from
bushing bore prior to installing new bushing.

6.16

CLUTCHING
NOTE: Use Bushing Tool PA-47336.

CAUTION

Install nut (C) onto end of puller rod and hand tighten. Turn
puller barrel to increase tension on sheave if needed. Using
a hand held propane torch, apply heat around outside of
bushing until tiny smoke tailings appear.

Turn sheave counterclockwise on puller rod until it comes
free. Lift sheave off puller.

Clutch components will be hot! In order to avoid
serious burns, wear insulated gloves during the
removal process.
Moveable Sheave - Bushing Removal
1.

Remove clutch as outlined previously in this chapter.

10. Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.

Install handle end of the Piston Pin Puller (PN 2870386)
securely into bench vise and lightly grease puller threads.

11. Pull bushing removal tool and adapter from puller rod.
Remove bushing from tool and discard.

Piston Pin Puller (PN 2870386)

Drive Clutch Bushing Installation
1.

Place main adapter (Item 8) on puller.
Puller Tool (A,B)
Side “A” toward
sheave

Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.

Nut (C)

Piston Pin Puller
(PN 2870386)

6
Main Puller Adaptor (#8)
(PN 5020632)

Bushing
Main Adapter
(8)

Install puller adapter (Item 10 from kit PN 2871226).

Install main adapter (Item D) onto puller.
Puller Tool (A,B)
Side “A” toward
sheave

Main
Adapter (D)
6.

Piston Pin
Puller

Apply Loctite 609 evenly to bushing bore inside
moveable sheave.

Set bushing in place on sheave.

Insert installation puller tool (Item A/B) with “A” side
down, into center of bushing.
NOTE: 800 EFI Clutch - Use Bushing Tool PA-47336.

With towers pointing upward, slide sheave, bushing and
tool onto puller rod.

Puller
Adapter (10)

Install nut on puller rod and hand tighten. Turn barrel to
apply additional tension if needed.

Piston Pin
Puller

Turn sheave counterclockwise, making sure bushing is
drawn straight into bore. Continue until bushing is seated.

Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.

Remove sheave from puller.

Nut (C)

With towers pointing toward the vise, slide sheave onto
puller rod.
Install removal tool (Item A, B) into center of sheave with
“A side" toward sheave.

10. Remove installation tool.

6.17

CLUTCHING
Cover Bushing Removal

Clutch Assembly

NOTE: It is important that the same number and
thickness of washers are reinstalled beneath the
spider during assembly. The Teflon bushings are
self-lubricating.

Install main adapter (Item 8) on puller.
Removal Tool
(3)

Nut (C)

CAUTION
Do not apply oil or grease to the bushings.

Adapter Reducer
(9)
Main
Adapter (8)

Reassemble the drive clutch in the following sequence. Be sure
the “X”, or the marks that were made earlier are aligned during
each phase of assembly.

Piston Pin
Puller

Install adapter reducer (Item 9).

From outside of clutch cover, insert removal tool (Item 3)
into cover bushing.

With inside of cover toward vise, slide cover onto puller.

Install nut onto puller rod and hand tighten. Turn puller
barrel to increase tension as needed.

Turn clutch cover counterclockwise on puller rod until
bushing is removed and cover comes free.

Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.

Remove bushing and bushing removal tool from puller.
Discard bushing.

Install moveable sheave onto fixed sheave.

Install spider spacers. Use same quantity and thickness as
were removed.

Cover Bushing Installation
1.

Apply Loctite 609 evenly to bushing bore in cover.

Working from inside of cover, insert new bushing and
bushing installation tool into center of clutch cover.

With main adapter on puller, insert cover onto puller rod,
placing outside of cover toward vise.

Install nut on rod and hand tighten. Turn puller barrel to
apply more tension if needed.

Turn clutch cover counterclockwise on puller rod until
bushing is seated.

Remove nut from puller rod. Take installation tool and
clutch cover off rod.

6.18

Spacer washers
3.

Compress spider buttons for each tower and install spider,
making sure that “X”, or the marks that were made earlier,
on spider aligns with “X”, or the marks that were made
earlier, in moveable sheave.

CLUTCHING
4.

Torque spider to specification using the holding fixture and
spider tool. Torque with smooth motion to avoid damage
to the stationary sheave.

=T
Spider Torque:
200 ft. lbs. (271 Nm)

CAUTION
Be sure the spider spacer washers are fully
seated in the recessed area in the spider.
Any misalignment will alter clutch balance.
Inverting the clutch while initially tightening the
spider will help position the washers.
5.

Install shift weights using new lock nuts on the bolts.

Nut on trailing side

Rotation

Reinstall clutch spring.

Reinstall cover, aligning “X” mark with other marks.

Torque cover bolts evenly to specification.

=T
Cover Screw Torque:
90 in. lbs. (10.4 Nm)

6.19

CLUTCHING
DRIVEN CLUTCH SERVICE
Exploded View

Compression Spring

Spacer
Outer
Spring Retainer

Stationary
Secondary Sheave
Inner
Spring Retainer

Retaining
Ring

Moveable
Secondary Sheave

Clutch Disassembly / Inspection
CAUTION
Wear eye protection when removing snap ring to
prevent serious personal injury.
Use caution when removing, the snap ring
pressure is loaded by the compression spring.
1.

Remove driven clutch from the transmission input shaft.

Mark the position of the clutch sheaves before disassembly
or use the X’s on the sheaves for reference. This aids in
reassembly and maintains clutch balance after reassembly.

Place the clutch into the Clutch Compression Tool PN
8700220. Using Compression Extensions PN PS-45909,
apply and hold downward pressure on the outer spring
retainer. Carefully remove the snap ring. Remember the
outer spring retainer contains strong spring pressure.
Remove Snap Ring

Outer Spring Retainer
NOTE: Spring is compression only and has no
torsional wind.

6.20

CLUTCHING
4.

With the snap ring (A) removed and spring pressure
relieved, remove the outer spring retainer (B), compression
spring (C), spacer (D), and inner spring retainer (E).

Remove the inner spring retainer from the inner sheave.
Inspect for wear and replace as needed.

B
A

E
C
B

Inspect for Abnormal Wear

Check the rollers in the stationary sheave for wear. If rollers
are worn, a new driven clutch assembly may be needed.

6
5.

Separate the two clutch sheaves.

Check Rollers for Wear
9.

Inspect the bearings inside the moveable sheave.
Inspect Bearings for Wear

Inspect the helix on the moveable sheave.
Inspect for Abnormal Wear

Moveable Sheave Bearing Inspection:
Replace the clutch assembly if more brass
than Teflon™ is visible on the bearing.

6.21

CLUTCHING
10. Inspect the Teflon™ coating on the moveable sheave
bearings.
11. Inspect driven clutch sheave faces for wear or damage.
12. Clean and inspect splines on helix and transmission input
shaft.
13. Lube splines with a light film of grease. Do not lubricate
the bearings!

Clutch Assembly
1.

Assemble Sheaves

Install the inner spring retainer if removed. Do not apply
oil or grease to the bearings.
3.

Install the spring into the inner retainer.

Install the spacer over the shaft.

Install the outer retainer on top of the spring.

Place the clutch into Clutch Compression Tool PN
8700220. Using Compression Extensions PN PS-45909,
apply and hold downward pressure on the outer spring
retainer. Carefully install the snap ring.

Compress the outer retainer and install the snap ring.

Align the “X” marks on each of the sheaves during
reassembly.

Snap Ring

6.22

CLUTCHING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Situation
Engine RPM below
specified operating
range, although
engine is properly
tuned.

Probable Cause
-Wrong or broken drive clutch spring.

Remedy
-Replace with recommended spring.

-Drive clutch shift weight too heavy.

-Install correct shift weight kit to match engine
application.

-Driven clutch spring broken or installed in wrong -Replace spring; refer to proper installation location.
helix location.
-Drive clutch binding.
A. Disassemble drive clutch; inspect shift weights for
wear and free operation.
B. Clean and polish stationary shaft hub; reassemble
clutch without spring to determine problem area.

Erratic engine
operating RPM
-Belt worn unevenly - thin / burnt spots.
during acceleration or
load variations.
-Driven clutch malfunction.

Replace belt.
A. Replace ramp buttons.
B. Inspect movable sheave for excessive bushing
clearance.

-Replace the clutch.
-Sheave face grooved.
-Incorrect drive clutch spring (too high spring rate). -Install correct recommended spring.

-Drive clutch shift weights incorrect for application -Install correct recommended shift weights.
(too light).
-Drive clutch binding.

-Disassemble and clean clutch, inspecting shift weights
and rollers. Reassemble without the spring and move
sheaves through entire range to further determine
probable cause.

-Driven clutch binding.

-Disassemble, clean, and inspect driven clutch, noting
worn sheave bushing and ramp buttons and helix spring
location.

-Converter sheaves greasy; belt slipage.

-Clean sheaves with denatured alcohol or brake cleaner,
install new belt.
-Replace belt.

Engine RPM above
specified operating
range.

-Drive belt worn too narrow.
Harsh drive clutch
engagement.

-Excessive belt / sheave clearance with new belt. -Perform belt / sheave clearance adjustment with shim
washers beneath spider.
Drive belt turns over -Wrong belt for application.
-Replace with correct belt.
-Abuse (continued throttle application when
-Caution operator to operate machine within guidelines.
vehicle is stationary, excess load)
Belt burnt, thin spots -Dragging brake

-Slow, easy clutch engagement

-Inspect brake system.
-Fast, effective use of throttle for efficient engagement.

6.23

CLUTCHING
Troubleshooting, Continued.....
Situation

Probable Cause
-Plugged air intake or outlet.

Remedy
-Clear obstruction

-Belt slippage due to water, oil, grease, etc., rubbing -Inspect system. Clean , repair or replace as necessary.
Seal PVT system ducts.
on cover.
PVT cover
-Clutches or weight being applied to cover while in -Remove weight. Inform operator.
overheating (melting)
operation.
-High vs. low range.

-Cover seals or ducts leaking
Water ingestion

Belt slippage

PVT noise

Engagement
erratic or stabby

-Operator error

-Belt worn out

-Instruct operator on guidelines for operation in wet
terrain as outlined in Owner’s Safety and Maintenance
Manual.
-Replace belt.

-Water ingestion

-Inspect and seal PVT system.

-Belt contaminated with oil or grease
-Belt worn or separated, thin spots, loose belt

-Inspect and clean.
-Replace belt.

-Broken or worn clutch components, cover hitting -Inspect and repair as necessary.
clutches
-Thin spots on belt, worn belt
-Replace belt. Refer to belt burnt troubleshooting and
instruct operator.
-Drive clutch bushings stick

6.24

-Instruct operator on guidelines for operation in proper
driving range for different terrain as outlined in Owner’s
Safety and Maintenance Manual.
-Find leak and repair as necessary.

-Inspect and repair clutches.

FINAL DRIVE

CHAPTER 7
FINAL DRIVE
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
FRONT BEARING CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
BEARING CARRIER INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
BEARING CARRIER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
DRIVE SHAFT / CV JOINT HANDLING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
OUTER CV JOINT / BOOT REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
INNER PLUNGING JOINT / BOOT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9

PROPSHAFT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11

PROPSHAFT U-JOINT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12

FRONT GEARCASE / CENTRALIZED HILLIARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
CENTRALIZED HILLIARD EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
AWD DIAGNOSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
GEARCASE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
GEARCASE DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
GEARCASE ASSEMBLY / INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
GEARCASE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22

REAR BEARING CARRIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
BEARING CARRIER INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24
BEARING CARRIER BUSHING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25
BEARING CARRIER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25

REAR DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
OUTER CV JOINT / BOOT REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28
INNER PLUNGING JOINT / BOOT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.30
DRIVE SHAFT EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33
DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.33

REAR GEARCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35
GENERAL OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.35
GEARCASE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.36
GEARCASE DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.37
DIFFERENTIAL DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.41
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.42
GEARCASE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.43
GEARCASE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.45
GEARCASE EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.46

WHEEL HUBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47
FRONT HUB EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47
REAR HUB EXPLODED VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.47

7.1

FINAL DRIVE
SPECIAL TOOLS

FRONT BEARING CARRIER

PART NUMBER

TOOL DESCRIPTION

2872608

Roll Pin Removal Tool

8700226

CV Boot Clamp Pliers
(earless type)

PU-48951

Axle Boot Clamp Tool

Bearing Carrier Inspection / Removal
1.

Elevate front of vehicle and safely support machine under
the frame area.

CAUTION
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls.
Be sure machine is secure before beginning this
service procedure. Wear eye protection when
removing bearings and seals.

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel and Hub Torque Table
ITEM

NUT TYPE

SPECIFICATION

Aluminum Wheels
(Cast)

Lug Nut
(1)

30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)

Flange Nut
(2)

35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)

Front Hub
Castle Nut

80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm)

Rear Hub
Castle Nut

80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm)

Steel Wheels

Aluminum Wheel

Steel Wheel

(LE Models)
30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)

(Standard Models)
35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)

Check bearings for side play by grasping the top and bottom
of the tire firmly and checking for movement. The tire
should rotate smoothly without binding or rough spots.

Remove the (4) wheel nuts and remove the front wheel.

Remove the cotter pin and loosen the front wheel hub castle
nut. Remove the nut, and (2) cone washers from the front
wheel hub assembly.
Castle Nut
Cone
Washers

Cotter Pin
5.

7.2

Remove the fastener retaining the steering tie rod end to the
front bearing carrier.

FINAL DRIVE
6.

Remove the two front brake caliper mounting bolts and
remove the caliper from the brake disc (see Chapter 9).
CAUTION: Do not hang the caliper by the brake line. Use
wire to hang caliper to prevent damage to the brake line.

Remove the front wheel hub assembly.

Remove the upper and lower ball joint pinch bolts.

Bearing Replacement
Bearing Removal
1.

Remove the outer snap ring.
Snap Ring

Pinch
Bolts

From the back side of the bearing carrier, tap on the outer
bearing race with a drift punch in the reliefs as shown.

Using a soft faced hammer, lightly tap on the bearing carrier
while removing the upper and lower ball joint ends.

10. Remove the bearing carrier from the front drive shaft.

11. Rotate bearing by hand and check for smooth rotation.
Visually inspect bearing for moisture, dirt, or corrosion.

Drive bearing out evenly by tapping on outer race only.
Once bearing is at bottom of casting, support casting on
outer edges so bearing can be removed.

Inspect the bearing carrier housing for scratches, wear or
damage. Replace front bearing carrier if damaged.

NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and
minimal wear, the bearings must be inspected
visually, and by feel. While rotating bearings by
hand, inspect for rough spots, discoloration, or
corrosion. The bearings should turn smoothly and
quietly, with no detectable up and down movement
and minimal movement sideways between inner and
outer race.
12. Replace bearing if moisture, dirt, corrosion, or roughness
is evident.

7.3

FINAL DRIVE
Bearing Installation

Thoroughly clean the front bearing carrier housing and the
outer race on the new bearing. Be sure that all oil residue
has been removed from each surface.

Support the bottom of the bearing carrier housing.

Install pinch bolts and torque to specification.

22.5 ft. lbs.
30.5 (Nm)

CAUTION
Use an arbor and press only on the outer race,
otherwise bearing damage may occur.
7.

Apply Loctite® 603™ retaining compound to the outer
circumference of the new bearing race and carefully press
the new bearing into the bearing carrier housing.
Apply
Loctite® 603™

=T
Pinch Bolts:
22.5 ft. lbs. (30.5 Nm)

Snap Ring
4.

Apply grease to drive shaft axle splines.

Install front wheel hub assembly, cone washers, and hand
tighten the castle nut. Install washers with domed side out.

Cone Washers

Bearing

Wheel
Hub

NOTE: Use care to not allow any of the Loctite®
compound to get in the bearing.
8.

Wipe the housing clean of any excess compound and install
the snap ring.

Bearing Carrier Installation
1.

Install drive shaft axle through the backside of the bearing
carrier.

Install the upper and lower ball joint ends into the front
bearing carrier.

Out
6.

Install brake caliper mounting bolts and torque to
specification.

=T
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts:
31-34 ft. lbs. (42-46 Nm)

CAUTION
New bolts have a pre-applied locking agent
which is destroyed upon removal. Always use
new brake caliper mounting bolts
upon assembly.
7.

7.4

Install the steering tie rod end onto the front bearing carrier.

FINAL DRIVE
NOTE: Refer to the photos below to ensure proper
placement of the tie rod end.

10. Install wheel and (4) wheel nuts. Torque wheel nuts to
specification.

=T
42.5 ft. lbs.
58 (Nm)

Wheel Nuts:
Steel Wheels: 35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)
Aluminum Wheels: 30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)
11. Rotate wheel and check for smooth operation. Bend both
ends of cotter pin around end of spindle in different
directions.
Tie Rod End

Torque the tie rod end fastener to specification and install
a new cotter pin.

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Drive Shaft Removal
1.

Elevate front of vehicle and safely support machine under
the frame area.

CAUTION

Tie Rod End Fastener:
42.5 ft. lbs. (58 Nm)
9.

Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls.
Be sure machine is secure before beginning this
service procedure. Wear eye protection when
removing bearings and seals.

Torque wheel hub nut to specification and install a new
cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly if necessary to align cotter
pin holes.
80 ft. lbs.
(108 Nm)

Remove the (4) wheel nuts and remove the front wheel.

Remove the cotter pin and loosen the front wheel hub castle
nut. Remove the nut, and (2) cone washers from the front
wheel hub assembly.
Castle Nut
Cone
Washers

NEW Cotter Pin

=T
Wheel Hub Castle Nut:
80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm)

Cotter Pin
4.

7.5

FINAL DRIVE
5.

Remove the front wheel hub assembly.

Drive Shaft / CV Joint Handling Tips

Remove the upper ball joint pinch bolt.

Care should be exercised during drive shaft removal or when
servicing CV joints. Drive shaft components are precision parts.

Pinch
Bolt

Cleanliness and following these instructions is very important to
ensure proper shaft function and a normal service life.
• The complete drive shaft and joint should be handled by
getting hold of the interconnecting shaft to avoid
disassembly or potential damage to the drive shaft
joints.
• Over-angling of joints beyond their capacity could
result in boot or joint damage.
• Make sure surface-ground areas and splines of shaft are
protected during handling to avoid damage.

Using a soft faced hammer, lightly tap on the bearing carrier
while removing the upper ball joint end.

Remove the drive shaft from the front bearing carrier.

• Do not allow boots to come into contact with sharp
edges or hot engine and exhaust components.
• The drive shaft is not to be used as a lever arm to
position other suspension components.
• Never use a hammer or sharp tools to remove or to
install boot clamps.
• Be sure joints are thoroughly clean and that the proper
amount and type of grease is used to refill when joint
boots are replaced and when joints are cleaned. Refer to
text for grease capacity of CV joints and CV joint
boots.

Outer CV Joint / Boot Replacement

With a short, sharp jerk, remove drive shaft from the front
gearcase.

NOTE: Refer the “Electronic Parts Catalog” for the
required parts to service the drive shaft. Some drive
shafts have “Boot Replacement Kits” that include a
new boot, clamps, and the required amount of
grease.
1.

Remove clamps from rubber boot using the proper boot
clamp pliers.

CV Boot Clamp Pliers:
Earless Type - 8700226
2.

Remove the large end of the boot from the CV joint and
slide the boot back.

Use a soft-faced hammer or brass drift to separate the outer
CV joint from the drive shaft.

NOTE: If using a brass drift, be sure to tap on the
inner race of the joint only.

7.6

FINAL DRIVE
4.

Make sure the circlip remains on the shaft and not left in
the joint. Discard the circlip as it will be replaced.
Circlip

11. Slide the joint onto the drive shaft splines and align the
circlip with the lead-in chamfer on the inner race.
12. Use a soft-faced hammer to tap the CV joint into the splines
of the axle. Pull on the joint to ensure it’s securely installed.
13. Add the remaining grease through large end of boot.
14. Pull the boot over the joint and position the boot lips into
the grooves on the joint housing and shaft. Make sure the
boot is not dimpled or collapsed.

Pull shaft to remove
from CV joint
5.

Remove the small clamp and boot from the drive shaft.

IMPORTANT: If the grease in the joint is obviously
contaminated with water and/or dirt, the joint should
be replaced.
6.

Thoroughly clean the joint with an appropriate solvent and
dry the joint to prevent any residual solvent from being left
in the joint upon reassembly.

Visually inspect the joint by tilting the inner race to one side
to expose each ball. Severe pitting, galling, play between
the ball and its cage window, any cracking or damage to the
cage, pitting or galling or chips in raceways call for joint
replacement.

Apply a light coat of grease to the end of the drive shaft and
slide the new clamp and boot (small end first) over the shaft
and position the boot in its groove machined in the shaft.

Install a NEW circlip on the end of the shaft.

10. Grease the joint with the special CV joint grease provided
in the boot replacement kit. Fill the cavity behind the balls
and the splined hole in the joint’s inner race. Pack the ball
tracks and outer face flush with grease. Place any remaining
grease into the boot. Install small boot clamp.
NOTE: It is very important to use the correct type
and quantity of grease by using the grease
contained in the boot kit. DO NOT use a substitute
grease and DO NOT overfill or under fill the CV joint.

15. Install and secure the CV boot with the large clamp using
the “earless” clamp pliers.

CV Boot Clamp Pliers
Earless Type: 8700226
16. While pulling out on the CV shaft, slide a straight O-ring
pick or a small slotted screw driver between the small end
of the boot and the shaft. This will allow the air pressure to
equalize in the CV boot in the position that the joint will
spend most of its life. Before you remove your instrument,
be sure the small end of the boot is in its correct location
on the shaft.

17. Install and secure the small clamp on the boot using the
“earless” clamp pliers.

CV Boot Clamp Pliers
Earless Type: 8700226

Boot Replacement Grease Requirement:
Grease Service Kits
PN 1350059 (20g) / PN 1350046 (30g) / PN 1350047 (50g)

Outer CV Joint Capacity: 80g

7.7

FINAL DRIVE
Inner Plunging Joint / Boot Replacement
1.

Remove the front drive shaft from the vehicle (see
“FRONT DRIVE SHAFT - Removal”).

Remove and discard the boot clamps.

CV Boot Clamp Pliers
Earless Type: 8700226

12. Grease the joint with the special joint grease provided in the
boot replacement kit. Fill the cavity behind the balls and the
splined hole in the joint’s inner race. Pack the ball tracks
and outer face flush with grease. Place any remaining
grease into the boot.

CAUTION

Remove the large end of the boot from the plunging joint
and slide the boot back.

The grease provided in the replacement kit is
specially formulated for wear resistance and
durability. DO NOT use substitutes
or mix with other lubricants.

Use a soft-faced hammer or brass drift to separate the
plunging joint from the drive shaft.

NOTE: The amount of grease that’s provided is premeasured, so use all the grease.

NOTE: If using a brass drift, be sure to tap on the
inner race of the joint only.
5.

Make sure the circlip remains on the shaft and not left in
the joint. Discard the circlip.
Remove the boot from the drive shaft.

CAUTION
Complete disassembly of the plunging joint is
NOT recommended. The internal components
are a precision fit and develop their own
characteristic wear patterns. Intermixing the
internal components could result in looseness,
binding, and/or premature failure of the joint.

Boot Replacement Grease Requirement:
Grease Service Kits
PN 1350059 (20g) / PN 1350046 (30g) / PN 1350047 (50g)

Inner Plunging Joint Capacity: 80g
13. Fully compress the joint and push the drive shaft firmly into
the inner race.
14. Align the circlip with the lead-in chamfer.
15. Use a soft-faced hammer to tap the joint onto the drive shaft
until it locks into place.
16. Pull on the joint to make sure it is securely locked into place.

IMPORTANT: If the grease in the joint is obviously
contaminated with water and/or dirt, the joint should
be replaced.

17. Remove excess grease from the plunging joint’s external
surfaces and place the excess grease in the boot.

Thoroughly clean the joint with an appropriate solvent and
dry the joint to prevent any residual solvent from being left
in the joint upon reassembly.

18. Pull the boot over the joint and position the boot lips into
the grooves on the joint housing and shaft. Make sure the
boot is not dimpled or collapsed.

19. Install and secure the small clamp on the boot using the
“earless” clamp pliers.

Clean the splines on the end of the shaft and apply a light
coat of grease prior to reassembly.

10. Slide the small boot clamp and boot (small end first) onto
the drive shaft and position the boot in it’s groove machined
in the shaft.
11. Install a NEW circlip on the end of the shaft.

7.8

CV Boot Clamp Pliers
Earless Type: 8700226
20. Pull out on the drive shaft to center the joint in the housing.
Slide a straight O-ring pick or a small slotted screw driver
between the large end of the boot and the joint housing and
lift up to equalize the air pressure in the boot.

FINAL DRIVE
21. Position the boot lip in its groove. Install and secure the
boot with the large clamp using the “earless” clamp pliers.

Drive Shaft Installation
1.

CV Boot Clamp Pliers
Earless Type: 8700226

Install new spring ring on drive shaft. Apply an anti-seize
compound to splines.
NEW
Spring Ring

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

Plunging
Joint

Apply
Anti-Seize
2.

Align splines of drive shaft with front gearcase and reinstall
the drive shaft. Use a rubber mallet to tap on the outboard
end of the drive shaft if necessary

Grease Capacity
80 Grams

Grease Capacity
80 Grams
3.

Install drive shaft into the front bearing carrier.

Install the upper ball joint end into the front bearing carrier.

CV Joint

7.9

FINAL DRIVE
5.

Install the upper pinch bolt and torque to specification.

=T
22.5 ft. lbs.
30.5 (Nm)

Wheel Hub Castle Nut:
80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm)
9.

Install brake caliper mounting bolts and torque to
specification.

=T
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts:
31-34 ft. lbs. (42-46 Nm)

=T
Pinch Bolts:
22.5 ft. lbs. (30.5 Nm)
6.

Apply grease to drive shaft axle splines.

Install front wheel hub assembly, cone washers, and hand
tighten the castle nut. Install washers with domed side out.

Cone Washers

Out
Torque wheel hub nut to specification and install a new
cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly if necessary to align cotter
pin holes.
80 ft. lbs.
(108 Nm)

NEW Cotter Pin

7.10

New bolts have a pre-applied locking agent
which is destroyed upon removal. Always use
new brake caliper mounting bolts
upon assembly.
10. Install wheel and (4) wheel nuts. Torque wheel nuts to
specification.

=T
Wheel Nuts:
Steel Wheels: 35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)
Aluminum Wheels: 30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)

Wheel
Hub

CAUTION

11. Rotate wheel and check for smooth operation. Bend both
ends of cotter pin around end of spindle in different
directions.

FINAL DRIVE
PROPSHAFT SERVICE

Remove the fasteners retaining the plastic skid plate and
remove the skid plate from the vehicle.

Removal / Installation
1.

Locate the propshaft roll pin and use the Roll Pin Removal
Tool (PN 2872608) to remove the roll pin.

NOTE: Front wheel can be removed to gain better
access to the propshaft roll pin.

Cupped
Washers
Screws
7.

Remove the propshaft from the vehicle.

Reverse removal steps to reinstall propshaft. Use a NEW
Roll Pin (Spring Pin) upon reassembly.

Roll Pin Removal Tool (PN 2872608)
2.

Remove the gear selector cap and remove the retaining
screw.

Remove the Torx screws retaining the center console to
access the propshaft.
Cap
Torx Screws

Screw

Torx Screws

Slide prop shaft back far enough to remove it from the front
gearcase input shaft.

Pull sharply forward to remove it from transmission shaft.

NOTE: You may have to loosen the front gearcase
mounting bolts to allow for propshaft removal.

7.11

FINAL DRIVE
PROPSHAFT U-JOINT SERVICE

Support U-joint in vise as shown and drive inner yoke down
to remove remaining bearing caps.

Force U-joint cross to one side and lift out of inner yoke.

Disassembly
1.

Remove internal or external snap ring from bearing caps.

CAUTION
Always wear eye protection.

NOTE: If yoke or bearing is removed, cross bearing
must be replaced. Note orientation of grease fitting
and mark inner and outer yoke for correct repositioning during installation.
2.

Support inner yoke as shown and drive outer yoke down
(bearing cap out) with a soft face hammer.

Assembly

7.12

Install new bearing caps in yoke by hand. Carefully install
U-joint cross with grease fitting properly positioned
inward toward center of shaft. Take care not to dislodge
needle bearings upon installation of cross joint.

Tighten vise to force bearing caps in.

FINAL DRIVE
3.

Using a suitable arbor, fully seat the bearing cap in one side.
Continually check for free movement of bearing cross as
bearing caps are assembled.

Install snap ring to contain bearing cap just installed.
Repeat procedure for other side.

Install outer yoke, aligning marks made at disassembly and
repeat Steps 1-3 to install bearing caps on outer yoke.

Seat all bearing caps against snap rings by supporting cross
shaft and tapping on each corner as shown.

When installation is complete, yokes must pivot freely in
all directions without binding. If the joint is stiff or binding,
tap the yoke lightly to center the joint until it pivots freely.

7.13

FINAL DRIVE
FRONT GEARCASE / CENTRALIZED HILLIARD

7-11 ft. lbs.
(10-15 Nm)

8-10 ft. lbs.
(11-14 Nm)

Centralized Hilliard Exploded View

7.14

FINAL DRIVE
All Wheel Drive Operation
The AWD switch may be turned on or off while the vehicle is
moving, however, AWD will not enable until the engine RPM
drops below 3100. Once the AWD is enabled, it remains enabled
until the switch is turned off.
Engage the AWD switch before getting into conditions where
the front wheel drive may be needed. If the rear wheels are
spinning, release the throttle before switching to AWD.

CAUTION

AWD Engagement: When the AWD switch is activated, the
AWD coil is powered by a 12 Vdc input which creates a
magnetic field. This magnetic field attracts an armature plate
that is keyed to the roll cage. When the ring gear and roll cage
are spinning (vehicle is moving), the energized coil and
armature plate will apply drag to the roll cage that indexes the
rollers inside the ring gear to an engagement position. While in
the engagement position, the front drive will be in an “overrunning” condition (not engaged), until the rear wheels lose
traction. Once the rear wheels begin to lose traction, the front
drive will engage by coupling the output hubs to the ring gear via
the rollers. The front drive will remain engaged until the torque
requirement goes away (i.e. rear wheels regain traction).

Switching to AWD while the rear wheels are
spinning may cause severe drive shaft and
gearcase damage. Always switch to AWD while
the rear wheels have traction or are at rest.
With the AWD switch off, the vehicle drives through the rear
wheels only (2 wheel drive). When the AWD is enabled, the
front drive acts as an on-demand AWD system. This means, the
front drive will engage once the rear wheels have lost traction,
and will remain engaged until the torque requirement goes away
(i.e. rear wheels regain traction).

Ring
Gear

Output Hubs
Rollers

CAUTION
If the rear wheels are spinning, release the
throttle before turning the AWD switch on.
If AWD is engaged while the wheels are
spinning, severe drive shaft and front
gearcase damage could result.

Roll Cage
& H-Springs

AWD Disengagement: Once the rear wheels regain traction,
the front wheels will return to the “over-running” condition. The
vehicle is now back to rear wheel drive until the next loss of rear
wheel traction occurs.
Torsion Spring Operation: The torsion spring acts as a return
mechanism to help disengage the coupling of the output hubs
and ring gear by creating an “over-running” condition for the
rollers upon disengagement.

Centers Roll Cage and
Rollers in Ring Gear

Output
Hubs
Ring
Gear
Roll Cage
& Rollers

Torsion
Spring

7.15

FINAL DRIVE
AWD Diagnosis

Symptom: AWD Will Not Engage
1.

Check the gearcase coil resistance. To test the coil
resistance, measure between the Grey and Brown/White
wires. The measurement should be within specification.

Check to make sure the coil is seated in the U-shaped insert
that is pressed into the gearcase cover. The top of the coil
should be seated below the U-shaped insert. The U-shaped
insert controls the pole gap. If the top of the coil is above
the surface of the U-shaped insert it raises the armature
plate, thereby increasing pole gap. If the pole gap increases
the coil will not be strong enough to engage the AWD
system. If this is found, replace the cover plate assembly.
Gearcase Cover Plate Asm.

Coil

Side cutaway
view of cover

Front Gearcase Coil Resistance:

Inspect the rollers for nicks and scratches. The rollers must
slide up, down, in and out freely within the roll cage sliding
surfaces and H-springs.

Inspect the roll cage assembly for cracks or excessive wear.
If damaged, replace the roll cage assembly.

21.6 - 26.4 Ohms
2.

Turn the ignition and AWD switches on and place gear
selector in High or Low gear. Check for minimum battery
voltage at the Gray and Brown/White chassis wires that
power the coil. A minimum of 11 Vdc should be present.

If electrical tests are within specification, remove gearcase
(see “Gearcase Removal”) and inspect components.

Inspect the armature plate for a consistent wear pattern.
There should be two distinct wear bands (one band inside
the other). If only one band of wear is present (or if there
is wear between the two bands), inspect the coil area as
indicated in Step 5. A wear band with an interrupted wear
mark may indicate a warped plate, which may cause
intermittent operation. See the following illustrations:
Check for
wear bands

Armature Plate

7.16

U-shaped insert

Roll Cage Assembly
Rollers

FINAL DRIVE
Gearcase Removal

Stop engine and place gear selector in Park.

Refer to “FRONT DRIVE SHAFT - Drive Shaft Removal”
and remove both front drive shafts from the front gearcase.

Remove the propshaft (see “PROPSHAFT SERVICE”).

Disconnect the wire harness above the front gearcase and
remove the harness from the retaining dart.

Remove the gearcase from the front LH wheel well area and
slide it between the upper and lower A-arm.

AWD Harness

Gearcase Disassembly / Inspection

Remove the vent line from the front gearcase.

Remove the (4) bolts securing the front gearcase to frame.

Drain and properly dispose of gearcase fluid. Remove any
metal particles from the drain plug magnet.

Remove the (7) cover screws and remove the cover plate.

Remove
Vent Line
Disconnect
Harness

Remove and inspect the armature plate. Refer to “AWD
Diagnosis” for detailed inspection process.

Remove 4 Bolts

7.17

FINAL DRIVE
4.

Remove the LH output hub assembly from the clutch
housing.

Remove the RH output hub assembly from the gearcase
housing.

Carefully remove the armature plate, torsion spring retainer
and torsion spring from the ring gear.

Remove pinion seal. The pinion seal must be replaced every
time it is removed. Take out the internal snap ring. Remove
pinion / bearing assembly from the gearcase housing by
pulling and rocking the pinion shaft strait out. Inspect and
clean the gearcase housing and replace ALL oil seals.
Replace
Seals

Armature plate

Internal Snap Ring

Spring and
Retainer

Remove the clutch housing / ring gear from the gearcase
housing.

7.18

Clean and inspect all parts. Check for excessive wear or
damage.

FINAL DRIVE
10. Inspect the coil located in the cover plate assembly. Refer
to “AWD Diagnosis” for detailed inspection process.
Replace the cover plate seal and O-ring.

13. Thoroughly clean all parts and inspect the rollers (A) for
nicks and scratches. The rollers must slide up and down and
in and out freely within the roll cage sliding surfaces and
H-springs.

Inspect
Coil

Replace
O-Ring & Seal

11. Disassemble the pinion shaft assembly. Inspect the
bearings and replace if needed. Replace the pinion cover
seal and O-ring.
Replace
Seals

IMPORTANT: Refer to the “Electronic Parts Catalog”
for individual part availability. Most parts are to be
replaced as an assembly or as a complete kit.
14. Inspect the roll cage assembly (B) sliding surfaces and Hsprings. The sliding surfaces must be clean and free of
nicks, burrs or scratches. If damaged, replace the roll cage
assembly.
H-Spring

7
Inspect bearing

12. Remove the roll cage assembly and rollers from the clutch
housing. Use a shop towel to cover the housing in order to
retain all the rollers.
NOTE: Rollers are spring loaded. Take care not to
allow them to fall out or lose them upon removal of
the roll cage.

15. Inspect clutch housing ring gear (C) for a consistent wear
pattern. Inspect the ring gear for chipped, broken, or
missing teeth.

7.19

FINAL DRIVE
16. Inspect both output hub assemblies. Inspect the bearings
and replace if needed.

NOTE: Install the roll cage so that the ring gear
grooves line up with the roll cage slots (see below).

Thrust
Bearing
Bearing

Align during
installation

Spacer

Roller
Surface

Gearcase Assembly / Inspection
1.

As mentioned during gearcase disassembly section,
replace all O-rings, seals, and worn components.

If bearing replacement was required, press new bearings on
to the pinion shaft assembly and install snap ring.

IMPORTANT: To ensure gearcase is assembled
properly, assemble the gearcase components
starting with the cover plate and build upward.
6.

Install pinion shaft assembly and install the internal snap
ring.

Press the pinion shaft seal into the pinion cover, until the
seal is just below chamfer of gearcase.

NOTE: Be sure the square O-ring is placed flat on
the cover surface. If the O-ring is twisted fluid
leakage may occur.
7.

Press Seal in Just
Past Chamfer

Carefully install the rollers into the roll cage assembly
while installing the assembly into the clutch housing.

7.20

Install a new O-ring on the cover plate assembly.

Carefully install the LH output hub assembly with the thrust
bearing into the cover plate. Take care not to damage the
new cover plate seal while installing the output hub.

LH Hub

Install the armature plate and assemble the clutch housing:

FINAL DRIVE
9.

Install the torsion spring by wrapping each leg of the spring
around the dowel pin on the ring gear.

12. Be sure the armature plate tabs are fully engaged into the
roll cage assembly and are resting on the cut-grooves of the
ring gear.

Engage
Tabs

10. Align the spring retainer dowel pin with the ring gear dowel
pin and install the retainer on top of the torsion spring.

NOTE: Verify armature plate tabs are in the slots on
the roll cage and are resting in the ring gear grooves.
13. While holding the clutch housing and the armature plate in
the roll cage, flip the clutch housing assembly over and set
it on the cover plate.

Align during
installation

7
11. Check the action of the torsion spring by rotating in both
directions to ensure the spring and retainer are installed
properly.

Armature Plate
& Torsion Spring

NOTE: Be sure to hold armature plate in place until
the housing is completely resting on the cover plate.
14. Install the RH output hub into the clutch housing assembly.
15. Line up the gearcase housing with the cover plate assembly.
Set the gearcase housing on top of the assembled cover
plate. Take care not to damage the new seal when installing
the gearcase housing.

7.21

FINAL DRIVE
NOTE: Rotate the input shaft while setting the
gearcase housing in place.

16. While holding the gearcase together, flip it over and install
the cover plate screws. Torque screws to 7-11 ft. lbs. (1015 Nm).

Gearcase Installation
1.

Install the gearcase back into the vehicle through the LH
wheel well area, between the upper and lower A-arms.

Install the propshaft onto the front gearcase input shaft. Use
a NEW spring pin in the front propshaft.

Install the (4) bolts that secure the front gearcase to the
frame and torque to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm).

Install the vent line.
Install
Vent Line
Connect
Harness

Torque All Cover
Plate Screws

=T
Cover Plate Screws:
7-11 ft. lbs. (10-15 Nm)

30 ft. lbs.
(41 Nm)

=T
Front Gearcase Mounting Bolts:
30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm)

7.22

FINAL DRIVE
5.

REAR BEARING CARRIER

Connect the AWD wire harness.

Bearing Carrier Inspection / Removal
AWD Harness

Elevate rear of vehicle and safely support machine under
the frame area.

CAUTION
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls.
Be sure machine is secure before beginning this
service procedure. Wear eye protection when
removing bearings and seals.

Refer to “FRONT DRIVE SHAFT - Drive Shaft
Installation” and install both front drive shafts into the front
gearcase.
Add the proper lubricant to the front gearcase. Refer to
Chapter 2 for fluid fill and change information.

Check bearings for side play by grasping the top and bottom
of the tire firmly and checking for movement. The tire
should rotate smoothly without binding or rough spots.

Remove the (4) wheel nuts and remove the rear wheel.

Remove the cotter pin and loosen the rear wheel hub castle
nut. Remove the nut, and (2) cone washers from the rear
wheel hub assembly.

Polaris Demand Drive Plus
(PN 2877922)
Front Housing Capacity
6.75 fl. oz. (200 ml)

Castle Nut

Cone
Washers
5.

7
Cotter Pin

Remove the two brake caliper mounting bolts.
CAUTION: Do not hang the caliper by the brake line. Use
wire to hang caliper to prevent damage to the brake line.

Remove

7.23

FINAL DRIVE
6.

Remove the rear wheel hub assembly.

NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and
minimal wear, the bearings must be inspected
visually, and by feel. While rotating bearings by
hand, inspect for rough spots, discoloration, or
corrosion. The bearings should turn smoothly and
quietly, with no detectable up and down movement
and minimal movement sideways between inner and
outer race.
10. Replace bearing if moisture, dirt, corrosion, or roughness
is evident.

Bearing Replacement
Bearing Removal
7.

Remove the bolts that attach the rear bearing carrier to the
upper and lower A-arms.

Remove outer snap ring.
Snap Ring

Remove the bearing carrier from the rear drive shaft.

Rotate bearing by hand and check for smooth rotation.
Visually inspect bearing for moisture, dirt, or corrosion.

7.24

From the back side of the bearing carrier, tap on the outer
bearing race with a drift punch in the reliefs as shown.

Drive bearing out evenly by tapping on outer race only.
Once bearing is at bottom of casting, support casting on
outer edges so bearing can be removed.

Inspect the bearing carrier housing for scratches, wear or
damage. Replace rear bearing carrier if damaged.

FINAL DRIVE
Bearing Installation

Bearing Carrier Installation

Thoroughly clean the rear bearing carrier housing and the
outer race on the new bearing. Be sure that all oil residue
has been removed from each surface.

Install drive shaft axle through the backside of the bearing
carrier. Be sure bushings and pivot tubes are installed.

Support the bottom of the bearing carrier housing.

Install the fasteners that attach the rear bearing carrier to the
upper and lower A-arms. Torque bolts to specification.

CAUTION
Use an arbor and press only on the outer race,
otherwise bearing damage may occur.
7.

Apply Loctite® 603™ retaining compound to the outer
circumference of the new bearing race and carefully press
the new bearing into the bearing carrier housing.
Apply
Loctite® 603™

Snap Ring

Bearing

NOTE: Use care to not allow any of the Loctite®
compound to get in the bearing.
8.

Wipe the housing clean of any excess compound and install
the snap ring.

Bearing Carrier Bushing Replacement

Check bearing carrier bushings and pivot tubes for excessive
wear or damage. If replacement is required, slide pivot tubes out
and remove bushings with a drift punch. Install new bushings by
pressing them into the bearing carrier.

Upper Rear Bearing Carrier Bolts:
40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Pivot Tube

Lower Rear Bearing Carrier Bolts:
40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

Control Arm
Bushing
3.

Apply grease to drive shaft axle splines.

Pivot
Bushing

Pivot Tube

Control Arm
Bushing

7.25

FINAL DRIVE
4.

Install rear wheel hub assembly, cone washers, and hand
tighten the castle nut. Install washers with domed side out.

Cone Washers

Torque wheel hub nut to 80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm) and install a
NEW cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly if necessary to align
cotter pin holes.

Wheel
Hub
80 ft. lbs.
(108 Nm)

Out
5.

Install brake caliper mounting bolts and torque to 18 ft. lbs.
(24 Nm).
NEW Cotter Pin

=T
18 ft. lbs.
24 (Nm)

Wheel Hub Castle Nut:
80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm)
7.

Install wheel and (4) wheel nuts. Torque wheel nuts to
specification.

=T
Wheel Nuts:
Steel Wheels: 35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)
Aluminum Wheels: 30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)

=T
Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts:
18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm)

CAUTION
New bolts have a pre-applied locking agent
which is destroyed upon removal. Always use
new brake caliper mounting bolts
upon assembly.

7.26

Rotate wheel and check for smooth operation. Bend both
ends of cotter pin around end of spindle in different
directions.

FINAL DRIVE
REAR DRIVE SHAFT

Remove the rear wheel hub assembly.

Remove the bolt that attaches the rear bearing carrier to the
upper A-arm.

Drive Shaft Removal
1.

Elevate rear of vehicle and safely support machine under
the frame area.

CAUTION
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls.
Be sure machine is secure before beginning this
service procedure. Wear eye protection when
removing bearings and seals.
2.

Remove the (4) wheel nuts and remove the rear wheel.

Remove the cotter pin and loosen the rear wheel hub castle
nut. Remove the nut, and (2) cone washers from the rear
wheel hub assembly.

Castle Nut

Cone
Washers
4.

Cotter Pin

Remove the two brake caliper attaching bolts.
CAUTION: Do not hang the caliper by the brake line. Use
wire to hang caliper to prevent damage to the brake line.

Slide the rear drive shaft out of the bearing carrier by
pulling the bearing carrier assembly outward and tipping it
down to remove the shaft.

Grasp the rear drive shaft and pull sharply outward on the
shaft to disengage it from the rear gearcase.

Remove

7.27

FINAL DRIVE
NOTE: Take care
damaging the seal.

when

removing

prevent

Place the drive shaft in a soft-jawed vise. Using a soft-faced
hammer, or brass drift, strike the inner race of the joint to
drive the joint off the drive shaft. Be sure to tap evenly
around the joint to avoid binding.
Brass Drift Shown

Inspect the axle splines and CV boots for any damage.

Outer CV Joint / Boot Replacement
1.

IMPORTANT: Tap on inner race only!
5. Make sure the circlip is on the shaft and not left in the joint.

Using a side cutters, cut away and discard the boot clamps.

Circlip

6.
2.

Remove the large end of the boot from the CV joint and
slide the boot down the shaft.

Remove the CV boot from the shaft.

CAUTION
Complete disassembly of the CV joint is NOT
recommended. The internal components are a
precision fit and develop their own characteristic
wear patterns. Intermixing the internal
components could result in looseness, binding,
and/or premature failure of the joint.

Clean the grease from the face of the joint.

7.28

FINAL DRIVE
IMPORTANT: If the grease in the joint is obviously
contaminated with water and/or dirt, the joint should
be replaced.

NOTE: The amount of grease that’s provided is premeasured, so use all the grease.

Boot Replacement Grease Requirement:
Grease Only Service Kits
PN 1350059 (20g) / PN 1350046 (30g) / PN 1350047 (50g)

Outer CV Joint Capacity: 90g
13. Slide the joint onto the drive shaft splines and align the
circlip with the lead-in chamfer on the inner race of the
joint.

Thoroughly clean the joint with an appropriate solvent and
dry the joint to prevent any residual solvent from being left
in the joint upon reassembly.

NOTE: Shiny areas in ball tracks and on the cage
spheres are normal. Do not replace CV joints
because parts have polished surfaces. Replace CV
joint only if components are cracked, broken, worn
or otherwise unserviceable.
9.

Clean the splines on the end of the shaft and apply a light
coat of grease prior to reassembly.

10. Slide the small boot clamp and boot (small end first) onto
the drive shaft and position the boot in it’s groove machined
in the shaft.
11. Install a NEW circlip on the end of the shaft.

14. Use a soft-faced hammer to tap the joint onto the drive shaft
until it locks into place.
15. Pull on the joint to make sure it is securely locked in place.
16. Remove excess grease from the CV joint's external surfaces
and place the excess grease in the boot.
17. Pull the boot over the joint and position the boot lips into
the grooves on the joint housing and shaft. Make sure the
boot is not dimpled or collapsed.

12. Grease the joint with the special CV joint grease provided
in the boot replacement kit. Fill the cavity behind the balls
and the splined hole in the joint’s inner race. Pack the ball
tracks and outer face flush with grease. Place any remaining
grease into the boot.

CAUTION
The grease provided in the replacement kit is
specially formulated for wear resistance and
durability. DO NOT use substitutes
or mix with other lubricants.

7.29

FINAL DRIVE
18. Install and tighten the large clamp using the Axle Boot
Clamp Tool (PU-48951).

20. Install and tighten the small clamp on the boot using the
Axle Boot Clamp Tool (PU-48951).

Axle Boot Clamp Tool
PU-48951

19. While pulling out on the CV shaft, slide a straight O-ring
pick or a small slotted screw driver between the small end
of the boot and the shaft. This will allow the air pressure to
equalize in the CV boot in the position that the joint will
spend most of its life. Before you remove your
instrument, be sure the small end of the boot is in its correct
location on the shaft.

7.30

Inner Plunging Joint / Boot Replacement
1.

Using a side cutters, cut away and discard the boot clamps.

FINAL DRIVE
2.

Remove the large end of the boot from the plunging joint
and slide the boot down the shaft.

Remove the boot from the shaft.

Clean the grease from the face of the joint.

Place the drive shaft in a soft-jawed vise.

Using a soft-faced hammer, or brass drift, strike the inner
race of the joint to drive the joint off the drive shaft. Be sure
to tap evenly around the joint to avoid binding.
Brass Drift Shown

Thoroughly clean the joint with an appropriate solvent and
dry the joint to prevent any residual solvent from being left
in the joint upon reassembly.

Visually inspect the joint for damage. Replace if needed.

10. Clean the splines on the end of the shaft and apply a light
coat of grease prior to reassembly.
IMPORTANT: Tap on inner race only!
6.

Make sure the circlip is still on the shaft and not left in the
joint.
Circlip

11. Slide the small boot clamp and boot (small end first) onto
the drive shaft and position the boot in its groove machined
in the shaft.
12. Install a NEW circlip on the end of the shaft.
13. Grease the joint with the special joint grease provided in the
boot replacement kit. Fill the cavity behind the balls and the
splined hole in the joint’s inner race. Pack the ball tracks
and outer face flush with grease. Place any remaining
grease into the boot.

CAUTION
The grease provided in the replacement kit is
specially formulated for wear resistance and
durability. DO NOT use substitutes
or mix with other lubricants.

7.31

FINAL DRIVE
NOTE: The amount of grease that’s provided is premeasured, so use all the grease.

20. Install and tighten the small clamp using the Axle Boot
Clamp Tool (PU-48951).

Boot Replacement Grease Requirement:
Grease Only Service Kits
PN 1350059 (20g) / PN 1350046 (30g) / PN 1350047 (50g)

Inner Plunging Joint Capacity: 90g
14. Fully compress the joint and push the drive shaft firmly into
the inner race.
15. Align the circlip with the lead-in chamfer.

Axle Boot Clamp Tool
PU-48951
21. Pull out on the drive shaft to center the joint in the housing.
Slide a straight O-ring pick or a small slotted screw driver
between the large end of the boot and the joint housing and
lift up to equalize the air pressure in the boot.
22. Position the boot lip in its groove. Install and tighten the
large clamp using the Axle Boot Clamp Tool (PU-48951).

16. Use a soft-faced hammer to tap the joint onto the drive shaft
until you reach the end of the splines and the joint locks in
place.
17. Pull on the joint to test that the circlip is seated and that the
joint is securely fastened to the shaft.
18. Remove excess grease from the plunging joint’s external
surfaces and place the excess grease in the boot.
19. Pull the boot over the joint and position the boot lips into
the grooves on the joint housing and shaft. Make sure the
boot is not dimpled or collapsed.

Axle Boot Clamp Tool
PU-48951

7.32

FINAL DRIVE
Drive Shaft Exploded View

Drive Shaft Installation
1.

REAR SHAFT

Install new spring ring on drive shaft. Apply anti-seize
compound to splines.
NEW
Spring Ring

Spring Ring

Plunging
Joint
Spring Ring

Apply
Anti-Seize

Large Clamp
Grease Pack
Gear Side
Boot Kit

Small Clamp

Align splines of drive shaft with rear gearcase and reinstall
the drive shaft. Use a rubber mallet to tap on the outboard
end of the drive shaft if necessary.

NOTE: Take care when installing the drive shaft to
prevent damaging the seal.

Wheel Side
Boot Kit

Grease Pack
Large Clamp
Spring Ring
CV Joint

Slide the rear drive shaft into the rear bearing carrier.

7.33

FINAL DRIVE
4.

Lift bearing carrier into place and install the bolt attaching
the bearing carrier to the upper A-arm. Torque fastener to
specification.

=T
Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts:
18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm)

CAUTION
New bolts have a pre-applied locking agent
which is destroyed upon removal. Always use
new brake caliper mounting bolts
upon assembly.
8.

Torque wheel hub nut to 80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm) and install a
NEW cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly if necessary to align
cotter pin holes.

=T
Upper Rear Bearing Carrier Bolt:
40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)
80 ft. lbs.
(108 Nm)

Apply grease to drive shaft axle splines.

Install rear wheel hub assembly, cone washers, and hand
tighten the castle nut. Install washers with domed side out.

Cone Washers

NEW Cotter Pin

Wheel
Hub

=T
Out

Wheel Hub Castle Nut:
80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm)

Install brake caliper mounting bolts and torque to 18 ft. lbs.
(24 Nm).

Install wheel and (4) wheel nuts. Torque wheel nuts to
specification.

18 ft. lbs.
24 (Nm)

7.34

Wheel Nuts:
Steel Wheels: 35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)
Aluminum Wheels: 30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)

FINAL DRIVE
REAR GEARCASE
General Operation

Shift Yoke

Clutch Gear

The rear gearcase has three traction operational modes: AWD,
Differential Lock, and Differential Unlock. Locking the rear
differential is beneficial in low traction and rough terrain
conditions. Unlocking the rear differential makes maneuvering
easier and minimizes damage to turf and sensitive terrains.

AWD

Differential - Lock

Differential - Unlock

When “Differential-Unlock” is selected on the switch, the rear
differential becomes unlocked for tighter turns. An electrical
solenoid mounted in the rear gearcase housing actuates the shift
yoke. The solenoid plunger extends out to move the shift yoke
and slides the clutch gear away from the engagement dogs that
are attached to the differential gear assembly. This unlocks the
rear differential.
When switch position is set
to “Unlock”, the solenoid is
powered and the
plunger extends
to disengage the
clutch gear and
unlock the
differential.

Differential - Unlock
When “Differential-Lock” is selected on the switch, power is
removed from the electrical solenoid allowing the solenoid
plunger to retract. Spring tension moves the shift yoke back into
place and engages the clutch gear into the engagement dogs that
are attached to the differential gear assembly, locking the rear
differential as a solid rear axle.
When switch position is set
to “Lock”, power is removed
from the solenoid and spring
tension retracts the
plunger to engage
the clutch gear
and lock the
differential.

Shift Yoke
Clutch Gear

Differential - Lock

7.35

FINAL DRIVE
When the clutch gear is unlocked the rear drive shafts are
dependent on the differential allowing tighter turns. When it’s
locked it becomes a solid rear axle increasing traction.

Gearcase Removal
1.

Drain the fluid from the rear gearcase and remove the rear
drive shafts from each side of the rear gearcase.

See “REAR DRIVE SHAFT” on page 7.28
2.

Remove the exhaust pipe and exhaust silencer to allow for
gearcase removal.
Silencer

Remove

Differential

Clutch Gear

Remove
Locked Mode
3.
Clutch Gear

Remove the (4) bolts retaining the rear rack cab frame to
the rear suspension plate. Remove the upper A-arm bolts,
lower rear A-arm bolts, and plate.

Locked
Axle Shaft

Axle Shaft

Remove

Remove
Suspension
Plate
Remove

Unlocked Mode

IRS Axle

Clutch Gear
Unlocked

Axle Shaft

7.36

Axle Shaft

Remove the (2) rear gearcase mount bracket fasteners and
mount bolt and remove bracket from vehicle.

FINAL DRIVE
5.

Disconnect the differential solenoid 2-wire harness.

Gearcase Disassembly

Remove the fasteners and bracket that secure the rear
gearcase to the transmission.

IMPORTANT: The pinion gear assembly is NOT
intended to be disassembled from the case, as it
requires special OEM tooling in order to properly
reassemble. If there is any damage to the pinion gear,
bearings or case, the entire gearcase assembly must
be replaced. Pinion and ring gear shimming
information is NOT provided in this Service Manual
due to OEM manufacturing requirements.
1.

Remove the remaining cover bolts from the rear gearcase.

Remove the cover and O-ring seal from the gearcase.

Note the number or
thickness of shims for
reassembly purposes.

Remove the (4) fasteners and remove the rear mount from
the rear gearcase.

7
O-Ring

Pull the rear gearcase towards the rear of the vehicle to
disengage it from the transmission.

NOTE: If the splined coupler doesn’t slide off the
input shaft on the rear gearcase, use a screwdriver
to hold back the coupler while pulling the rear
gearcase back further to disengage it.
9.

Remove the vent line and lift the rear gearcase upward and
on its side to remove it from the vehicle.

7.37

FINAL DRIVE
3.

Remove the differential assembly from the housing.

Remove the shim(s) from the differential assembly. Be sure
to keep the shims together for reassembly.

Inspect the ring gear and differential gears for chipped,
worn, or broken teeth.

Remove the bearing from the lower portion of the
differential assembly. Inspect the bearing for smoothness
and wear.

Remove the shim(s) from the differential assembly. Be sure
to keep the shims together for reassembly.

Inspect Teeth

Remove the bearing from the top portion of the differential
assembly. Inspect the bearing for smoothness and wear.

7.38

FINAL DRIVE
9.

Inspect each differential bearing and race for signs of wear
or damage. If bearing replacement is required, use standard
bearing puller tools to remove the bearing races.

10. Remove the seals from the gearcase housing and cover and
replace the O-ring in the gearcase cover.

12. Inspect the pinion shaft by rotating the assembly in the
gearcase housing while checking for any looseness or
roughness. Inspect the pinion gear for chipped, worn, or
broken teeth. If damaged, replace the gearcase assembly.
NOTE: In the event damage to the gears, pinion
bearings or housing requires replacement, the entire
assembly must be replaced.
13. Remove the differential solenoid from the gearcase if
servicing the solenoid, shift lever, shift lever spring, or shift
yoke. If none of these items are being serviced, the solenoid
can remain installed in the gearcase.

14. If the solenoid was removed for servicing, inspect the tip
of the solenoid for wear. If the tip of the solenoid is
flattened, the solenoid must be replaced.
11. Remove the pinion shaft seal using a seal puller or other
suitable method.

7.39

FINAL DRIVE
15. Remove the clutch gear from the gearcase.

16. Inspect the shift lever (A), shift lever spring (B), shift return
springs (C), and shift yoke (D) for excessive wear or
damage. If disassembly is required, proceed to the next
step. If no disassembly is required, proceed to “Gearcase
Assembly”.
D

18. Carefully remove the shift yoke assembly from the
gearcase cover.

19. Inspect the shift lever (A), shift lever spring (B), shift return
springs (C), shift yoke (D), and lock pin bushing (E).
Inspect the components for excessive wear or damage and
replace as needed.

C
A

17. Loosen and remove the lock pin assembly from the
gearcase housing.

7.40

C
E

NOTE: The pinion shaft assembly is NOT intended
to be disassembled from the case, as it requires
special OEM tooling in order to properly reassemble.
If there is any damage to the pinion gear, bearings or
case, the gearcase assembly must be replaced.

FINAL DRIVE
Differential Disassembly
1.

Use a scribe to mark the differential cover and case.
Remove the (10) screws retaining the differential cover.

Use a brass punch in the recessed area as shown to remove
the differential cover.

Use a scribe to mark the ring gear and differential case.
Remove the (8) bolts that secure the ring gear to the
differential and allow the ring gear to slide down and off.

Place the differential assembly upright. Use a roll pin punch
to remove the roll pin from the differential case.

Punch

7
6.
3.

Remove the upper differential gear.

With the roll pin removed, slide the cross pin out and
remove the remaining differential gears.

7.41

FINAL DRIVE
3.

Install the side differential gears and thrust washers and
slide the cross pin into position with the hole side facing the
hole in the differential case.

Differential Assembly

Install a new roll pin.

Install the upper differential gear and differential cover.
Apply Loctite® 271 to the cover screws and torque the
screws to specification.

Inspect the gears, thrust washers and differential case for
excessive wear or damage. Replace components if needed.
Thrust
Washer

Thrust
Washers

Gears
Gear
Differential
Case

Thoroughly clean the differential components prior to
reassembly.

Apply Loctite® 271

=T
Differential Cover Screws:
130-155 in. lbs. (15-18 Nm)

Install the lower differential gear and thrust washer.

Install the ring gear and torque the retaining bolts to
specification.

=T
Ring Gear Bolts:
70-80 ft. lbs. (95-108 Nm)

7.42

FINAL DRIVE
Gearcase Assembly
1.

Replace all worn components.

If removed, install new bearing races using standard
bearing installation tools and an arbor press.

Install a new pinion shaft seal using a standard seal installer
or other suitable method.

Install the original shim(s) previously removed onto the
appropriate sides of the differential assembly. Install the
bearings by hand as they are a slip-fit.

WARNING
Wear the appropriate safety equipment while
installing races to reduce the risk of injury.

NOTE: Grease all seals and O-rings with Polaris All
Season Grease (PN 2871322) upon assembly.
3.

If previously removed; assembly the shift lever (A), shift
lever spring (B), shift return springs (C), shift yoke (D), and
lock pin bushing (E).

Install new seals into the gearcase housing and gearcase
cover using a standard seal installer or other suitable
method.

Install a new O-ring in the gearcase cover.

C
E

7.43

FINAL DRIVE
8.

Carefully install the shift yoke assembly into the gearcase.

11. Install the differential assembly into the gearcase housing
and install a new lightly greased O-ring onto the cover.
O-Ring

Install the shift yoke assembly with the shift return springs
(C), facing down in the housing.

12. Assemble the gearcase halves and install the bolts that
secure the cover to the housing. Torque the bolts in a crisscross pattern to 23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm).
23-27 ft. lbs.
(31-37 Nm)

10. Install the lock pin assembly and tighten.
13. If previously removed, install the differential solenoid.
Torque the solenoid to 30-40 ft. lbs. (41-54 Nm).

30-40 ft. lbs.
(41-54 Nm)

7.44

FINAL DRIVE
Gearcase Installation
1.

Install the rear gearcase by reversing the procedure listed
under “REAR GEARCASE - Gearcase Removal” at the
beginning of this section.

IMPORTANT: When reinstalling the transmission to
rear gearcase mount bracket, it is extremely important
to torque all (7) fasteners to specification. Refer to the
“Installation” procedure listed on page 4.14.
NOTE: Special tool (PA-48873) will be required to
torque the mounting bracket fasteners when the
transmission and rear gearcase are installed in the
vehicle. Refer to the “Installation” procedure listed
on page 4.14.

Special Tool
PA-48873

7
2.

Add Polaris ATV Angle Drive Fluid to rear gearcase. Refer
to maintenance information in Chapter 2 for more details.
Torque drain and fill plugs to specification.

=
Rear Gearcase Capacity:
22 fl. oz. (650 ml)
or to bottom of fill plug hole threads
See Chapter 2

=T
Drain / Fill Plug:
Drain Plug - 30-45 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm)
Fill Plug - 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm)

7.45

FINAL DRIVE
Gearcase Exploded View
70-80 ft. lbs.
20 (95-108
Nm)

35
31

32
33

6
16

30
130-155 in. lbs.
(15-18 Nm)

30-40 ft. lbs.
(41-54 Nm)

23-27 ft. lbs.
(31-37 Nm)

18
40 ft. lbs.

(54 Nm)

23-27 ft. lbs.
(31-37 Nm)

11
30-45 in. lbs.
(3-5 Nm)

25
REF#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

7.46

DESCRIPTION
Screw
Screw
Bracket, Rear Mount, RH
Bracket, Rear Mount, LH
Mount, Rear
Nut, Flanged
Assembly, Rear Housing, RH
Plug, Fill w/O-Ring
Bushing, Pin Lock
Bearing, Ball
Plug, Drain
Shim Kit
Gear, Clutch
Yoke, Shift
O-Ring
Cover Asm., Rear
Screw
Seal, Oil
Screw, Flanged

QTY
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
4

REF#
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

DESCRIPTION
Screw
Lever, Shift
Spring, Shift Lever
Spring, Shift Return
Pin Lock Asm.
Seal
Bushing, Dowel
Solenoid, Diff Lock
Bearing, Tapered Roller
Screw, Flange Head
Case, Diff Cover Half
Thrust Washer, Pinion
Gear, Diff, Pinion Mate
Gear, Diff Side
Thrust Washer, Side Gear
Case, Diff Half
Pin, Diff, Cross
Pin, Spring

QTY
8
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
10
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1

FINAL DRIVE
WHEEL HUBS
Front Hub Exploded View
Sealed
Ball Bearing
Bolts
Wheel Hub
Front Tire

Cotter Pin

Cone
Washers

Bearing
Carrier
Retaining
Ring

Wheel Nuts
35 ft. lbs.
(47 Nm)

Brake Disc
Studs
Castle Nut
80 ft. lbs.
(108 Nm)

Front Rim
(Steel)

Rear Hub Exploded View
Sealed
Ball Bearing
Bolts
Wheel Hub
Cotter Pin

Rear Tire

Cone
Washers

Bearing
Carrier

Wheel Nuts

Retaining
Ring

35 ft. lbs.
(47 Nm)

Brake Disc
Studs
Castle Nut
80 ft. lbs.
(108 Nm)

Rear Rim
(Steel)

7.47

FINAL DRIVE

NOTES

7.48

TRANSMISSION

CHAPTER 8
TRANSMISSION
TORQUE VALUES / SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
SHIFT LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
SHIFT CABLE INSPECTION / ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3

TRANSMISSION SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL / SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
TRANSFER CASE DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
TRANSFER CASE REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7
TRANSMISSION SHIFT HOUSING DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
TRANSMISSION SHIFT HOUSING REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.13

TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.18
TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.18

TRANSMISSION EXPLODED VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19
SHIFT HOUSING / TRANSFER CASE EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.19

8.1

TRANSMISSION
TORQUE VALUES / SPECIFICATIONS

SHIFT LEVER

Maintain and check/change these items in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in Chapter 2 or during service repairs.

Removal

ITEM

TORQUE VALUE

Transmission Fill Plugs

40-50 ft. lbs. (54-67 Nm)

Transmission Drain /
Level Plugs

30-45 in. lbs. (0.2-0.3 Nm)

Transmission Case
Screws

23-27 ft. lbs. (31-36 Nm)

Shift Cable Lever Screw

15-20 ft. lbs. (20-27 Nm)

Detent Sleeve Assembly

40-45 ft. lbs. (54-61 Nm)

Outer Detent Screw

23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm)

Drain Plugs / Check Plug

30-45 in. lbs. (0.2-0.3 Nm)

Ground Speed Sensor
Screw

130-155 in. lbs. (15-18 Nm)

Gear Position Sensor
Screws

25-40 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm)

Pivot Pin Set Screw

100-125 in. lbs. (11-14 Nm)

Park Flange Screws

130-155 in. lbs. (15-18 Nm)

Transmission Isolator
Mounting Screws

23-27 ft. lbs. (31-36 Nm)

Transmission Lubricant
Capacity

AGL Plus PN 2878068
24 oz. (710 ml)

Transfer Case Lubricant
Capacity

AGL Plus PN 2878068
14 oz. (414 ml)

Rear Gearcase Fluid
Capacity

ADF PN 2871653
22 oz. (650 ml)

Pry the shift lever cover using a suitable tool and remove
the screw. Pull knob off the shifter.

Refer to Chapter 5 for console cover removal.

Disconnect cable from shifter.

Remove the clip attaching the gear selector to the machine
frame.

Lift the gear shift selector out of mounting bracket and
away from frame.

Installation
1.

Perform the steps in reverse order to install the gear shift
selector (shifter, cable, console, shift knob).

Tighten the shift cable nut to specification.

=T
Shift Cable Nut Torque:
130-155 in. lbs. (14.7-17.5 Nm)

8.2

TRANSMISSION
Shift Cable Inspection / Adjustment

Adjust the shift cable so there is the same amount of cable
travel when shifting slightly past the detents of HIGH (H)
gear and PARK (P).

Thread the upper or lower jam nut as required to obtain
proper cable adjustment.

Shift cable adjustment may be necessary if symptoms include:
• No AWD or gear position display on instrument cluster
• Ratcheting noise on deceleration
• Inability to engage a gear

• Excessive gear clash (noise)

NOTE: This procedure may require a few attempts to
obtain the proper adjustment.

• Gear selector moving out of desired range

Once the proper adjustment is obtained, place the shift
cable and upper jam nut into the mount. Tighten the lower
jam nut against the mount.

Start engine and shift through all gears to ensure the shift
cable is properly adjusted. If transmission still ratchets after
cable adjustment, check the CVT system for belt movement
at idle. If difficulty shifting persists, the transmission may
require service.

Locate the shift cable in the rear LH wheel well area.
Clevis Pin
Shift Cable
Mount

Shift Cable

Dust Boot

Inspect shift cable, clevis pin, pivot bushings, and dust
boot. Replace if worn or damaged.

If adjustment is required, loosen the lower jam nut and pull
the cable out of the mount to move the upper jam nut.
Upper
Jam Nut

Lower
Jam Nut

8.3

TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION SERVICE

Remove the (7) fasteners retaining the transmission to rear
gearcase mount bracket.

Transmission Removal / Service Notes
The engine, transmission and rear differential are bolted
together as a unit. Removal of the transmission is not possible
without removing the engine and differential.
The shift housing cannot be removed without first
disassembling the transfer case.
NOTE: Refer to the “Engine Removal” section in
Chapter 3 to remove the engine and drivetrain.
Note the number or
thickness of shims for
reassembly purposes.

Transfer Case Disassembly
IMPORTANT: Shift housing repairs are not possible
without performing transfer case disassembly. Read
and understand all instructions before beginning
disassembly.
NOTE: Exploded views are located at the end of this
chapter for additional information.
1.

Place the transmission in the neutral position.

Drain both the transfer case and transmission case halves.

Remove the connector tube bolts securing the rear gear case
and transmission transfer case.

Inspect the driveshaft splines for wear and the O-rings for
damage. Replace if found to be worn or damaged.

Remove the LH front isolator mount bracket. Refer to
Chapter 3.

Remove the screws from the transfer case cover and
remove the cover (note position of the longest screw #4).

1
4

3
Transfer Case
Drain Plug

Transmission Gearcase
Drain Plug
5

8.4

TRANSMISSION
8.

After removing the cover, remove the intermediate shaft
bearing cup and shims from the cover. Bearing cup is a slipfit. Note and record the number and thickness of shims and
set aside. Also note the two alignment dowels (circle) in the
cover for installation.

10. Remove the intermediate pinion shaft assembly from the
housing. Check bearings and gear teeth for wear or damage
and replace as needed. The shaft can be disassembled as
shown using a press and standard bearing removal tools.

NOTE: Record the number and thickness of shims
for reassembly.

Disassemble the cover as required, replacing components
that are failed or worn. Check bearings for wear or damage
and replace as needed using a press and standard bearing
removal tools. Discard removed bearings as they become
damaged by the removal process.

11. Disassemble the output pinion shaft assembly by removing
the retaining screws on the bearing cup/bracket assembly.
Replace the output shaft seal. The output pinion shaft can
be disassembled as shown using a press and standard
bearing removal tools.

8
12. Output shaft bearing cup is a slip-fit. Remove, note and
record the number and thickness of shims and set aside.
Note the alignment dowels (circled) in the cover for
installation.

8.5

TRANSMISSION
13. Remove the front output pinion shaft assembly. The shaft
can be disassembled as shown using a press and standard
bearing removal tools.

15. Remove the lower snap ring from under the gear.

16. Remove the intermediate shaft seal using a seal puller or
other suitable method.
14. Remove the upper snap ring from the top side of the 21T
main pinion gear and remove the gear.

8.6

TRANSMISSION
Transfer Case Reassembly
1.

Install the shims, bearing cup and alignment dowels into the
retaining bracket.

Install a new output shaft seal flush with the case. Install
the output pinion shaft assembly and bearing cup/bracket
assembly as shown. Verify the alignment dowels are
seated. Torque the bracket screws evenly to specification.

Install the intermediate shaft seal (circled) flush or slightly
below the case. Install circlips and gear onto the input
intermediate shaft as shown.

Install the front output pinion shaft assembly.

NOTE: Bearing is pressed onto the shaft

8
=T
Output Pinion Shaft Bracket Screws:
23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm)

8.7

TRANSMISSION
5.

Reinstall the intermediate pinion shaft assembly and
bearing cup.

Install the transfer case cover. Align the dowels (#1 & #7)
and insert the cover screws (note position of the longest
screw #4). Torque the screws evenly to specification in
sequence as shown.

1
4

3
2

Assemble the transfer case cover using new components as
required. Press in new bearings and a seal using standard
installation tools. (needle bearing is installed round edge
inward) Install a new shaft seal flush with the surface, the
shims and bearing cup. Apply a thin coat of sealant to the
mating surfaces. Apply lubricant to the seal lip.

=T
Transfer Case Cover Screws:
23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm)
8.

Reinstall the transmission to rear gearcase mount bracket.
Hand tighten all fasteners first, then torque fasteners to
specification.

2871557

Apply Sealant PN 2871557
To Case Mating Surfaces

Use same number or
thickness of shims as
found during disassembly.

=T
Mount Bracket Fasteners:
23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm)

8.8

TRANSMISSION
Transmission Shift Housing Disassembly

IMPORTANT: Shift housing repairs are not possible
without performing transfer case disassembly. Read
and understand all instructions before beginning
disassembly.
1.

Place the transmission shift housing onto a flat surface as
shown. Lift the transmission case half straight up and
remove.

Verify transmission is in neutral. Remove the (7) shift
housing case screws from the front of the transmission and
(2) from the backside as shown.

NOTE: Shaft components may “catch” during
transmission case half disassembly. Work slowly
and deliberately to avoid component loss or
damage.
3.

Remove the retaining ring and retaining plate.

NOTE: Shift cable bracket removal is required.

Remove the reverse clutch gear assembly from the housing.
Note the orientation of the needle bearing. Inspect these
components and replace if needed.

8.9

TRANSMISSION
5.

Remove the (5) screws retaining the park flange. Inspect the
park flange for wear or damage. Replace if needed.

Inspect the shaft bearing. Use a standard bearing puller to
remove the shaft bearing if required.

Remove the input shaft seal and clutch intermediate shaft
seal using a seal puller or punch.

Remove the (2) screws that attach the gear position sensor
to the shift housing. Inspect the O-ring, switch poles and
contact pins for wear or damage. Replace parts as required.

NOTE: Do not pull bearing from cases for
inspection, as the removal process damages the
bearing.
7.

Remove the reverse idler snap ring, upper washer, gear,
needle bearing, and lower washer from the idler shaft.

NOTE: The reverse idler shaft is a non-serviceable
item and should not be pressed out of the housing.

8.10

Neutral

TRANSMISSION
10. Remove the spacer, contact pins, springs, drum gear and
washer from the shift housing. Replace any worn or
damaged components.

13. Pull back fully on gear selector arm to bring shift collar up
and disengage the shift collar from the clutch yoke. Lifting
on the clutch shaft may aid in shift collar removal.

11. Remove the inner shift detent screws, springs, and balls
from the shift housing.

14. Inspect the inner and outer gear teeth and splines on both
ends of the shift collar for excessive wear or damage.
15. Remove the retaining rings from each end of the shift collar.
16. Remove the wave spring and ball bearing cage assembly
from the shift collar as shown.

8
NOTE: Never remove the outer shift detent screw
first. Removal of the outer screw will allow the detent
ball and spring to fall into the shift housing.
12. Remove the park/reverse spacer from the clutch shaft.

17. Inspect the inner and outer gear teeth and ball bearing
channels on both ends of the shift collar for excessive wear
or damage.
18. Remove the sliding shoes from the clutch yoke.

8.11

TRANSMISSION
19. Remove the clutch shaft assembly from the housing. The
forward gear assembly and bearings will remain on the
shaft upon removal.

22. Locate the retaining ring on the shifter assembly and move
the retaining ring out of the groove to allow the shifter
assembly to slide out.

20. Disassemble the clutch shaft as needed by removing both
retaining rings and separating the high and low gears from
the clutch shaft. Inspect all parts for wear or damage and
replace as required.

Shifter
Assembly

Pivot
Pin

Clutch
Yoke

23. Use a needle nose pliers to grab the pivot pin and slide the
pin out of the case.
24. Remove the clutch yoke from the shifter assembly and out
from the transmission housing.

21. Remove the set screw retaining the pivot pin.

8.12

25. Remove the transmission input shaft from the housing.
Inspect the shaft bearing and replace if required using a
shop press. Inspect the gears for damage and/or wear.
Replace the shaft if required.

TRANSMISSION
26. Remove the screw from the end of the shift cable lever and
remove the shifter assembly from the housing.

Transmission Shift Housing Reassembly
1.

Install a new shift cable lever seal and press it flush with
the case. Apply lubricant to the seal lip.

Lubricate the shaft of the shifter assembly and install the
assembly into the housing with a new retaining ring and
washer. Install the shift cable lever (“X” facing out) and
torque the retaining screw to specification.

27. Inspect the shifter assembly shaft and housing for excessive
wear or damage. Replace components if needed.
28. Inspect and replace the case bearings if required.
NOTE: Do not pull bearings from case for
inspection, as the removal process damages the
bearing.

=T
Shift Cable Lever Screw:
15-20 ft. lbs. (20 - 27 Nm)
3.

Assemble the input shaft with new ball bearings (if
required).

NOTE: Install new bearings and seals by pressing
on the outer edge only.

8.13

TRANSMISSION
4.

Install the input shaft assembly into the transmission
housing.

=T
Pivot Pin Set Screw:
100-125 in. lbs. (11-14 Nm)

Assemble the clutch shaft with new needle bearings. Press
a new ball bearing onto the end of the shaft and install a new
retaining ring.

Install the clutch shaft into the transmission housing.

Install the sliding shoes onto the clutch yoke.

Install the clutch yoke into the shifter assembly. Align the
holes and install clutch yoke pivot pin.

Shifter
Assembly

Pivot
Pin

Clutch
Yoke

Install the pivot pin set screw and torque to specification.

8.14

TRANSMISSION
10. Install the shift collar onto the clutch shaft. Pull back fully
on gear selector arm to bring the shift yoke arms up and
engage the shift shoes onto the center groove of the shift
collar. Shifting the clutch shaft position may aid in shift
collar installation. Install the park/reverse spacer on top of
the shift collar as shown.

11. Install the dent sleeve assembly, ball, spring and outer
detent screw. Use new O-rings anytime these screws are
removed. Torque the detent sleeve assembly to
specification. TURN THE OUTER DETENT SCREW
ONLY UNTIL LIGHT SHIFTING RESISTANCE IS
FELT AT THIS TIME. PLACE THE TRANSMISSION
IN NEUTRAL.

12. With the transmission in neutral, lubricate and install the
thrust washer, drum gear, plate, springs, contact pins and
the gear position sensor/O-ring assembly. Verify the
contact pins are aligned as shown with the transmission in
neutral. Torque the retaining screws to specification.

=
Apply Lubricant to shift drum components

P
Neutral

H
L

=T
Gear Position Sensor Screws:
25-40 in. lbs. (3-5 Nm)

=T
Detent Sleeve Assembly:
40-45 ft. lbs. (54-61 Nm)

13. Complete the shift detent screw installation. Torque the
outer detent screws to specification.

=T
Outer Detent Screws:
23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm)

8.15

TRANSMISSION
14. Install the reverse idler lower washer, needle bearing, gear,
upper washer and retaining ring onto the idler shaft.

17. Install the reverse clutch assembly onto the park flange.
Note the orientation of the needle bearing.

15. Install a new shaft bearing (if required).

18. Install the retaining plate and a new retaining ring.
19. Install the input shaft seal and verify it is fully seated. Install
the intermediate shaft seal (circled) flush or slightly below
the case. Apply lubricant to both seal lips.

16. Install the park flange and torque the (5) screws to
specification.

=T
Park Flange Screws:
130-155 in. lbs. (15-18 Nm)

8.16

TRANSMISSION
20. Place the transmission shift housing onto a flat surface as
shown. Apply a bead of crankcase sealant onto the mating
surfaces. Align the dowels and install the transmission case
half onto the shift housing while rotating the input shaft,
using care not to damage the seal surfaces.

22. Install the (2) shift housing case screws to the backside as
shown. Torque to specification.
NOTE: Shift cable bracket installation is required.

2871557
Apply Sealant PN 2871557
to Case Mating Surfaces
21. Install the shift cable bracket (7) shift housing case screws
to the front of the transmission. Torque to specification.

=T
Shift Housing Screws:
23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm)
23. Proceed with transfer case reassembly.
See “Transfer Case Reassembly” on page 8.7

=T
Shift Housing Screws:
23-27 ft. lbs. (31-37 Nm)

8.17

TRANSMISSION
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting Checklist
Check the following items when shifting difficulty is
encountered:
• Idle speed adjustment
• PVT alignment
• Transmission oil type/quality
• Transmission torque stop adjustment (where applicable)
• Engine torque stop adjustment (where applicable)
• Drive belt deflection
• Loose fasteners on rod ends
• Loose fasteners on selector box
• Worn rod ends, clevis pins, or pivot arm bushings
• Linkage rod adjustment and rod end positioning
• Shift selector rail travel
• Worn, broken or damaged internal transmission
components
NOTE: To determine if shifting difficulty is caused
by an internal transmission problem, isolate the
transmission by disconnecting the shifter from
transmission bellcrank. Verify the engine RPM is set
to specification. Manually select each gear range at
the transmission bellcrank, and test ride vehicle. If it
functions properly, the problem is outside the
transmission.
If transmission problem remains, disassemble
transmission and inspect all gear dogs for wear
(rounding), damage. Inspect all bearings, circlips,
thrust washers and shafts for wear.

8.18

TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION EXPLODED VIEW

Transfer Case

Shift Housing / Transfer Case Exploded View

Shift Housing

8.19

TRANSMISSION

NOTES

8.20

BRAKES

CHAPTER 9
BRAKES
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE NOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRAKE NOISE TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BRAKE SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASTER CYLINDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2
9.2
9.2
9.3
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6

REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6

BRAKE PEDAL LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
PEDAL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
PEDAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6

BRAKE BLEEDING / FLUID CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
FRONT BRAKE PADS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
PAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
PAD ASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9

FRONT CALIPER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
CALIPER EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
CALIPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
CALIPER DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
CALIPER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
CALIPER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13

FRONT BRAKE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
DISC RUNOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
DISC INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
DISC REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14

REAR BRAKE PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
PAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
PAD ASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.17

REAR CALIPER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
CALIPER EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
CALIPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
CALIPER DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.19
CALIPER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.19
CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.20
CALIPER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.20

REAR BRAKE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.21
DISC INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.21
DISC REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.21

TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
BRAKES SQUEAL / POOR BRAKE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
PEDAL VIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
CALIPER OVERHEATS (BRAKES DRAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
BRAKES LOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22

9.1

BRAKES
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT BRAKE SYSTEM
Item

Standard

Service Limit

Front Brake Pad Thickness

.297 ± .007" (7.54 ± .178 mm)

.180" (4.6 mm)

Front Brake Disc Thickness

.188" (4.78 mm)

.170" (4.32 mm)

.010" (.254 mm)

Front Brake Disc Runout

REAR BRAKE SYSTEM
Item

Standard

Service Limit

Rear Brake Pad Thickness

.298 ± .007" (7.57 ± .178 mm)

.180" (4.6 mm)

Rear Brake Disc Thickness

.188" (4.78 mm)

.170" (4.32 mm)

.010" (.254 mm)

Rear Brake Disc Runout

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIAL TOOLS

Torque
ft. lbs.

Torque
Nm

Front Caliper Mounting Bolts

31-34

42-46

Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts

12-15

16-20

Brake Line Banjo Bolts
(Caliper Attachment)

Brake Line Banjo Bolt
(Master Cylinder Attachment)

Front Brake Disc to Hub Bolts

Rear Brake Disc to Hub Bolts

12-15

16-20

Master Cylinder to Frame

Brake Pedal Mounting Bracket
to Frame

Item

Brake Line Flare

Brake Switch

9.2

Part Number

Tool Description

2870975

Mity Vac™ Pressure Test Tool

BRAKES
BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE NOTES
Disc brake systems are light weight, low maintenance, and perform well in the conditions this vehicle will routinely encounter. There
are a few things to remember when replacing disc brake pads or performing brake system service to ensure proper system function
and maximum pad service life.
• Optional pads are available to suit conditions in your area. Select a pad to fit riding style and environment.
• Do not over-fill the master cylinder fluid reservoir.
• Make sure the brake pedal returns freely and completely.
• Adjust stop pin on front caliper after pad service.
• Check and adjust master cylinder reservoir fluid level after pad service.
• Make sure atmospheric vent on reservoir is unobstructed.
• Test for brake drag after any brake system service and investigate cause if brake drag is evident.
• Make sure caliper moves freely on guide pins (where applicable).
• Inspect caliper piston seals for foreign material that could prevent caliper pistons from returning freely.
• Perform a brake burnishing procedure after installing new pads to maximize service life.
• DO NOT lubricate or clean the brake components with aerosol or petroleum products. Use only approved brake cleaning
products.

BRAKE NOISE TROUBLESHOOTING
Dirt or dust buildup on the brake pads and disc is the most common cause of brake noise (squeal caused by vibration). If cleaning
does not reduce the occurrence of brake noise, Permatex™ Disc Brake Quiet can be applied to the back of the pads. Follow directions
on the package. This will keep pads in contact with caliper piston(s) to reduce the chance of squeaks caused by dirt or dust.
Brake Noise Troubleshooting
Possible Cause
Dirt, dust, or imbedded material on pads or disc

Remedy
Spray disc and pads with CRC Brakeleen™ or an equivalent
non-flammable aerosol brake cleaner. Remove pads and/or disc
hub to clean imbedded material from disc or pads.

Pad(s) dragging on disc (noise or premature pad wear) because
of improper adjustment
Master cylinder reservoir overfilled
Master cylinder compensating port restricted
Master cylinder piston not returning completely
Caliper piston(s) not returning
Operator error (riding the brake)

Adjust pad stop (front calipers)

Loose wheel hub or bearings

Check wheel and hub for abnormal movement.

Brake disc warped or excessively worn

Replace disc

Brake disc misaligned or loose

Inspect and repair as necessary

Noise is from other source (axle, hub, disc or wheel)

If noise does not change when brake is applied check other
sources. Inspect and repair as necessary

Wrong pad for conditions

Change to a softer or harder pad

Set to proper level
Clean compensating port
Inspect. Repair as necessary
Clean piston(s) seal
Educate operator

9.3

BRAKES
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM OPERATION
The Polaris brake system consists of the following components or assemblies: brake pedal, master cylinder, hydraulic brake lines,
brake calipers, brake pads, and brake discs, which are secured to the drive line.
When the foot activated brake lever is applied it applies pressure on the piston within the master cylinder. As the master cylinder
piston moves inward it closes a small opening (compensating port) within the cylinder and starts to build pressure within the brake
system. As the pressure within the system is increased, the pistons located in the brake calipers move outward and apply pressure
to the moveable brake pads. These pads contact the brake discs and move the calipers in their floating bracket, pulling the stationary
side pads into the brake discs. The resulting friction reduces brake disc and vehicle speed.
The friction applied to the brake pads will cause the pads to wear. As these pads wear, the piston within the caliper moves further
outward and becomes self adjusting. Fluid from the reservoir fills the additional area created when the caliper piston moves outward.
Brake fluid level is critical to proper system operation. Too little fluid will allow air to enter the system and cause the brakes to feel
spongy. Too much fluid could cause brakes to drag due to fluid expansion.
Located within the master cylinder is the compensating port which is opened and closed by the master cylinder piston assembly. As
the temperature within the hydraulic system changes, this port compensates for fluid expansion or contraction. Due to the high
temperatures created within the system during heavy braking, it is very important that the master cylinder reservoir have adequate
space to allow for fluid expansion. Never overfill the reservoir! Do not fill the reservoir beyond the MAX LEVEL line!
When servicing Polaris brake systems use only Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid (PN 2872189). WARNING: Once a bottle is opened,
use what is necessary and discard the rest in accordance with local laws. Do not store or use a partial bottle of brake fluid. Brake
fluid is hygroscopic, meaning it rapidly absorbs moisture. This causes the boiling temperature of the brake fluid to drop, which can
lead to early brake fade and the possibility of serious injury.

9.4

BRAKES
BRAKE SYSTEM EXPLODED VIEW
RZR SW
Cross
Fitting

LH Front
Brake Line

LH Rear Line
Brake
Switch

Master Cylinder
1
Front Calipers

Rear Calipers

MC Rear
Brake Line

1
RH Rear Line
2

1
Master Cylinder Side View

Caliper Banjo Style Fittings:
15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm).

15 ft. lbs.
(20 Nm)

RH Front
Brake Line

All Caliper Bleed Screws:

2 47 in. lbs. (5.3 Nm)

All Flare Style Fittings:

3 12-15 ft. lbs. (16-20 Nm)

9.5

BRAKES
MASTER CYLINDER

NOTE: Make note of front and rear brake line
locations to master cylinder.

Removal
1.

Locate the master cylinder above the left front tire in the
wheel well area.

Loosen the brake line banjo bolts (C) and allow fluid to
drain.

NOTE: Dispose of fluid properly. Do not re-use.
5.

Remove the two mounting fasteners (D) that secure the
master cylinder to the frame.

Installation

Master Cylinder

Reverse Steps 1-5 for master cylinder installation.
Refer to the torque specifications in the illustration.

After installing the foot brake check pedal freeplay. Pedal
freeplay should not exceed .090” (2.286 mm).

BRAKE PEDAL LEVER
2.

Remove the clip (A) from the clevis pin (B) that attaches
the master cylinder to the brake pedal lever.
17 ft. lbs.
(23 Nm)

Pedal Removal
1.

Locate the brake pedal lever (L) and remove the master
cylinder clevis pin (B) and clip (A).

Remove the E-ring (E) from the pedal mount and remove
the brake pedal lever (L) from the vehicle.

L
E
B

A
D

C
15 ft. lbs.
(20 Nm)

Place a container to catch brake fluid under the master
cylinder brake line banjo bolts (C).

CAUTION
Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces.
Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact
with finished surfaces.

9.6

Pedal Installation
1.

Reverse “Removal” steps to install brake pedal lever.
Brake pedal freeplay should not exceed .090” (2.28 mm).

Brake Pedal Freeplay:
.090” (2.28 mm)

BRAKES
BRAKE BLEEDING / FLUID CHANGE

Have an assistant slowly pump foot pedal until pressure
builds and holds.

NOTE: When bleeding the brakes or replacing the
fluid always start with the furthest caliper from the
master cylinder.

Hold brake pedal on to maintain pedal pressure, and open
bleeder screw. Close bleeder screw and release foot pedal.

NOTE: Do not release foot pedal before bleeder
screw is tight or air may be drawn into master
cylinder.

CAUTION
Always wear safety glasses.

CAUTION

Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces. Do not
allow brake fluid to come in contact with finished
surfaces. This procedure should be used to
change fluid or bleed brakes during
regular maintenance.
1.

Clean master cylinder reservoir cover thoroughly and
remove the cover.

Repeat procedure until clean fluid appears in bleeder hose
and all air has been purged. Add fluid as necessary to
maintain level in reservoir.

Maintain at least 1/2"(1.27 cm) of brake fluid in
the reservoir to prevent air from
entering the master cylinder.
8.

Tighten bleeder screw securely and remove bleeder hose.
Torque bleeder screw to 47 in. lbs. (5.3 Nm).

Repeat procedure Steps 5 - 8 for the remaining calipers.

10. Add brake fluid to MAX level inside reservoir.

Master Cylinder Fluid Level
Master Cylinder

Remove
Cover

Between the MIN and MAX line shown
on the reservoir.
11. Install master cylinder reservoir cover.

If changing fluid, remove old fluid from reservoir with a
Mity Vac™ pump or similar tool.

Mity Vac™ (PN 2870975)
3.

12. Field test machine at low speed before putting into service.
Check for proper braking action and pedal reserve. With
pedal firmly applied, pedal reserve should be no less than
1/2"(1.3 cm).
13. Check brake system for fluid leaks.

Add brake fluid to the indicated MAX level of reservoir.

Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid
(PN 2872189)
4.

Begin bleeding procedure with the caliper that is farthest
from the master cylinder. Install a box end wrench on
caliper bleeder screw. Attach a clean, clear hose to fitting
and place the other end in a clean container. Be sure the hose
fits tightly on fitting.

9.7

BRAKES
FRONT BRAKE PADS

Push the mounting bracket inward and the slip outer brake
pad out between the bracket and caliper body.

Remove the inner pad from the bracket and caliper.

Pad Removal
1.

Elevate and support front of vehicle.

CAUTION
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it
does not tip or fall.
Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls.
2.

Remove the wheel nuts, washers and front wheel.

Loosen the pad adjuster screw 2-3 turns.

Pad Inspection
1.

Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace pads if
worn beyond the service limit.

Remove the upper and lower caliper mounting bolts and
remove the caliper from the front hub.

NOTE: When removing caliper, use care not to
damage brake line. Support caliper so to avoid
kinking or bending brake line.
5.

Push caliper piston into caliper bore slowly using a
C-clamp or locking pliers with pads installed.

Measure
Thickness

NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced through
compensating port into master cylinder fluid
reservoir when piston is pushed back into caliper.
Remove excess fluid from reservoir as required.

9.8

Front Brake Pad Thickness:
.297 ± .007" (7.5 ± .178 mm)
Service Limit: .180” (4.6 mm)

BRAKES
Pad Assembly / Installation
1.

Lubricate mounting bracket pins with a light film of
Polaris Premium All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and
install rubber dust boots.

Slowly pump the brake pedal until pressure has been built
up. Maintain at least 1/2, (12.7 mm) of brake fluid in the
reservoir to prevent air from entering the brake system.

Install the adjustment set screw and turn clockwise until
stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2 turn
(counterclockwise).

Apply Grease to Each
Bracket Pin

1/2 Turn

Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust boots are
fully seated. Install pads with friction material facing each
other.

WARNING

Master Cylinder Fluid

If brake pads are contaminated with grease, oil,
or liquid soaked do not use the pads.
Use only new, clean pads.
3.

Verify fluid level in reservoir is up to MAX line inside
reservoir and install reservoir cap.

Install caliper onto front hub and torque mounting bolts to
specification.

Up to MAX line inside reservoir
7.

Install wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification.

=T
Wheel Nuts:
Steel Wheels: 35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)
Aluminum Wheels: 30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)

Brake Burnishing Procedure
It is required that a burnishing procedure be performed after
installation of new brake pads to extend service life and reduce
noise.
31-34 ft. lbs.
(42-46 Nm)

Start machine and slowly increase speed to 30 mph. Gradually
apply brakes to stop machine. Allow pads and disc to cool
sufficiently during the procedure. Do not allow pads or disc to
become hot or warping may result. Repeat this procedure 10
times.

Front Caliper Mount Bolt Torque:
31-34 ft. lbs. (42-46 Nm)

9.9

BRAKES
FRONT CALIPER SERVICE
Caliper Exploded View
Apply Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid
to Components

C
B

Apply Polaris All Purpose
Grease

47 in. lbs.
(5.3 Nm)
A

D
E

F
G

H
A. Socket Set Screw
B. Bleeder Screw
C. Caliper Assy.
D. Boots
E. Square O-rings
F. Pistons
G. Caliper Mount
H. Brake Pads

Caliper Removal
1.

Elevate and safely support the front of the vehicle.

Remove the (4) wheel nuts and the front wheel.

Place a container below the caliper to catch brake fluid
when removing the line. Remove brake line from caliper.

CAUTION
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not
tip or fall. Severe injury may occur.
3.

Clean caliper area before removal.
Remove
Brake Line

9.10

BRAKES
5.

Loosen brake pad adjustment set screw 2-3 turns to allow
brake pad removal after the caliper is removed.

Thoroughly clean the caliper before disassembly and
prepare a clean work area for disassembly.

Use a commercially available caliper piston pliers to extract
the pistons from the caliper.

Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and remove the
caliper assembly from the front hub.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the caliper pistons with
a standard pliers. The piston sealing surfaces will
become damaged if a standard pliers is used.
5.

Once the pistons are removed, use a pick to carefully
remove the square O-rings from the caliper. O-rings should
be replaced during caliper service.

Remove

Caliper Disassembly
1.

Remove both brake pads from the caliper (see “FRONT
BRAKE PADS - Pad Removal”).

Remove mount bracket assembly and dust boots.

9.11

BRAKES
6.

Clean the caliper body, piston, and retaining bracket with
brake cleaner or alcohol.

Inspect piston for nicks, scratches, pitting or wear. Measure
piston diameter and replace if damaged or worn beyond
service limit.

Clean
Components

NOTE: Be sure to clean seal grooves in caliper
body.

= In. / mm.

Caliper Inspection
1.

Inspect caliper body for nicks, scratches, pitting or wear.
Measure bore size and compare to specifications. Replace
if damaged or worn beyond service limit.

Front Caliper Piston O.D.:
Std: 1.370” (34.80 mm)
Service Limit: 1.368” (34.75 mm)
3.

Inspect the brake disc and pads as outlined in this chapter.

Caliper Assembly
1.

Install new O-rings in the caliper body. Be sure the
grooves are clean and free of residue or brakes may drag
upon assembly.

Seal
Grooves

= In. / mm.

New
O-Rings

Front Caliper Piston Bore I.D.:
Std: 1.373” (34.87 mm)
Service Limit: 1.375” (34.93 mm)
2.

9.12

Coat pistons with clean Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid. Install
pistons with a twisting motion while pushing inward.
Piston should slide in and out of bore smoothly, with light
resistance.

BRAKES
3.

Lubricate the mounting bracket pins with Polaris Premium
All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and install the rubber
dust seal boots.

Torque the banjo bolt to the proper torque specification.

Apply Grease to Each
Bracket Pin

15 ft. lbs.
(20 Nm)

4.
4.

Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the dust seal
boots are fully seated. Install the brake pads. Clean the disc
and pads with brake parts cleaner or denatured alcohol to
remove any dirt, oil or grease.

Install the adjustment set screw and turn clockwise until
stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2 turn
(counterclockwise).

Caliper Installation
1.

Install the brake line onto the caliper taking care not to
allow any debris to enter the caliper.

Install the caliper and torque the mounting bolts to
specification.

1/2 Turn

Perform brake bleeding procedure as outlined earlier in this
chapter.

Install wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification.

=T
31-34 ft. lbs.
(42-46 Nm)

=T
Front Caliper Mount Bolt Torque:
31-34 ft. lbs. (42-46 Nm)

Wheel Nuts:
Steel Wheels: 35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)
Aluminum Wheels: 30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)
7.

Field test unit for proper braking action before putting into
service. Inspect for fluid leaks and firm brakes. Make sure
the brake is not dragging when pedal is released. If the brake
drags, re-check assembly and installation.

NOTE: If new pads are installed, refer to “FRONT
BRAKE PADS - Brake Burnishing Procedure”.

9.13

BRAKES
FRONT BRAKE DISC
Brake Disc Thickness
New .188” (4.78 mm)
Service Limit .170” (4.32 mm)

Disc Runout
1.

Mount dial indicator as shown to measure disc runout.
Slowly rotate the disc and read total runout on the dial
indicator. Replace the disc if runout exceeds specification.

Brake Disc Thickness Variance
Service Limit: .002” (.051 mm)
difference between measurements

Disc Replacement
1.

Remove the front brake caliper (see “FRONT CALIPER
SERVICE”).

Remove wheel hub cotter pin, castle nut and washers.

Remove the wheel hub assembly from the vehicle and
remove the (4) bolts retaining the disc to the hub.
(4) Bolts

Cotter
Pin
Washers

Brake Disc Runout
Service Limit .010” (.254 mm)
Disc Inspection
1.

Nut

Visually inspect disc for scoring, scratches, or gouges.
Replace the disc if any deep scratches are evident.

Clean the wheel hub mating surface and install new disc on
wheel hub.

Use a 0-1” micrometer and measure the disc thickness at
eight different points around the pad contact surface.
Replace disc if worn beyond service limit.

Install new bolts and torque to 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm).

Measure
Thickness

Front
Disc

9.14

18 ft. lbs.
(24 Nm)

BRAKES
CAUTION
Always use new brake disc mounting bolts. The
bolts have a pre-applied locking agent which is
destroyed upon removal.
6.

REAR BRAKE PADS
Pad Removal
1.

Elevate and support rear of vehicle.

CAUTION

Install wheel hub assembly, washers, and castle nut. Torque
castle nut to 80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm) and install a new cotter pin.

Use care when supporting vehicle so that it
does not tip or fall.
Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls.

Install the front brake caliper (see “FRONT CALIPER
SERVICE”).

Follow bleeding procedure outlined earlier in this chapter.

Remove the rear wheel.

Loosen pad adjuster screw 2-3 turns.

Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and lift caliper off
the brake disc.

NOTE: When removing caliper, be careful not to
damage brake line. Support caliper so as not to kink
or bend brake line.

9.15

BRAKES
5.

Push caliper piston into the caliper bore slowly using a Cclamp or locking pliers with pads installed.

Pad Inspection
1.

Clean the caliper with brake cleaner or alcohol.

Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace pads if
worn beyond the service limit.

Measure
Thickness
NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced through
compensating port into master cylinder fluid
reservoir when piston is pushed back into caliper.
Remove excess fluid from reservoir as required.
6.

Rear Brake Pad Thickness
New .298” ± .007” (7.57 mm ± .178 mm)
Service Limit .180” (4.6 mm)

Push caliper mounting bracket inward and slip outer brake
pad past the edge to remove.

Pad Assembly / Installation

Lubricate mounting bracket pins with a light film of
Polaris Premium All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and
install rubber dust boots.

Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust boots are
fully seated. Install pads with friction material facing each
other.

Remove the inner brake pad.

WARNING
If brake pads are contaminated with grease,
oil, or liquid soaked do not use the pads.
Use only new clean pads.

9.16

BRAKES
3.

Install caliper and torque mounting bolts to specification.
18 ft. lbs.
(24 Nm)

=T
Rear Caliper Mount Bolt Torque:
18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm)
4.

Slowly pump the brake pedal until pressure has been built
up. Maintain at least 1/2, (12.7 mm) of brake fluid in the
reservoir to prevent air from entering the brake system.

Install the adjustment set screw and turn clockwise until the
stationary pad contacts the disc, then back off 1/2 turn.

Verify fluid level in reservoir is up to the MAX line inside
reservoir and install reservoir cap.

Master Cylinder Fluid
Up to MAX line inside reservoir
7.

Install wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification.

Wheel Nuts:
Steel Wheels: 35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)
Aluminum Wheels: 30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)

Brake Burnishing Procedure
It is required that a burnishing procedure be performed after
installation of new brake pads to extend service life and reduce
noise.
Start machine and slowly increase speed to 30 mph. Gradually
apply brakes to stop machine. Allow pads and disc to cool
sufficiently during the procedure. Do not allow pads or disc to
become hot or warping may result. Repeat this procedure 10
times.

9.17

BRAKES
REAR CALIPER SERVICE
Caliper Exploded View
Apply Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid
to Component

D
47 in. lbs.
(5.3 Nm)

Apply Polaris All Purpose
Grease

A. Brake Pad
B. Mount Bracket
C. Piston
D. Caliper Assy.
E. Square Ring (thick)
F. Square Ring (thin)
G. Boot, Pin Bushing
H. Boot, Pin Seal
I. Bleeder Screw
K. Set Screw

H
E

F
C

Caliper Removal
1.

Elevate and safely support the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not
tip or fall. Severe injury may occur.
2.

Remove the (4) wheel nuts and rear wheel.

Clean caliper area before removal.

Place a container below the caliper to catch the brake fluid
when removing the line. Remove brake line from caliper.
Remove
Brake Line

9.18

Loosen the brake pad adjustment set screw to allow brake
pad removal after the caliper is removed.

Remove the two caliper mounting bolts and remove the
caliper.
Remove

BRAKES
Caliper Disassembly

Caliper Inspection

Remove brake pad adjustment set screw (K).

Push upper pad retainer pin inward and slip brake pads past
the edge and remove from the caliper.

Remove mounting bracket (B) and dust boots (G) and (H).

Inspect caliper body for nicks, scratches or wear. Measure
bore size and compare to specifications. Replace if damage
is evident or if worn beyond service limit.

D
G

K
Pads
H

E F

C
B

= In. / mm.

Using a hammer and a small punch, remove the piston (C)
from the caliper body (D). Remove the square O-rings (E)
and (F) from the caliper body (D).

Rear Caliper Piston Bore I.D.:
Standard: 1.505” (38.23 mm)
Service Limit: 1.507” (38.28 mm)
2.

Inspect piston for nicks, scratches, wear or damage.
Measure diameter and replace if damaged or worn beyond
service limit.

Clean the caliper body, piston, and retaining bracket with
brake cleaner or alcohol.

NOTE: Be sure to clean seal grooves in caliper
body.

Clean Components

= In. / mm.
Rear Caliper Piston O.D.:
Standard: 1.500” (38.10 mm)
Service Limit: 1.498” (38.05 mm)
3.

Inspect the brake disc and pads as outlined in this chapter.

9.19

BRAKES
Caliper Assembly

Caliper Installation

Install new caliper seals (A) in the caliper body (B). Be
sure groove is clean and free of residue or brakes may drag
upon assembly.

Install the rear caliper with the mounting bolts. Torque
mounting bolts to specification.
18 ft. lbs.
(24 Nm)

A
2.

Coat piston with clean Polaris DOT 4 Brake Fluid (PN
2872189). Install piston (D) with a twisting motion while
pushing inward. Piston should slide in and out of bore
smoothly with light resistance.
Lubricate the mounting bracket pins with Polaris Premium
All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and install the rubber
dust seal boots.

=T
Rear Caliper Mount Bolt Torque:
18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm)
2.

Install brake line banjo bolt and torque to specification.
15 ft. lbs.
(21 Nm)

Install the pad adjustment screw and turn until stationary
pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2 turn.

Follow bleeding procedure outlined earlier in this chapter.

Install wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification.

Polaris Premium All Season Grease
(PN 2871423)
4.

Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the dust
seals are fully seated. Install the brake pads. Clean the disc
and pads with brake parts cleaner or denatured alcohol to
remove any dirt, oil or grease.

=T
Wheel Nuts:
Steel Wheels: 35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm)
Aluminum Wheels: 30 ft. lbs. + 90° (1/4 turn)
NOTE: If new pads are installed, refer to “REAR
BRAKE PADS - Brake Burnishing Procedure”.

9.20

BRAKES
REAR BRAKE DISC

Disc Replacement

Disc Inspection

Remove rear brake caliper (see “REAR CALIPER
SERVICE”).

Visually inspect disc for scoring, scratches, or gouges.
Replace the disc if any deep scratches are evident.

Remove wheel hub cotter pin, castle nut and washers.

3.
2.

Use a 0-1” micrometer and measure the disc thickness at
eight different points around the pad contact surface.
Replace disc if worn beyond service limit.

Remove the hub assembly from the vehicle and remove the
(4) bolts retaining the disc to the hub.
(4) Bolts

Cotter
Pin
Front
View

Side
View

Measure
Thickness

Brake Disc Thickness
New: .188” (4.78 mm)
Service Limit: .170” (4.32 mm)

Washers

Nut
4.

Clean the wheel hub mating surface and install new disc on
wheel hub.

Install new bolts and torque to 28 ft. lbs. (38 Nm).
28 ft. lbs.
(38 Nm)

Brake Disc Thickness Variance
Service Limit .002” (.051 mm)
difference between measurements
3.

Mount a dial indicator and measure disc runout. Slowly
rotate the disc and read total runout on the dial indicator.
Replace the disc if runout exceeds specifications.

CAUTION

Brake Disc Runout
Service Limit .010” (.254 mm)

Always use new brake disc mounting bolts. The
bolts have a pre-applied locking agent which is
destroyed upon removal.
6.

Install wheel hub assembly, washers, and castle nut. Torque
castle nut to 80 ft. lbs. (108 Nm) and install a new cotter pin.

Install rear caliper (see “REAR CALIPER SERVICE”).
Follow bleeding procedure outlined earlier in this chapter.

9.21

BRAKES
TROUBLESHOOTING
Brakes Squeal / Poor Brake Performance
• Air in system
• Water in system (brake fluid contaminated)
• Caliper or disc misaligned
• Caliper dirty or damaged
• Brake line damaged or lining ruptured
• Worn disc and/or friction pads
• Incorrectly adjusted stationary pad
• Worn or damaged master cylinder or components
• Damaged break pad noise insulator
• Brake pads dragging
• Brake caliper dragging

Pedal Vibration
• Disc damaged
• Disc worn (runout or thickness variance exceeds
service limit)

Caliper Overheats (Brakes Drag)
• Compensating port plugged
• Pad clearance set incorrectly
• Brake pedal binding or unable to return fully
• Residue build up under caliper seals
• Operator riding brakes

Brakes Lock
• Alignment of caliper to disc
• Caliper pistons sticking
• Improper assembly of brake system components

9.22

ELECTRICAL

CHAPTER 10
ELECTRICAL
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
ELECTRICAL SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
UNDER-DASH COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3

SWITCHES / CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3
HEADLAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
IGNITION KEY SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
AWD / 2WD / TURF SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
BLACKOUT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
I.R. LIGHT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
WINCH SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
TRANSMISSION (GEAR POSITION) SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
SPEED SENSOR LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
SPEED SENSOR TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7

REAR DIFFERENTIAL SOLENOID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
DIFFERENTIAL SOLENOID OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
DIFFERENTIAL SOLENOID CIRCUIT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
RIDER INFORMATION DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
INFORMATION DISPLAY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
DIAGNOSTIC MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PINOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14

ALL WHEEL DRIVE COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
DIAGNOSING SYSTEM FAILURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15

HEAD LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15
HEADLAMP BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
HEADLAMP HOUSING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
HEADLAMP HOUSING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16

TAIL / BRAKE LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
BULB REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17

COOLING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18
COOLING SYSTEM BREAK-OUT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18
FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPERATION / TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT BYPASS TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19

EFI DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19

EFI COMPONENT TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19

FUEL SENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19

FUSE BOX: FUSES / RELAYS / CIRCUIT BREAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
OVERVIEW / OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
RELAY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21

10.1

ELECTRICAL
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.22
CURRENT DRAW - KEY OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.22
CHARGING SYSTEM “BREAK EVEN” TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.22
CHARGING SYSTEM ALTERNATOR TESTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.23
REGULATOR / RECTIFIER TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.25

BATTERY SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
BATTERY SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
GENERAL BATTERY INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
BATTERY REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
BATTERY OFF SEASON STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
BATTERY TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
OCV - OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.27
LOAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.27
BATTERY CONDUCTANCE ANALYZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.27
CHARGING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.28

STARTING SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.28
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.28
VOLTAGE DROP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.29
STARTER MOTOR REMOVAL / DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.29
BRUSH INSPECTION / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.29
ARMATURE TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.30
STARTER REASSEMBLY / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.31
STARTER DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.32
STARTER SOLENOID BENCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.32
STARTER SOLENOID OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.32
STARTER EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.33

STARTING SYSTEM TESTING FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.34

10.2

ELECTRICAL
GENERAL INFORMATION

Under-Dash Components

Special Tools

The following switches and components can be accessed
underneath the instrument / dash panel:

Part Number

• Speedometer

Tool Description

PV-43568

Fluke™ 77 Digital Multimeter

PV-43526

Connector Test Kit

2870630

Timing Light

• Speedometer Mode Switch
• Digital Wrench Diagnostic Connector

PU-50338

• Digital Wrench / ECU Reflash 9 Vdc Battery Plug
• AWD Switch

Battery Hydrometer

• Headlamp Switch

2460761

Hall Effect Sensor Probe Harness

• 12 Vdc Accessory Power Point

2871745

Static Timing Light Harness

• Ignition Switch

Digital Wrench™ (see Chapter 4)

• Fuse / Relay Panel

Electrical Service Notes
Keep the following notes in mind when diagnosing an electrical
problem:
• Refer to wiring diagram for stator and electrical
component resistance specifications.

SWITCHES / CONTROLS
Brake Light Switch
1.

• When measuring resistance of a component that has a
resistance value under 10 Ohms, remember to subtract
meter lead resistance from the reading. Connect the
leads together and record the resistance. The resistance
of the component is equal to tested value minus the lead
resistance.

PVT Cover

• Become familiar with the operation of your meter. Be
sure leads are in the proper jack for the test being
performed (i.e. 10A jack for current readings). Refer to
the Owner’s Manual included with your meter for more
information.
• Voltage, amperage, and resistance values included in
this manual are obtained with a Fluke™ 77 Digital
Multimeter (PV-43568). This meter is used when
diagnosing electrical problems. Readings obtained with
other meters may differ.

Brake Switch

• Pay attention to the prefix on the multimeter reading (K,
M, etc.) and the position of the decimal point.
• For resistance readings, isolate the component to be
tested. Disconnect it from the wiring harness or power
supply.

The brake switch can be accessed by removing the driver’s
seat. The switch is located under the outer PVT cover
along the lower frame. The brake pressure switch is
installed into the cross fitting block.

Disconnect wire harness from switch and connect an
ohmmeter across switch contacts. The reading should be
infinite (OL).
Apply the brake and check for continuity. If there is no
continuity or if resistance is greater than .5 ohms, clean the
switch terminals. Re-test and replace switch if necessary.

10.3

ELECTRICAL
Headlamp Switch

Ignition Key Switch

Disconnect the headlamp switch harness by depressing the
connector locks and pulling on the connector. Do not pull
on the wiring.

Disconnect the key switch harness by lifting the connector
lock and pulling on the connector. Do not pull on the
wiring.

Test between the 3 sets of outputs (OFF / LOW / HIGH).
If any of the tests fail, replace headlamp switch assembly.

Test between the 3 sets of outputs (OFF / ON / START). If
any of the tests fail, replace ignition switch assembly.

• Move the switch to HIGH. There should be continuity
between switch pins 2 and 3; 5 and 6.

• Turn the ignition key to ON. There should be continuity
between switch pins C and D; A and F.

• Move the switch to LOW. There should be continuity
between switch pins 2 and 3; 4 and 5.

• Turn the ignition key to START. There should be
continuity between switch pins A and B; C and D.

• Move the switch to OFF. There should be continuity
between switch pins 1 and 2; 4 and 5.

NOTE: Pins 7 and 8 provide power and ground to
light the switch lamp.

10.4

ELECTRICAL
AWD / 2WD / TURF Switch

Blackout Switch

Disconnect the AWD / 2WD / TURF switch harness by
depressing the connector locks and pulling on the
connector. Do not pull on the wiring.

Disconnect the blackout switch harness by depressing the
connector locks and pulling on the connector. Do not pull
on the wiring.

Test between the 3 sets of outputs (AWD / 2WD / TURF).
If any of the tests fail, replace the switch assembly.

Test between the 2 sets of outputs (OFF / ON). If any of the
tests fail, replace the blackout switch assembly.

• Move the switch to AWD. There should be continuity
between switch pins 2 and 3.

• Move the switch to ON (POS 1). There should be
continuity between switch pins 2 and 3.

• Move the switch to 2WD. There should be no
continuity between any pins.

• Move the switch to OFF (POS 3). There should be
continuity between switch pins 1 and 2.

• Move the switch to TURF. There should be continuity
between switch pins 1 and 2.

NOTE: Pins 7 and 8 provide power and ground to
light the switch lamp.

10.5

ELECTRICAL
I.R. Light Switch

Winch Switch

Disconnect the I.R. light switch harness by depressing the
connector locks and pulling on the connector. Do not pull
on the wiring.

Disconnect the winch switch harness by depressing the
connector locks and pulling on the connector. Do not pull
on the wiring.

Test between the 2 sets of outputs (OFF / ON). If any of the
tests fail, replace the light switch assembly.

Test between the 2 sets of outputs (OUT / IN). If any of the
tests fail, replace the winch switch assembly.

• Move the switch to ON (POS 1). There should be
continuity between switch pins 2 and 3.

• Move the switch to OUT. There should be continuity
between switch pins 2 and 3.

• Move the switch to OFF (POS 3). There should be no
continuity between any pins.

• Move the switch to IN. There should be continuity
between switch pins 1 and 2.

NOTE: Pins 7 and 8 provide power and ground to
light the switch lamp.

10.6

ELECTRICAL
Transmission (Gear Position) Switch

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Speed Sensor Location

Disconnect the transmission switch harness by lifting the
connector lock and pulling on the connector. Do not pull
on the wiring.

The speed sensor is located in the transmission transfer case
cover and can be accessed through the rear LH wheel well area.

Test the transmission switch continuity readings for each
gear position and compare to the specification table below.

Speed Sensor

Speed Sensor Testing
Special Tools Required:
Static Timing Light Harness (PN 2871745)
Hall Sensor Probe Harness (PN 2460761)

Gear Position

Resistance Value
when measured at
terminals A and B

HIGH

620 

LOW

300 

NEU

160 

REV

75 

PARK

24 

Disconnect the 3 wire harness from the speed sensor and
remove the sensor from the transmission.

Connect the wires from the Static Timing Light Harness to
the sensor 3 pin connector using the Hall Sensor Probe
Harness (PN 2460761).

Pass a screwdriver back and forth in front of the sensor tip.

Be sure connections are good and 9V battery is in good
condition. If the light flashes, the sensor is good.

10.7

ELECTRICAL
REAR DIFFERENTIAL SOLENOID
Differential Solenoid Overview
The differential solenoid is located on the rear gear case. The
solenoid actuates an engagement dog, which locks and unlocks
the rear differential. Refer to Chapter 7 for more information on
the rear differential mechanical operation.

Differential Solenoid Circuit Operation
The Rear Diff Solenoid Relay is attached to the rear plastic LH
panel divider behind the driver’s seat.
When the switch is pushed to activate “TURF”, a ground signal
is provided to the ECU from the AWD / 2WD / TURF Switch.
Depending on engine speed and gear position criteria, the ECU
energizes the Rear Diff Solenoid Relay allowing it to enable the
differential solenoid.
If the rear differential fails to switch from operational modes:
• Check the solenoid and relay connectors. Look for
loose wires or bad connections.
• Check for power from the relay connector, to ensure the
solenoid has power to be activated.
• Check the AWD / 2WD / TURF Switch wires for loose
connections.
• Remove solenoid from rear differential and ensure the
solenoid plunger is actuating.

CAUTION
Do not power the solenoid with 12 Volts for more
than 1 second, or damage may occur to solenoid.

10.8

ELECTRICAL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Overview
The instrument cluster displays critical vehicle information to the user. Reference the following page for display functions and
descriptions.

NOTE: Some features are not applicable to all models.
IMPORTANT: The use of a high pressure washer may damage the instrument cluster. Wash the vehicle by hand
or with a garden hose using mild soap. Certain products, including insect repellents and chemicals, will damage
the instrument cluster lens. Do not use alcohol to clean the instrument cluster. Do not allow insect sprays to
contact the lens. Immediately clean off any gasoline that splashes on the instrument cluster.

10.9

ELECTRICAL
Rider Information Display

12. Neutral Gear Indicator - LED icon illuminates when gear
selector is in the neutral (N) position.

The rider information display is located in the instrument
cluster. All segments will light up for 1 second at start-up.

13. Gear Position Indicator - Displays gear selector position.

NOTE: If the instrument cluster fails to illuminate:

H = High

• A battery over-voltage may have occurred and
the instrument cluster may have shut off to
protect the electronic speedometer.
• The Blackout Switch may be turned on.
1.

Vehicle Speed Display - Analog display of vehicle speed
in MPH or km/h.
Information Display Area - Odometer / Trip Meter /
Tachometer / Engine Temperature / Engine Hours /
Service Info / Clock - LCD display of the service hour
interval, total vehicle miles or km., total engine hours, a trip
meter, engine RPM and engine temperature.
MPH / KM/H Display - MPH is displayed when the
instrument cluster is in the Standard mode. KM/H is
displayed when the instrument cluster is in the Metric
mode.

High Beam Indicator LED icon illuminates whenever the
Headlamp switch is in the high beam position.

Fuel Level Indicator - LCD bar graph indicating current
fuel level. All segments will flash when the last segment is
cleared indicating a low fuel warning.

Clock - Displays current time in either 12-hour or 24-hour
formats.

Engine Temperature Indicator - LED icon illuminates
when the ECM determines the engine is overheating. The
indicators will initially flash to indicate the engine is
overheating. The indicators will stay lit and not flash if a
severe overheating condition exists.

Service Interval Indicator - Preset at the factory and
adjustable by the user, a flashing wrench symbol alerts the
operator that the preset service interval has been reached
and maintenance should be performed. The wrench icon
will flash for 10 seconds upon start-up once it reaches 0.

Check Engine MIL - Illuminated when the ECM has
detected a Diagnostic Trouble Code in the engine
management system.

10. AWD Indicator - Illuminated when the AWD / TURF
switch is in the AWD position.
11. TURF Indicator - Illuminated when the AWD / TURF
switch is in the TURF position.

10.10

L = Low
N = Neutral
R = Reverse
P = Park
-- = Gear Signal Error (shifter stuck between gears)
14. Power Steering System MIL - LED icon illuminates when
a fault has occurred with the power steering system. This
indicator illuminates when the key is turned to the ON
position and goes off when the engine is started.
15. Turn Signal / Hazard Lamp Indicator - LED icon
illuminates whenever the LH, RH or hazard lamps are
activated.
16. Helmet / Seat Belt Indicator - LED icon illuminates for
several seconds when the key is turned to the ON position.
The lamp is a reminder to the operator to ensure all riders
are wearing helmets and seat belts before operating the
vehicle.

Information Display Area
The LCD portion of the instrument cluster is the information
display area. Information displayed in this area includes:
odometer, trip meter, engine RPM, engine hours, service
interval, clock, engine Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
power steering DTCs.
Odometer

The odometer records and displays the total distance traveled by
the vehicle. The odometer can not be reset.

ELECTRICAL
Trip Meter

Engine Hours

The trip meter records the miles traveled by the vehicle on each
trip. To reset the trip meter:

Engine hours are logged anytime the engine is running. Total
hours can not be reset.

Toggle the MODE button to TRIP 1.

Programmed Service Interval

To reset to 0, push and hold the MODE button until the
distance display changes to 0.

Tachometer (RPM)

The initial factory service interval setting is 50 hours. Each time
the engine is started, the engine hours are subtracted from the
service interval hours. When the service interval reaches 0, the
LCD wrench icon will flash for approximately 10 seconds each
time the engine is started.
Engine RPM can be displayed digitally.
Engine Temperature

To change the hour setting or reset the function, follow these
steps:
1.

Toggle the MODE button until the wrench icon is
displayed in the information area.

Press and hold the MODE button until the information
display area begins to flash.

Toggle the MODE button to increase the service interval
hours in 5 hour increments to a maximum of 100 hours.

To turn off the service interval function, toggle the MODE
button until “OFF” is displayed.

Engine temperature can be displayed in Fahrenheit or Celsius.
Refer to “Units of Measurement” to change the format.

10.11

ELECTRICAL
Clock

Units of Measurement
Standard Display

Metric Display

Distance

Miles (MPH)

Kilometers (KM/H)

Time

12-Hour Clock

24-Hour Clock

Temperature Fahrenheit

Celsius

To change between Standard and Metric units of measurement,
follow these steps:

The clock displays the time in a 12-hour or 24-hour format.
Refer to “Units of Measurement” to change the format
(Standard 12-hour / Metric-24 hour). To set the clock, follow
these steps:
1.

Toggle the MODE button until the odometer is displayed.

Press and hold the MODE button until the hour segment
flashes. Release the button

With the segment flashing, tap the MODE button to
advance to the desired setting.

Press and hold the MODE button until the next segment
flashes. Release the button.

Repeat steps 3-4 twice to set the 10 minute and 1 minute
segments. After completing the 1-minute segment, step 4
will save the new settings and exit the clock mode.

10.12

Turn the key to the OFF position.

Press and hold the MODE button while turning the key to
the ON position.

When the display flashes the distance setting, tap the
MODE button to advance to the desired setting.

Press and hold the MODE button to save the setting and
advance to the next display option.

Repeat the procedure to change remaining display settings.

ELECTRICAL
Under / Over Voltage

Diagnostic Mode

This warning usually indicates that the vehicle is operating at an
RPM too low to keep the battery charged. It may also occur
when the engine is at idle and a high electrical load is applied
(lights, cooling fan or other accessories).

The diagnostic mode is accessible only when the check engine
MIL has been activated.

If battery voltage drops below 11 volts, a warning screen will
display “Lo” and provide the present battery voltage. If voltage
drops below 8.5 volts, LCD backlighting and icons will turn off.

If the trouble code(s) are not displayed, use the MODE
button to toggle until “CK ENG” displays on the
information display area.

Press and hold the MODE button to enter the diagnostics
code menu.

A set of three numbers will appear in the information area.

If battery voltage rises above 16 volts, a warning screen will
display “OV” and provide the present battery voltage. If voltage
rises above 16.5 volts, LCD backlighting and icons will turn off.

• The first number (located far left) can range from 0 to 9.
This number represents the total number of trouble code
present (example: 2 means there are 3 codes present).
• The second number (located top right) can be 2 to 6
digits in length. This number equates to the suspected
area of fault (SPN).
• The third number (located bottom right) can be 1 to 2
digits in length. This number equates to the fault mode
(FMI).

10.13

ELECTRICAL
4.

Use the trouble code reference table in the EFI Chapter for
a description of each code.

If more than one code exists, press the MODE button to
advance to the next trouble code.

To exit the diagnostic mode, press and hold the MODE
button or turn the ignition key OFF once the codes are
recorded.

Push the instrument cluster out from the back side of the
dash while securely holding the dash and rubber mount.
Push Instrument
Cluster Outward

Dash Panel

NOTE: If there is a diagnostic problem with the
power steering system, the power steering MIL will
illuminate and blink in place of the check engine MIL.

Instrument Cluster Pinouts
Rubber Mount

Bezel

Instrument Cluster

NOTE: Do not remove the rubber mount from the
dash panel. Only remove the rubber mount if
necessary. The bezel is a snap-on assembly and is a
serviceable part.
FUNCTION

CAN High

CAN Low

Switched Power (Vdc)

Constant Power (Vdc)

Ground

Turn Signal Input, LH

Turn Signal Input, RH

High Beam Input

Fuel Level Sensor

Blackout Mode

Instrument Cluster Installation
1.

Spray a soap and water mixture onto the outer surface area
of the instrument cluster. This will help the instrument
cluster slide into the rubber mount more easily.

Be sure the rubber mount inside the dash is fully installed
and that the indexing key on the rubber mount is lined up
with the keyway in the dash.

Hold the dash securely and insert the instrument cluster into
the dash. Twist the instrument cluster gently in a clockwise
motion to properly seat the instrument cluster into the
rubber mount. Apply pressure on the bezel while pressing
down on the instrument cluster.

Instrument Cluster Removal
NOTE: Do not allow alcohol or petroleum products
to come in contact with the instrument cluster lens.
1.

Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back side
of the instrument cluster.

10.14

ELECTRICAL
ALL WHEEL DRIVE COIL

HEAD LIGHTS

Operation Overview

Headlight Adjustment

• When the AWD switch is “ON”, 12 VDC power is
present at the hub coil.

The headlight beam is adjustable.
1.

Place the vehicle on a level surface with the headlight
approximately 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a wall.

Measure the distance from the floor to the center of the
headlight and make a mark on the wall at the same height.

With the machine in Park, start the engine and turn the
headlight switch to on.

The most intense part of the headlight beam should be
aimed 8 in. (20 cm) below the mark placed on the wall in
Step 2.

• If the criteria is met, the instrument cluster provides a
ground path at pin #16 (brown/white wire). When this
occurs the AWD icon should display in the instrument
cluster.
• The AWD system must be grounded to operate.

Diagnosing System Failures
• Verify the AWD switch is functional and that a
minimum of 11 volts is present at the hub coil.
• Verify the AWD hub coil is functional. Test the AWD
hub coil using an ohm meter. See specifications below:

7HVW5HVLVWDQFH
5HDGLQJVVKRXOGEH
*
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.6
Linearized : Yes
Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res
Page Mode : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702
Format : application/pdf
Creator : SDHOFFM
Title : 9922720_RZR_800.book
Create Date : 2010:07:28 16:47:14Z
Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.2
Modify Date : 2010:08:06 13:16:13-05:00
Metadata Date : 2010:08:06 13:16:13-05:00
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.3.0 (Windows)
Document ID : uuid:cac8c974-14ac-42d9-b9ba-fac62c54d356
Instance ID : uuid:0afa5bb5-e5ff-41cf-8fa4-d61a1337f3d6
Has XFA : No
Page Count : 346
Page Layout : SinglePage
Author : SDHOFFM

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

9922720_RZR_800 2011 Polaris Ranger RZR SW Service Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation